JP6762273B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines, arrange ball machines, and slot machines.

The pachinko machine has an outer frame that can be attached to the island equipment, a front frame that can be opened and closed on the front side of the outer frame and a game board, and a game board that can be opened and closed on the front side of the front frame. It is equipped with a front door having a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized. At the lower part of the front door, a lower unit such as a plate unit protruding to the front side and a firing handle for launching operation are provided. Further, the lower side of the lower horizontal frame member of the outer frame is a self-supporting support portion, and the pachinko machine can be self-supported by grounding the self-supporting support portion on the floor surface (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-226309

In the conventional pachinko machine, the pachinko machine is made independent by grounding the support part for independence on the floor surface, and the lower unit protruding from the front door to the front side is not used as a part for independence. It had the drawback of lacking time stability.
Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, the bottom of a lower unit such as a plate unit is substantially flat, so when inserting a receiving box under the lower unit and pulling out the game ball in the lower plate into the receiving box, There is a drawback that the bottom wall side of the Ubu unit becomes an obstacle, making it difficult to perform operations such as breaking the swelling of the game ball in the receiving box.
In view of such conventional problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving convenience when the game machine body is self-supporting and when a game ball is taken out from a receiving box.

According to the present invention, in a game machine in which a lower unit and a launch handle projecting from the lower side to the front side of the game machine main body are provided on the left and right, and the lower unit is provided with a ball storage portion, the lower unit is more than the launch handle. The posterior inclined bottom portion arranged at a low position and the anterior inclined bottom portion inclined forward from the vicinity of the front end of the rear side bottom portion to the anterior upper portion in front of the launch handle are provided, and the anterior inclined bottom portion is the launching portion. be grounded at the front side than the handle, the ground contact portion of the gaming machine main body, the firing handle is obtained by allowing supporting the gaming machine body anteversion self-supporting without grounding.
The game machine main body includes an outer frame and a front frame pivotally attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. The front frame includes the lower unit and the launch handle, and the outer frame is the front side. or it may have the grounding portion supporting the game machine main body tilted forward self-supporting with the inclined bottom.

According to the present invention, there is an advantage that convenience can be improved.

It is an overall front view of the pachinko machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a plan sectional view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the front part of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the rear part of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear part of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the image display area of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the image display area of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the hit probability and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol for each game state of the pachinko machine, and the opening / closing pattern of the 2nd special symbol starting means. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation of the jackpot determination random value, the jackpot symbol random value, the jackpot state and the special game state in the case of the jackpot determination and the miss determination about the 1st and 2nd special symbols of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production design of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the holding pedestal image, the holding display image, and the changing hold image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the left-handed guidance image and the right-handed guidance image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error notification image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume adjustable notification image and the light amount adjustable notification image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume setting image and the light amount setting image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the customer waiting effect processing of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the menu management process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process at the time of pressing the effect button of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process at the time of pressing the upper key (lower key) of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the menu displayable notification image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the menu image and the menu operation notification image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower menu image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of selecting the selection item which does not exist in the lower menu of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the movable body in each mode of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the power saving mode notification image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) in the customer waiting state of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relationship (b) between each image and the area on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) at the time of menu display of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relationship (b) between each image and the area on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) during normal fluctuation of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relationship (b) between each image and the area on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) during the reach variation of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relationship (b) between each image and the area on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) during the step-up notice production of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relationship (b) between each image and the area on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) of the button conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relationship (b) between each image and the area on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) at the time of the effect button operation in the button conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relationship (b) between each image and the area on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) of the 1st stage in the mini character notice production of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relation (b) of each image and the area on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the image display example (a) of the 2nd stage in the mini-character notice production of the pachinko machine, and the correspondence relation (b) of each image and the area on a display screen. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a plan sectional view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a plan view (a) and a front view (b) of the tilting movable effect means of the pachinko machine. It is a top view (a) and the front view (b) of the elevating movable effect means of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the operation pattern of the movable body of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko machine. It is a conceptual block diagram of the image transformation processing of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the image rotation processing of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the image rotation processing of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the change of the movable body and the display image at the time of execution of the tilt notice effect of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation information of each image at the time of execution of the tilt notice effect of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the change of the display image when a door opening error or a volume change operation is performed during execution of a tilting notice effect by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation information of each image at the time of execution of the tilt descent notice effect of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation information of each image at the time of execution of the tilt descent notice effect of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the change of the movable body and the display image when the tilt notice effect is executed at the start of a symbol change by the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation information of each image at the time of executing the tilt notice effect at the start of a symbol variation by the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation history of a movable body and each image at the time of executing a tilt notice effect at the start of a symbol variation by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the change of the movable body and the display image when the tilt descent notice effect is executed at the start of a symbol variation by the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation information of each image when the tilt descent notice effect is executed at the start of a symbol variation by the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation history of a movable body and each image at the time of executing the tilt descent notice effect at the start of a symbol variation by the pachinko machine. For the movable body and display image (a) when the slingshot effect is performed while waiting for customers with the pachinko machine, the display priority and deformation information (b) of each image displayed on the image display means, and the sub image display means. It is a figure which shows the display priority and transformation information (c) of each displayed image. Movable body and display image (a) when a menu display operation is performed during execution of tilting effect on the pachinko machine, display priority and deformation information (b) of each image displayed on the image display means, sub-image display It is a figure which shows the display priority and transformation information (c) of each image displayed on a means. It is an overall front view of the pachinko machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a plan sectional view of the part including the front frame and the game board. It is a plan sectional view of the part including the front frame, the game board and the joint part. It is a vertical sectional view of the upper side including the front frame and the game board. It is a vertical sectional view of the lower side including the front frame and the game board. It is a front view of the lower mounting part side of the front frame. It is a front view of the game board. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a perspective view of the back side of the game board. It is a plan sectional view of the part including the front frame, the game board and the movable effect means. It is a front view of the part including the mounting frame and the movable effect means. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable effect means. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the central display frame. It is a front view of the stage part of the game board. It is a plan sectional view of the central display frame. It is a vertical sectional view of the central display frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the mounting frame and a harness cradle. It is a rear view of the mounting frame and the harness cradle. It is a plan sectional view of the part including the game board and the main control board case. It is a plan sectional view of the part including the game board and a harness cradle. It is sectional drawing of the image display means. It is a rear view of the image display means. It is explanatory drawing of the mounting process of the game board. It is explanatory drawing of the display area of the image display means. It is explanatory drawing of the mounting process of the image display means. It is a rear view of the game board which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the back side of the game board. It is a perspective view of the back side of the game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the mounting frame and the side board mounting base. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the part including the game board, the image display means, and the effect control board case. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the part including the game board, the image display means, and the side board mounting base. It is a cross-sectional view of the part including the game board and the upper guide rail. It is a cross-sectional view of the part including the game board and the image display means. It is a cross-sectional view of the part including the game board, the image display means, and the effect control board case. It is a cross-sectional view of the image display means. It is a perspective view of the image display means. It is a cross-sectional view of the harness cradle part. It is a rear view of the harness cradle part. It is sectional drawing of the attachment state of the fastener for the harness. It is sectional drawing of the main part of the display means mounting part. It is a cross-sectional view of the pushing means. It is a rear view of the mounting frame and the image display means. It is explanatory drawing of the mounting process of the image display means. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially broken side view of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the front door. It is a rear view of the front door. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of the outer frame. It is another enlarged sectional view of the same outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the front door. It is a plan sectional view of the lower part of the front door. It is a perspective view of the back side of the locked part of the front door. It is a rear view of the locked part of the front door. It is sectional drawing of the locked part of the front door. It is a plan sectional view of the upper protrusion part of the ipsilateral part unit. It is a front sectional view of the ipsilateral unit. It is a front sectional view of the ipsilateral unit. It is a plan sectional view of the ipsilateral unit. It is sectional drawing of the speaker. It is a front view of the 2nd side unit. It is a side view of the 2nd side unit. It is a rear view of the 2nd side unit. It is a front sectional view of the light emitting decoration part. It is a front sectional view of the light emitting decoration part. It is a top sectional view of the light emitting decoration part. It is a front sectional view of the blower part of the 2nd side unit. It is a side sectional view of the blower part of the 2nd side unit. It is a plan sectional view of the blower part of the 2nd side unit. It is sectional drawing of the positioning means of the 2nd side unit. It is sectional drawing of the locking means of the 2nd side unit. It is sectional drawing of the locking means of the 2nd side unit. It is sectional drawing of the locking means of the 2nd side unit. It is sectional drawing of the fixing means of the 2nd side unit. It is sectional drawing of the fixing means of the 2nd side unit. It is a rear view of the upper part of the front door. It is an enlarged sectional view of the front frame and the front door. It is a partially broken plan view of the front overhanging unit. It is explanatory drawing of the standing state of the pachinko machine. It is a partially broken side view of the operation effect means side. It is a side sectional view of the operation effect means side. It is a front sectional view of the operation effect means side. It is a plan sectional view of the operation effect means side. It is an exploded perspective view of the front overhanging unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation effect means. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation effect means. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation effect means. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation effect means. It is a front sectional view of the driving part. It is a side sectional view of the driving part. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation effect means. It is an enlarged sectional view of the buffering means. It is explanatory drawing of the same reflection state. It is a partially broken side view of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially broken side view of the pachinko machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the 2nd side unit. It is a rear view of the 2nd side unit. It is a plan sectional view of the front frame and the 2nd side unit. It is a plan sectional view of the right side protrusion part of the 2nd side part unit. It is a partially broken left side view of the right side protruding part of the 2nd side unit. It is a front sectional view of the vibration type production means. It is a plan sectional view of the vibration type production means. It is a front sectional view of the cushioning means side of the vibration type production means. It is a right side view of the vibration type production means. It is a right side view of the 2nd side unit. It is a side sectional view of the 2nd side unit and the like. It is a side sectional view of the upper protruding part of the 2nd side unit. It is a front sectional view of the upper protruding part of the 2nd side unit. The same (a) is a plan explanatory view, and (b) is a side explanatory view. It is explanatory drawing of the light guide part. It is explanatory drawing of the reflection state of the light guide part. It is a plan sectional view of the 2nd side unit which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a plan sectional view of a second side unit according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd side unit which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is the same block diagram. It is explanatory drawing of the same model information. It is explanatory drawing of the same layer.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIGS. 1 to 38 illustrate a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine. In FIGS. 1 and 2, the game machine main body 1 includes an outer frame 2 and a front frame 3 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 2. The front frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge 4 in the vertical direction arranged on one end side in the left-right direction, for example, the left end side, and is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and detachable. The outer frame 2 can be locked in a closed state by the locking means 5 provided on the opposite side, for example, the right end side.

The front frame 3 includes a main body frame 6 and a glass door 7 arranged on the front side of the main body frame 6. The glass door 7 is pivotally attached to the main body frame 6 via a second hinge 8 in the vertical direction arranged on one end side in the left-right direction, for example, the left end side, and is pivotally attached to the main body frame 6 by the locking means 5. It can be locked in the closed state. The first hinge 4 and the second hinge 8 are arranged so as to have the same axis.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 2c and 2d. A front cover member 9 made of synthetic resin is attached to the lower front side of the outer frame 2 so as to connect the lower front side of the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b along the front edge of the lower horizontal frame member 2d. .. The front cover member 9 projects forward from the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b, and the main body frame 6 is arranged on the upper side thereof. Further, in the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge metal fitting 11 constituting the first hinge 4 is arranged on the upper left portion, and the outer frame lower hinge metal fitting 12 is arranged on the upper left side of the front cover member 9 in the lower left portion, respectively.

The main body frame 6 is made of synthetic resin, and has a rectangular frame portion 13 that can substantially contact the front edge side of the outer frame 2 on the upper side of the front cover member 9, and a game board provided on the upper side in the frame portion 13. The mounting portion 14 and the lower mounting portion 15 provided on the lower side in the frame portion 13 are integrally provided. The game board 16 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting portion 14 from the front side, and the launching means 17, the lower speaker 18, and the like are arranged on the lower mounting portion 15 on the front side thereof. Further, in the main body frame 6, the main body frame upper hinge metal fittings 19 constituting the first hinge 4 and the main body frame upper hinge metal fittings 20 forming the second hinge 8 are located in the upper left portion, and the first, second hinges 4, 8 are provided. The hinge metal fittings 21 under the main body frame constituting the above are arranged at the lower left respectively.

The glass door 7 includes a resin door base 22 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front surface side of the main body frame 6. In the door base 22, window holes 24a of the glass window 24 are formed corresponding to the front side of the game area 23 formed in the game board 16, and a plurality of (four in this case) window holes 24a are formed around the window holes 24a. An effect means such as an upper speaker 25 and a blower effect device 26 is arranged, and an upper decorative cover 27 that substantially covers the upper speaker 25 and the like from the front side is attached.

Further, on the lower front side of the door base 22, an upper plate 30 for storing game balls discharged from the payout means 28 arranged on the rear side of the main body frame 6 and supplying the upper plate 30 to the launching means 17 is provided. A lower plate 31 for storing surplus balls and the like when the plate is full, a launch handle 32 for operating the launching means 17, and the like are arranged, and a lower decorative cover 33 for substantially covering the upper plate 30, the lower plate 31, and the like from the front side. Is installed. The lower decorative cover 33 is formed in a forward-facing bulge shape, and operating means such as an effect button 34 and a cross operating means 35 that can be pressed and operated by the player are provided on the upper side thereof. The cross operating means 35 includes four operating units: an upper key 35a on the rear side, a lower key 35b on the front side, a left key 35c on the left side, and a right key 35d on the right side.

A glass unit 36 is detachably attached to the back side of the door base 22 so as to substantially close the window hole 24a from the rear side, and is arranged along the edges on the first, second hinges 4 and 8 sides. Vertical hinge end side reinforcing sheet metal 37, vertical opening / closing end side reinforcing sheet metal 38 arranged along the edge on the opening / closing end side, and left / right lower reinforcement arranged under the window hole 24a. The sheet metal 39 is detachably fixed by screwing or the like. Further, on the door base 22, the glass door upper hinge metal fitting 40 constituting the second hinge 8 is arranged at the upper left portion, and the glass door lower hinge metal fitting 41 is also arranged at the lower left portion.

Further, a ball feed unit 42, a lower plate guide unit 43, and the like are mounted on the back side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 39. The ball feeding unit 42 is for supplying the game balls in the upper plate 30 one by one to the launching means 17, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 17. The lower plate guide unit 43 guides the surplus ball when the upper plate 30 is full and the foul ball that has returned without reaching the game area 23 even though it was launched by the launching means 17 to the lower plate 31. The first and second hinges 4 and 8 are arranged adjacent to the ball feed unit 42.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 6, the game board 16 includes a base plate 45 made of a non-translucent material such as a veneer plate, and a game ball launched from a launching means 17 on the front side of the base plate 45. A guide rail 46 for guiding the light guides is mounted in an annular shape, and game parts such as a central display frame unit 47, a starting winning unit 48, a large winning unit 49, and a normal winning unit 50 are mounted in a game area 23 inside the guide rail 46. In addition, a large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged.

Further, on the plurality of unit parts 47 to 50, in addition to various display means such as a normal symbol display means 51, a normal hold number display means 52, a first special symbol display means 53, and a second special symbol display means 54, ordinary A symbol starting means 55, a first special symbol starting means 56, a second special symbol starting means 57, a large winning means 58, a plurality of ordinary winning means 59, and the like are provided. Further, as shown in FIGS. 5, 7, 8 and the like, an image display means 60 including a liquid crystal display means is mounted on the rear side of the base plate 45 via a back mounting base 61.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the base plate 45 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and a plurality of base plates 45 for mounting the central display frame unit 47, the starting winning unit 48, the large winning unit 49, the ordinary winning unit 50, and the like. For example, three mounting holes 62 to 64, an out port 65, and the like are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 62 is for mounting the central display frame unit 47, and is provided corresponding to a range excluding a part of the lower side or the like in the game area 23. Further, the mounting holes 63 and 64 are for mounting the starting winning unit 48 and the normal winning unit 50, respectively, and are provided in the lower center and the lower left of the game area 23 independently of the other mounting holes, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 4, 5, 7, 8, 8 and the like, the back mounting base 61 is a back wall portion formed substantially parallel to the base plate 45 and having a rectangular opening 66a formed substantially in the center thereof. 66, a peripheral wall portion 67 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the back wall portion 66 to the back surface of the base plate 45, and projecting from the front edge portion of the peripheral wall portion 67 along the back surface of the base plate 45. A fixing portion 68 fixed to the base plate 45 by a fixing screw or the like is integrally provided, and a vertically long image display means 60 is detachably attached to the back side of the back wall portion 66 in a state of being housed in the storage case 69. It is fixed to.

The storage case 69 is formed in a flat box shape with the front side open. The image display means 60 is fitted into the storage case 69 from the front side with the display screen 60a facing the front side, and is fixed by screwing or the like. The storage case 69 integrally includes a lower fixing portion 69a projecting downward from the front side of the lower end portion and an upper fixing portion 69b projecting upward from the front side of the upper end portion, and the lower fixing portion 69a is provided as a back wall portion 66. By screwing the upper fixing portion 69b to the back wall portion 66 while being fitted in the concave portion (not shown) on the side, the front side of the outer peripheral portion of the image display means 60 comes into contact with the back side of the back wall portion 66. It is detachably fixed to the back side of the back mounting base 61 in a close state.

In the present embodiment, the entire display screen 60a of the image display means 60 is a full screen area A capable of displaying an image (see FIG. 9A), and the back wall portion 66 of the back mounting base 61. A part (hereinafter, referred to as a window frame portion 74) is in contact with or in close proximity to the front side of the entire screen area A corresponding to a region having a substantially constant width on the outer peripheral side. Hereinafter, the portion of the entire screen area A corresponding to the rear side of the window frame portion (game member) 74 is referred to as a first fixed concealment area B1 (see FIG. 9B). In the present embodiment, the window frame portion 74 is transparent, and among the images displayed in the full screen area A, the portion displayed in the first fixed concealment area B1 is also seen from the front side via the window frame portion 74. It is visible.

Here, the "concealment area" is defined as a front view, that is, a rear side of the display screen 60a of the image display means 60 when viewed from the front side of the game machine due to the presence of some member on the front side thereof. Areas that overlap. Therefore, if the front member is opaque, the image displayed in the concealed area cannot be visually recognized from the front. The first fixed concealment area B1 is a "concealment area", but since the window frame portion 74 on the front side is transparent, the displayed image can be visually recognized from the front unless another member is present on the front side. Further, even in the "concealed area", if there is a space between the member on the front side and the member on the front side, the displayed image may be visually visible by shifting (looking into) the viewpoint so as to avoid the member on the front side.

Further, one or a plurality, for example, four movable effect means 75 to 78 are arranged on the front side of the back mounting base 61. As shown in FIGS. 4, 7, 8 and the like, the first movable effect means 75 includes a first movable body 75a and a first driving means 75b for driving the first movable body 75a in the vertical direction. There is. The first movable body 75a is arranged horizontally on the front side of the image display means 60, and the front side thereof is, for example, arbitrarily decorated (here, a three-dimensional decoration with an airplane motif), and the left and right ends thereof are , Supported by a pair of first driving means 75b, 75b arranged in front of the left and right sides of the image display means 60, respectively, in a state of being movable in the vertical direction via the first driving connecting bodies 79, 79. Has been done.

The first drive means 75b is supported by the back mounting base 61 via a vertically long mounting base 80, is arranged along the side edge of the image display means 60 from the upper end side to the lower end side, and is the first drive connection. An elongated cylindrical elevating guide 81 that guides the body 79 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 82a arranged in the vicinity of one end side of the elevating guide 81, for example, the lower end side, and the other end side of the elevating guide 81. For example, a driven pulley 82b arranged in the vicinity corresponding to the upper end side, a drive source 83 including a stepping motor for rotationally driving the drive pulley 82a, and the drive pulley 82a and the driven pulley 82b are wound around the drive source 83. An endless gear belt 84 to which the first drive connecting body 79 is fixed at a predetermined position on the circumference is provided, and the end portion of the first movable body 75a can be rotated by a pivot axis in the front-rear direction on the first driving connecting body 79. It is connected.

The first movable body 75a is placed in a substantially horizontal state by the pair of left and right first driving means 75b, 75b, and the upper position on the upper front side of the image display means 60 (FIGS. 28 (a), 28 (c), It is possible to move between (d)) and the lower position (FIG. 28 (b)) on the front side of the lower part. Further, the front end side of the first movable body 75a projects to the front side of the base plate 45 through the mounting hole 62 (FIG. 4). Of course, the first movable body 75a may move or stop in an oblique state.

As shown in FIGS. 4, 7, 8 and the like, the second movable effect means 76 includes a second movable body 76a and a second driving means 76b for driving the second movable body 76a in the vertical direction. There is. The second movable body 76a is arranged horizontally on the front side of the image display means 60, and the front side thereof is arbitrarily decorated (not shown), and the left and right end sides are on the left and right sides of the image display means 60. It is supported by a pair of second driving means 76b and 76b arranged so as to be movable in the vertical direction via the second driving connecting bodies 85 and 85, respectively.

The second drive means 76b is arranged on the rear side of the first drive means 75b and on the front side of the back mounting base 61, is arranged on the lower side thereof along the side edge of the image display means 60, and is the second drive connection. An elongated cylindrical elevating guide 86 that guides the body 85 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 87a that is arranged in the vicinity of one end side of the elevating guide 86, for example, the upper end side, and the other end side of the elevating guide 86. For example, a driven pulley 87b arranged in the vicinity corresponding to the lower end side, a drive source 88 including a stepping motor for rotationally driving the drive pulley 87a, and the drive pulley 87a and the driven pulley 87b are wound around the drive source 88. An endless gear belt 89 to which the second drive connecting body 85 is fixed at a predetermined position on the circumference is provided, and the end portion of the second movable body 76a can be rotated by a pivot axis in the front-rear direction on the second driving connecting body 85. It is connected.

The second movable body 76a is in a substantially horizontal state by the pair of left and right second driving means 76b, 76b, and is in a lower position on the lower front side of the image display means 60 (FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b)). It is possible to move between the upper position (FIGS. 28 (c) and 28 (d)) on the front side of the intermediate portion in the vertical direction. Of course, the second movable body 76a may move or stop in an oblique state.

The movement paths of the first movable body 75a and the second movable body 76a partially overlap each other in front view, but the moving path of the first movable body 75a is relative to the moving path of the second movable body 76a. Since it is displaced to the front side, the first movable body 75a and the second movable body 76a can move without interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 4, 7, 8 and the like, the third movable effect means 77 and the fourth movable effect means 78 are arranged symmetrically corresponding to the left side and the right side of the image display means 60. .. The third and fourth movable effect means 77 and 78 are the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a and the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78b for driving the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a in the left-right direction. , 78b and so on. The third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are arranged vertically along the left and right edges of the image display means 60 on the front side thereof, and the front side is arbitrarily decorated (not shown). ..

The third and fourth drive means 77b and 78b are configured by an electromagnetic slide table capable of sliding the slide portion 92 in the left-right direction with respect to the base portion 91, and correspond to the side portion of the image display means 60 in the vertical direction thereof. The base portion 91 is fixed to the peripheral wall portion 67 of the back mounting base 61, and the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are fixed to the front side of the slide portion 92. The third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are located at external positions (FIGS. 28 (a) to (c)) outside the image display means 60 in the left-right direction by the third and fourth drive means 77b and 78b, respectively. , It is possible to move to and from the internal position (FIG. 28 (d)) inside in the left-right direction.

Since the movement paths of the third movable body 77a and the fourth movable body 78a are separated from each other on the left and right, they do not interfere with each other. Further, since the movement paths of the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are on the rear side of the movement path of the first movable body 75a and on the front side of the movement path of the second movable body 76a, the third and fourth movable bodies are the third and fourth. The movable bodies 77a and 78a and the first and second movable bodies 75a and 76a can move without interfering with each other.

Further, in the entire screen area A, the portion corresponding to the rear side of the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a is referred to as a movable concealment area C (FIG. 10 (c)). Of course, since the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a can move between a plurality of stop positions, if the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a move, the movable concealment area C also changes accordingly. To do. The movable concealment area C may not exist in some cases. Of the images displayed in the full screen area A, the portion displayed in the movable concealment area C is blocked by at least the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a and cannot be visually recognized from the front, but the first to fourth parts are not visible. Since the movable bodies 75a to 78a are all separated from the image display means 60 to the front side, at least a part thereof can be visually recognized from the front side by shifting the viewpoint.

As described above, the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a are arranged between the image display means 60 and the base plate 45, and only a part of the first movable body 75a on the front end side is the base via the mounting hole 62. It projects to the front side of the plate 45.

Further, in the image display means 60, at least a part of the entire screen area A protrudes outside the mounting hole 62 of the base plate 45 in front view. Hereinafter, in the entire screen area A, the portion corresponding to the rear side of the base plate (game member) 45 (here, the portion corresponding to the rear side of the mounting hole other than the mounting hole 62) is the second fixed concealment area. It is called B2 (Fig. 9 (c)).

Of the images displayed in the full screen area A, the portion displayed in the second fixed concealment area B2 is blocked by at least the base plate 45 from the front and cannot be visually recognized, but the image display means 60 is the base plate. Since it is arranged on the rear side of 45, at least a part thereof can be visually recognized from the front side by shifting the viewpoint.

The guide rail 46 is arranged on the front side of the base plate 45 so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the game area 23, and as shown in FIGS. 3, 5, 5, 8 and the like, the three first to third rail members 101 to 103. Is formed by. The first rail member 101 is made of synthetic resin and is detachably attached to the front side of the base plate 45 along the left edge portion and the upper edge portion thereof, and is formed on the game area 23 side of the base plate 45. The arcuate side surface is the first rail 46a that forms a part of the guide rail 46.

The second rail member 102 is made of metal and is arranged in a substantially arcuate shape in front view so as to be parallel to the inside of the first rail 46a from the upper left portion to the lower left portion of the game board 16, and has a substantially constant width on the front side of the base plate 45. The second rail 46b, which forms a part of the guide rail 46, is formed. The portion sandwiched between the first rail 46a and the second rail 46b is a launch guide passage 104 that guides the game ball launched by the launch means 17 to the game area 23.

The third rail member 103 is made of synthetic resin, and the right edge portion and the lower portion of the base plate 45 are connected so as to connect the upper right side end portion of the first rail member 101 and the left lower side end portion of the second rail member 102. It is detachably attached to the front side thereof along the edge portion, and the side surface on the game area 23 side is a third rail 46c that forms a part of the guide rail 46. The first rail member 101 and the third rail member 103 may be divided into a plurality of parts along the longitudinal direction of the rail.

The central display frame unit 47 constitutes the display frame of the image display means 60, and is detachably mounted from the front side of the base plate 45 along the inner circumference of the mounting hole 62. As shown in FIGS. 3 to 6 and the like, the central display frame unit 47 is arranged outside the mounting hole 62 along the front surface of the base plate 45, and the front mounting plate 105 through which the game ball can pass passes. The decorative frame 106 arranged in the shape of a front view gate extending from the left and right sides to the upper side on the front side of the image display means 60 and projecting forward on the inner peripheral side of the front mounting plate 105, and the left and right decorative frames 106. It includes a stage 107 arranged between the lower ends. The game balls launched by the launching means 17 and entering the upper side of the game area 23 are distributed to the left and right at the top of the decorative frame 106, and the left flow path 108a on the left side and the right flow path 108b on the right side of the central display frame unit 47. Flow down either.

The central display frame unit 47 is provided with a warp inlet 109 through which a game ball can flow, on at least one side of the left flow path 108a side and the right flow path 108b side, for example, the left flow path 108a side. The game ball that has flowed into the warp entrance 109 rolls freely in the left-right direction on the stage 107, and then either the central drop portion 110 provided corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 23 or any other portion. It falls to the front side from the top.

Further, on the upper side of the stage 107, an entry prevention means 111 for preventing the game ball from entering the rear side due to bounce or the like is provided. The entry prevention means 111 is projected forward from the first entry prevention plate 111a which is erected in parallel with the base plate 45 along the rear side of the stage 107 and the upper edge portion of the first entry prevention plate 111a. It is integrally provided with a second entry prevention plate 111b. The intrusion prevention means 111 is entirely transparent, and the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side via the intrusion prevention means 111.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the central display frame unit 47 is composed of a second unit 47a provided with a stage 107, a warp inlet 109, an intrusion prevention means 111, and the like, and a first unit 47b other than that. Both of these units 47a and 47b are mounted and fixed to the base plate 45 in a state of being connected in advance. Of course, the first unit 47b and the second unit 47a may be individually mounted on the base plate 45.

Further, at least a part of the central display frame unit 47 is located on the front side of the full screen area A of the image display means 60. Hereinafter, the portion of the entire screen area A corresponding to the rear side of the first unit (game member) 47b is referred to as a third fixed concealment area B3 (FIG. 9 (d)), and the second unit (game member) 47a. The portion corresponding to the rear side is referred to as a fourth fixed concealment area B4 (FIG. 10 (a)). Further, in the fourth fixed concealment area B4, a portion corresponding to the rear side of the transparent portion (here, the intrusion prevention means 111) in the second unit 47a, that is, a portion corresponding to the rear side of the second unit 47a but via the transparent portion. The area visible from the front side is referred to as a transparent concealed area (first transparent display area) B4a.

Of the images displayed in the full screen area A, the portion displayed in the third fixed concealment area B3 and the fourth fixed concealment area B4 (excluding the transparent concealment area B4a) is at least the center display frame from the front. Although it is blocked by the unit 47 and cannot be visually recognized, since the central display frame unit 47 is separated from the image display means 60 to the front side, at least a part thereof can be visually recognized from the front side by shifting the viewpoint.

The start winning unit 48 is arranged below the central display frame unit 47, and is detachably mounted on the mounting hole 63 from the front side. The grand prize unit 49 is detachably attached from the rear side to a predetermined position on the lower right side of the central display frame unit 47. The ordinary winning unit 50 is arranged on the left side of the starting winning unit 48 under the central display frame unit 47, and is detachably mounted on the mounting hole 64 from the front side.

Further, at least a part of the grand prize unit 49 is located in front of the full screen area A of the image display means 60. Hereinafter, the portion of the entire screen area A corresponding to the rear side of the large winning unit (game member) 49 is referred to as a fifth fixed concealment area B5 (FIG. 10B). Of the images displayed in the full screen area A, the portion displayed in the fifth fixed concealment area B5 is blocked by at least the grand prize unit 49 and cannot be visually recognized from the front, but the grand prize unit 49 is an image. Since it is separated from the display means 60 to the front side, at least a part thereof can be visually recognized from the front side by shifting the viewpoint.

Further, in the full screen area A on the front side of the image display means 60, the window frame portion 74, the base plate 45, the central display frame unit 47, the grand prize unit 49, and the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a are viewed from the front. A region that is not blocked by any of them, that is, a region that does not belong to any of the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C is defined as a non-concealment region D (FIG. 10 (d)). It should be noted that there are portions that overlap each other between the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5, and there are portions that overlap each other between the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C. To do. That is, there are also regions that belong to two or more of the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C.

Here, the first to fifth fixed concealment areas B1 to B5 are examples of the first display area corresponding to the rear side of the game member in front view, and the movable concealment area C corresponds to the rear side of the movable body. It is an example of the second display area, and the non-hidden area D is an example of a third display area that is neither the first display area nor the second display area.

The normal symbol starting means 55 is for starting the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display means 51, and is composed of a passing gate or the like through which the game ball can pass, and is a passage detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball (passage detecting means ( (Not shown). The normal symbol starting means 55 is provided on the front side of the front mounting plate 105 on the right side of the central display frame unit 47, and allows a game ball flowing down the right flow path 108b to pass through.

The ordinary symbol display means 51 is for displaying the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and includes a plurality of light emitters (for example, LEDs) corresponding to a plurality of ordinary symbols (for example, two types of “○” and “×”). It is arranged in the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47. The normal symbol display means 51 blinks so that a plurality of light emitters emit light in a predetermined order based on the normal symbol starting means 55 detecting the game ball, and is acquired when the normal symbol starting means 55 detects the game ball. When the hit judgment random number value included in the ordinary random number information matches the predetermined hit judgment value, the illuminant on the "○" side corresponding to the hit mode (predetermined mode) lights up, and in other cases. The illuminant on the "x" side corresponding to the detached mode lights up and stops. When the stop symbol after the change of the ordinary symbol display means 51 becomes the winning mode, the ordinary profit state occurs.

Further, when the ordinary symbol starting means 55 detects a game ball during the ordinary holding period including the symbol change of the ordinary symbol display means 51 and the ordinary profit state, the ordinary random number information acquired by the detection is predetermined. The maximum number of reserved symbols, for example, 4 is reserved and stored, and each time the normal holding period ends, one is consumed and the normal symbol is changed. The stored number of ordinary random number information (ordinary hold number) is notified to the player by the ordinary hold number display means 52 or the like. The normally reserved quantity display means 52 is arranged in the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47.

The first special symbol starting means 56 is for starting the symbol variation by the first special symbol displaying means 53, is composed of a non-opening / closing winning means having no opening / closing means, and is a game ball for detecting a winning game ball. It is equipped with a detection means (not shown). The first special symbol starting means 56 is provided in the starting winning unit 48, is arranged in an upward opening shape on the lower side corresponding to the central drop portion 110 of the stage 107, and is a warp inlet on the left flow path 108a side. Due to the existence of a route that wins a prize from 109 through the stage 107, a game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 108a has a higher probability of winning than a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 108b. ..

The second special symbol starting means 57 is for starting the symbol variation by the second special symbol displaying means 54, and the game ball can win a prize by operating the opening / closing portion 112 and cannot win a prize (or from the open state). It is composed of an openable and closable winning means that can be changed to a closed state (which is also difficult to win), and is equipped with a game ball detecting means (not shown) for detecting a winning game ball, and the normal symbol display means 51 is stopped after a change. When the symbol becomes a hit mode (predetermined mode) and a normal profit state occurs, the opening / closing portion 112 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

The second special symbol starting means 57 is arranged on the front mounting plate 105 on the right side of the central display frame unit 47 and on the downstream side of the normal symbol starting means 55, and is a game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 108a. A game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 108b has a higher probability of winning a prize than that. The opening / closing portion 112 can swing around the rotation axis in the left-right direction provided on the lower side, and in the closed state, it is substantially flush with the front mounting plate 105 so that the game ball can pass through the front side and is in the open state. Then, the front side of the front mounting plate 105 has an inclined shape that descends backward so that the game ball can win a prize backward.

The first special symbol display means (symbol display means) 53 is composed of one or a plurality of, for example, a display means such as a 7-segment type capable of variablely displaying one first special symbol, and the first special symbol. The first special symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined time on condition that the starting means 56 detects the game ball, and the jackpot determination included in the first special random number information acquired when the first special symbol starting means 56 detects the game ball. When the random number value matches the predetermined jackpot determination value, it stops in the first jackpot mode, and in other cases, it stops in the first missed mode. When the stop symbol after the change of the first special symbol display means 53 becomes the first jackpot mode, the first extraordinary profit state occurs.

The second special symbol display means (symbol display means) 54 is composed of one or a plurality of, for example, a display means such as a 7-segment type capable of variablely displaying one second special symbol, and the second special symbol. The second special symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined time on condition that the starting means 57 detects the game ball, and the jackpot determination included in the second special random number information acquired when the second special symbol starting means 57 detects the game ball. When the random number value matches the predetermined jackpot determination value, the second jackpot mode is used, and in other cases, the second jackpot mode is stopped. When the stop symbol after the change of the second special symbol display means 54 becomes the second jackpot mode, the second extraordinary profit state occurs.

The first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54 are arranged in the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47. The first and second special symbols are not numerical symbols or the like, but are composed of a plurality of types of symbols consisting of combinations of lines and points that have no special meaning in themselves, and one or more of these symbols are The first and second jackpot modes are the first and second jackpot modes, and the other modes are the first and second missed modes.

In addition, the first and second special symbols are started during the special holding period including the symbol change of the first special symbol display means 53, the symbol change of the second special symbol display means 54, and the first and second special profit states. When the means 56 and 57 detect the game ball, the first and second special random number information acquired by the means 56 and 57 are stored in a predetermined maximum number of pending numbers, for example, four each. Then, when the hold memory on the second special symbol side is 1 or more at the end of the special hold period (when the symbol change start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied), the hold memory of the second special symbol is exhausted. When the second special symbol is changed and only the hold memory on the first special symbol side is 1 or more (when the symbol change start condition for the first special symbol is satisfied), the first special symbol is held. The memory is digested and the first special symbol is changed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changing, and both the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side have reserved memory. The second special symbol is preferentially changed. The number of stored first and second special random number information (number of first and second special reserved numbers) is notified to the player by the image display means 60 or the like.

The big winning means 58 is an opening / closing type winning means provided with an opening / closing plate 113 that can switch between an open state in which the game ball can be won and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won. It is located at the lower right side of 47 on the downstream side of the second special symbol starting means 57, and the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 108b has a higher probability of winning than the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 108a. It is possible. The big prize means 58 is the first and second specials that occur when the first and second special symbols of the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54 stop in the first and second big hit modes after the change. During the profit state, the opening / closing plate 113 opens to the front side according to a predetermined opening pattern, and the game ball that has fallen on the opening / closing plate 113 is made to win a prize inside.

In addition, the image display means 60 displays the effect symbols 114 (FIG. 16 and the like) in a variable manner in parallel with the variable display of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54. , 1st and 2nd hold display images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4 (FIG. 15 and the like) showing the number of 1st and 2nd special hold, volume and light amount adjustable notification image (notification image) related to the volume / light amount adjustment function described later. ) 116a, 116b (FIG. 18 etc.) and volume, light amount setting images 117a, 117b (FIG. 19 etc.), menu displayable notification image (notification image) 118a (FIG. 24 etc.), menu image 118b and the menu display function described later. Various images such as a menu operation notification image 118c (FIG. 25, etc.), a left-handed guidance image 162a, a right-handed guidance image 162b (FIG. 16 etc.), and an error notification image 163 (FIG. 17 etc.) are displayed. ..

Here, as shown in FIG. 14, the effect symbol 114 is composed of, for example, a combination of a symbol image 114a composed of numbers 1 to 9 and a character or other decorative image 114b, and has a plurality of columns in the left-right direction, for example. It is possible to change in each of the three rows, and at the same time as the start of the change of the first and second special symbols, the fluctuation by vertical scrolling etc. is started according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and at the same time as the change of the first and second special symbols is stopped. It is designed to stop in a predetermined order such as left, right, and middle so as to make a final stop.

In addition, in the effect symbol 114, the case where all the same symbols are aligned is the jackpot effect mode, and the other cases are the off effect mode, and when the first and second special symbols are the first and second jackpot modes. The effect symbol 114 is in the jackpot effect mode, and when the first and second special symbols are in the first and second off modes, the effect symbol 114 is in the off effect mode.

Further, the variation pattern of the effect symbol 114 includes a plurality of types of reach jackpot variation patterns (for example, a normal reach jackpot variation pattern, a super reach jackpot variation pattern, etc.) that become a jackpot effect mode after the reach state, and a deviating effect mode after the reach state. There are a plurality of types of out-of-reach variation patterns (for example, a normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern, a super reach out-of-reach variation pattern, etc.) and one or a plurality of types of normal variation patterns that are out-of-reach effect modes without going through the reach state. ..

FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. In FIG. 11, 121 is a main control board, 122 is an effect control board, and each of these control boards 121 and 122 includes a front frame 3 and the back side of a back cover covering an image display means 60 and the like mounted on the game board 16. They are housed in board cases that are detachably attached to appropriate positions on the back side of the game machine main body 1 including the game board 16.

The main control board 121 controls the game operation in an integrated manner, and is composed of a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., which includes a normal random number creation processing means 131, a normal start port check processing means 132, a normal random number storage means 133, and a normal symbol. Processing means 134, ordinary symbol display control means 135, ordinary profit state generating means 136, special random number creation processing means 137, special start port check processing means 138, special random number storage means 139, special symbol processing means 140, special symbol display control means It includes 141, a special profit state generating means 142, a special game state generating means 143, a control command transmitting means 144, and the like.

The ordinary random number creating processing means 131 is configured to repeatedly generate a hit determination random number or the like used for determining whether or not the changed ordinary symbol is the winning mode at predetermined time intervals. The normal start port check processing means 132 performs processing based on the detection of the game ball by the normal symbol starting means 55, and based on the normal symbol starting means 55 detecting the game ball, the normal random number creation processing means 131 It is configured to acquire the created ordinary random number information such as the hit determination random number value and store the ordinary random number information in the first-in first-out type ordinary random number storage means 133 up to a predetermined upper limit holding number (for example, 4). Has been done.

The normal symbol processing means 134 performs processing related to the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display means 51 is in a state where the normal symbol display means 51 can be variablely displayed, and one or more hit determination random numbers are stored in the normal random number storage means 133. The hit judgment random number value is taken out from the beginning of the queue of the normal random number information stored in the normal random number storage means 133 on condition that the number is (normally held number is 1 or more), and the hit judgment random number value is set in advance. Hit judgment function that judges hit / miss according to whether or not it matches the specified hit judgment value, stop after the normal symbol changes based on the hit / miss judgment result Normal stop It is equipped with a symbol selection function, a fluctuation time selection function for selecting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and the like.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the hit probability (for example, 1 / 1.3) in the special gaming state (in the time saving state and in the probability variation state), which will be described later, is the hit in other normal gaming states. It is set higher than the probability (for example, 1/10), and the fluctuation time in the special gaming state (for example, 2.7 seconds) is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time in the normal gaming state (for example, 27 seconds). ing.

The ordinary symbol display control means 135 controls the display of the ordinary symbol display means 51 based on the ordinary symbol processing by the ordinary symbol processing means 134, and the ordinary symbol display means 51 is in a state where variable display is possible and the ordinary random number storage means. On the condition that one or more ordinary random number information is stored in 133 (the number of ordinary pending numbers is 1 or more), the ordinary symbol display means 51 starts the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol processing means 134 selects it. Based on the elapse of the changed fluctuation time, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped by the stop symbol also selected by the normal symbol processing means 134.

The ordinary profit state generating means 136 is the second special symbol when the stop symbol after the change of the ordinary symbol display means 51 becomes a hit mode based on the result of the hit determination by the ordinary symbol processing means 134. The opening / closing portion 112 of the starting means 57 is adapted to generate a normal profit state that changes to an open state according to any one of a plurality of types of opening / closing patterns. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, a normal opening / closing pattern (for example, 0.2 seconds × 1 opening) and an extended opening / closing pattern (for example) set so that the opening time is longer than the normal opening / closing pattern. Two types of opening / closing patterns (2 seconds x 3 times opening) are set, and the normal opening / closing pattern is selected during the normal game state and the extended opening / closing pattern is selected during the special game state.

The special random number creation processing means 137 includes a jackpot determination random number used for determining jackpot / miss, a symbol determination random number used for selecting a stop symbol after a change of a special symbol, a variation pattern random number used for selecting a variation pattern, and other predetermined random numbers. It is configured to perform a special random number creation process that repeatedly generates random numbers.

The special start port check processing means (start detection processing means) 138 performs processing based on the winning of the game ball to the first and second special symbol starting means (starting means) 56 and 57, and the first and second special symbols are processed. The first and second special random number information such as the jackpot determination random number value and the jackpot symbol random number value created by the special random number creation processing means 137 based on the game ball winning in any of the special symbol starting means 56 and 57. Is acquired, and the first and second special random number information is stored in the special random number storage means 139 up to a predetermined upper limit reserved number (for example, 4).

Further, the special start port check processing means 138 includes a look-ahead determination means 138a. The look-ahead determination means 138a refers to the first and second special random number information acquired when the game ball wins the first and second special symbol starting means 56 and 57 at the time of acquisition of the first and second special random numbers. The jackpot determination random number value included in the random number information is pre-read and determined as to whether or not it matches the first and second jackpot determination values. The look-ahead determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 122 or the like by the hold increase command transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to any of the first and second special symbol starting means 56 and 57.

The special symbol processing means 140 performs processing related to the variable display of the first and second special symbols, and when the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54 are in a state where the variable display is possible, the second special symbol processing means 140 is used. If the number of special reserved numbers is 1 or more, the second special random number information queue is used. If only the first special reserved number is 1 or more, the first jackpot judgment random number value is taken out from the first special random number information queue. The jackpot judgment function that judges jackpot / miss according to whether or not the jackpot judgment random number value matches a predetermined jackpot judgment value, and the first and second special random number information according to the result of the jackpot judgment A special stop symbol selection function that selects the stop symbol after the change of the first and second special symbols based on the included jackpot symbol random number value, etc., and the fluctuation pattern of the first and second special symbols according to the result of the jackpot judgment. It is equipped with a variable pattern selection function that selects from multiple types.

The special symbol display control means 141 controls the display of the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54, and the first special symbol display means 53 or the first special symbol display means 53 or the first is based on the special symbol processing by the special symbol processing means 140. 2 The first and second special symbols are started to fluctuate by the special symbol display means 54, and the first and second stop symbols are selected based on the elapse of the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern. It is designed to stop the fluctuation of special symbols.

The extraordinary profit state generating means (profit state generating means) 142 is for generating the first and second extraordinary profit states which are advantageous to the player, and the result of the jackpot determination by the special symbol processing means 140 becomes a jackpot, and the first When the stop symbol after the change of the first and second special symbols becomes the first and second big hit mode (specific mode), the big winning means 58 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern. It is configured to generate (profit status).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, two types of opening patterns α and β are provided as the opening pattern of the big winning means 58, and the special profit state generating means 142 opens the opening pattern α according to the jackpot symbol random value. It is configured to select any of β. The opening pattern α is set to perform an operation of opening the large winning means 58 for 0.2 seconds for two rounds. Since this opening pattern α has a short opening time of 0.2 seconds and a small number of rounds of 2 rounds, it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will win a prize during the opening.

On the other hand, the opening pattern β is an operation of closing the large winning means 58 on condition that a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) have won a prize after a predetermined time (for example, 28 seconds) has passed since the opening. Is set to be performed for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds). In the case of this open pattern β, assuming that the number of prize balls for one prize to the large prize means 58 is 15, in most cases, 9 × 15 × 15 = 2025, the player only continues the firing operation normally. The ball can be expected to come out, and the direct profit that the player can obtain is much larger than that of the open pattern α. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability that the open pattern β is selected is the first special when the second special symbol is in the second jackpot mode (second extraordinary profit state). The value is set higher than when the symbol is in the second jackpot mode (first extraordinary profit state).

The special gaming state generating means 143 is for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the first and second special profit states, and as shown in FIG. 13, the first and second special random number information. It is configured to generate a special gaming state of either a time saving state or a probability variation state according to the jackpot symbol random number value when the jackpot determination random number value included in the above matches the jackpot determination value.

During the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the first and second special symbols is switched to a shortened fluctuation time shorter than the normal fluctuation time, and the probability that the normal symbol becomes a hit mode is high from the normal probability (for example, 1/10). (For example, 1 / 1.3), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol changes from the normal fluctuation time (for example, 27 seconds) to the shortened fluctuation time (for example, 2.7 seconds), and the opening / closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means 57 normally opens / closes. The pattern (for example, 0.2 seconds x 1 opening) can be switched to the extended opening / closing pattern (for example, 2 seconds x 3 times opening). The time saving state starts after the end of the first and second special profit states, and when the next extraordinary profit state occurs or the first and second special symbols have changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) by then. It ends with.

During the probabilistic state, the probability that the first and second special symbols will be in the first and second jackpot modes is switched to a higher probability (for example, 1/35) than the normal probability (for example, 1/350). There is. In addition, during the probabilistic state, in principle, the same switching as the time saving state is also performed, but if the extraordinary profit state of the open pattern α occurs during the normal game state, the probable change state that occurs after the end of the extraordinary profit state is The same switching as in the time saving state is not performed (so-called latent probability change state). The probabilistic state starts after the end of the first and second special profit states and ends when the next extraordinary profit state occurs, but other end conditions such as the number of fluctuations of the first and second special symbols are set. It may be added.

The control command transmitting means 144 is for transmitting a predetermined control command to a sub-control board such as the effect control board 122 to give a control command, and is based on the special symbol processing by the special symbol processing means 140. At the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the first and second hold reduction commands for specifying the reduction of the first and second special hold numbers, the first and second fluctuation pattern specification commands for designating the fluctuation pattern of the effect symbol 114, The first and second stop symbol mode designation commands for designating the stop symbol modes of the first and second special symbols are transmitted to the effect control board 122 side in this order, and the first at the end of the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. , A function to send the first and second fluctuation stop designation commands instructing the fluctuation stop of the second effect symbol to the effect control board 122 side, the first and second special when the number of first and second special reservations increases A function to send the first and second hold increase commands that specify the increase in the number of holds to the effect control board 122 side, and the first and second special symbols fluctuate when both the first and second special hold numbers are 0. A function to send a customer waiting demo command when the first and second special symbols are in a variable standby state due to termination, etc., a special game state generation command when a special game state is generated and at the end by the special game state generating means 143. , A function to send a special game state end command, etc. to the production control board 122 side, an error when an error such as a door opening error, a magnetic detection error, a radio wave detection error, a payout error, a winning switch error, or an illegal winning error occurs. It is provided with a function of transmitting an error command corresponding to the type of the error to the effect control board 122 when the error is cleared, and an error canceling command corresponding to the type of the error.

The effect control board 122 controls the effect by various effect means, and the effect control means 150, the special reserved number display control means 151, the symbol variation effect control means 152, the launch guidance notification control means 153, the error notification control means 154, It includes a volume adjusting means 155, a light amount adjusting means 156, a customer waiting control means 157, a power saving mode setting means 158, and the like.

The effect control means 150 controls each effect means, and includes image display control means 150a for controlling image display by the image display means 60, sound control means 150b for controlling sound output from speakers 18 and 25, LEDs, and the like. The light emitting control means 150c for controlling the light emission of the lighting means 159, the movable body control means 150d for controlling the movable effect means 75 to 78 having the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a, and the like are provided.

The special reserved number display control means 151 controls the display of the first and second special reserved numbers on the image display means 60, and as shown in FIG. 15 and the like, increases or decreases the first and second special reserved numbers. Correspondingly, the first hold display images X1 to X4 for the first special hold number (maximum 4) and the second hold display images Y1 to Y4 for the second special hold number (maximum 4) are changing. The changing hold image Z corresponding to the first and second special symbols of the above is configured to be superimposed on the front side of the predetermined hold pedestal image 161 on the image display means 60 via the image display control means 150a. There is.

In the present embodiment, in order to preferentially digest the reserved storage of the second special symbol over the reserved storage of the first special symbol, the second reserved display images Y1 to Y4 are placed in front of the first reserved display images X1 to X4, respectively. Some parts are overlaid. When the first and second hold increase commands are received from the main control board 121, one additional first and second hold display images X1 and Y1 are displayed at the end of the queue.

When the first and second hold reduction commands are received from the main control board 121, the first and second hold display images X1 and Y1 are shifted one by one toward the front side of the queue. The extruded first and second hold display images X1 and Y1 are moved to a predetermined position to change to the changing hold image Z. Since the variation of the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol, the number of the first reserved display images X1 may increase while the second reserved display images Y1 to are displayed. Will not decrease.

The symbol variation effect control means 152 controls the variation display of the effect symbol 114 and the advance notice effect associated therewith, and includes the effect symbol control means 152a, the advance notice effect control means 152b, and the like. The effect symbol control means 152a controls the display of the effect symbol 114 and the accompanying audio output, illumination emission, etc. via the effect control means 150, and designates the first and second fluctuation patterns from the main control board 121. When a command is received, the fluctuation of the effect symbol 114 based on the designated fluctuation pattern, the accompanying audio output, and the illumination emission are started, and when the first and second fluctuation stop designation commands are received, the first The fluctuation of the effect symbol 114 is stopped by the stop symbol mode selected based on the first and second stop symbol mode designation commands and the first and second fluctuation pattern designation commands, and the accompanying audio output and illumination emission are output. It is designed to stop.

In the advance notice effect control means 152b, the first, first, whether or not the stop symbol after the change of the first and second special symbols becomes the first and second jackpot mode and the first and second special profit states occur, etc. It controls the advance notice effect regarding the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the effect symbol 114. The advance notice effect includes a "look-ahead advance notice effect" performed based on the look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means 138a, a "normal advance notice effect" performed based on a jackpot determination result at the start of symbol variation by the special symbol processing means 140, and the like. ..

Further, in the "look-ahead notice effect", based on the look-ahead determination result, the same mode of effect is executed in a plurality of symbol changes up to the symbol change corresponding to the special random number information that is the target of the look-ahead determination. In addition to the "look-ahead continuous effect", there is a "look-ahead hold change effect" that displays the first and second hold display images X1 and Y1 in a predetermined display mode as shown in FIG. 15 based on the look-ahead determination result.

In addition, the "normal notice production" includes "conversation notice production", "step-up notice production", "button notice production", "mini character notice production", and the like. In the "conversation notice effect", the character's dialogue is displayed on the image display means 60 while the first and second special symbols are changing, and the content of the dialogue is the first and second big hits for the first and second special symbols. It has come to suggest the reliability (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot reliability) as an aspect. In the "step-up notice effect", during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, a predetermined effect step including the display of the effect image on the image display means 60 is performed in a plurality of stages (for example, five stages) according to the jackpot reliability. ) Is executed up to the predetermined stage. In this step-up notice production, the jackpot reliability is set to increase as the stage of the production step progresses.

In the "button notice effect", when it is determined that the operation of the effect button 34 satisfies the predetermined operation condition (operation is established) during the operation valid period during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, the jackpot reliability is determined. A predetermined operation effect is executed accordingly. In the "mini-character notice effect", one or a plurality of mini-character images are displayed on the image display means 60, and an operation suggesting the reliability of the jackpot is performed.

Regarding the look-ahead notice effect, the advance notice effect control means 152b performs a lottery to start execution when a predetermined condition such as receiving the first and second hold increase commands and not performing the look-ahead continuous effect is being performed, and a plurality of types of advance notice effect control means 152b. When at least one of the look-ahead notice effects (pre-reading continuous effect, look-ahead hold change effect, etc.) is won, the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is started, and with respect to the normal advance notice effect, the first and second special symbols are changed. At the start, that is, when the first and second hold reduction commands, the first and second fluctuation pattern designation commands, and the first and second stop symbol mode designation commands are received within a certain period of time, a lottery is performed, and a plurality of types of normal When at least one of the advance notice effects (conversation notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) is won, the normal advance notice effect is executed during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols.

The launch guidance notification control means 153 controls the launch guidance notification that the launch should be aimed at one of the left and right sides of the game area 23, and "← left" that the launch should be aimed at the left flow path 108a side. Left-handed guidance image 162a (FIG. 16 (a)) and right-handed guidance image 162b (FIG. 16 (b)) such as “to the right →” indicating that the vehicle should be launched aiming at the right flow path 108b side. Any of them is configured to be displayed on the image display means 60 via the image display control means 150a at a predetermined timing during the game.

In the present embodiment, the probability that the normal symbol display means 51 will be in the hit mode is low during the normal game state, and even if the normal symbol display means 51 is in the hit mode and a normal profit state is generated, the opening time of the second special symbol starting means 57 is short. Therefore, the probability of winning the second special symbol starting means 57 is extremely low (FIG. 12). Therefore, during the normal game state, rather than hitting right at the normal symbol starting means 55 and the second special symbol starting means 57 on the right flow path 108b side, hitting left and first special from the left flow path 108a side. Since it is more advantageous for the player to aim for winning the symbol starting means 56, it is desirable to display the left-handed guidance image 162a at a predetermined timing such as at the end of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, since the big winning means 58 is open during the first and second special profit states, the player should aim at the big winning means 58 on the right flow path 108b side and hit right. Further, during the special game state, the probability that the normal symbol display means 51 will be in the hit mode is high, and the opening time of the second special symbol starting means 57 when the normal symbol display means 51 is in the hit mode and the normal profit state is generated becomes long. Therefore (FIG. 12), it is advantageous for the player to hit right at the normal symbol starting means 55 and the second special symbol starting means 57 on the right flow path 108b side. Therefore, it is desirable to display the right-handed guidance image 162b at a predetermined timing during the first and second special profit states and the special gaming state.

In the case of the present embodiment, in the case of the first and second special profit states of the opening pattern α, the opening time of the large winning means 58 is short, and the special gaming state generated after the end is the latent probability change. Therefore, it is desirable not to display the right-handed guidance image 162b because the opening extension of the second special symbol starting means 57 is not performed (FIG. 13). Further, only one of the left-handed guidance image 162a and the right-handed guidance image 162b may be displayed, and the right-handed guidance image 162b may be displayed.

The error notification control means 154 controls error notification, and notifies the image display means 60 of the error via the image display control means 150a from the time when the error command is received from the main control board 121 to the time when the error release command is received. Error notification such as displaying image 163 is executed. In the case of a door opening error, an error notification image 163 such as "door opening" is displayed on the image display means 60 from the time when the door opening command is received from the main control board 121 to the time when the door opening release command is received. (Fig. 17).

The volume adjusting means 155 controls the volume setting, and the volume adjusting notification image (notification) indicating that the operation for adjusting the volume is possible during the volume adjusting period in which the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation. Image) 116a (FIG. 18A) is displayed on the image display means 60 at a predetermined timing, and a volume setting image showing the volume setting status when a player operates the volume adjustment during the volume adjustable period. It is configured to display 117a (FIG. 19A) on the image display means 60. In the present embodiment, the left key 35c and the right key 35d of the cross operation means 35 are assigned for the volume adjustment operation, and if the left key 35c is pressed during the volume adjustable period, the volume is lowered and the right key 35d is pressed. If you do, the volume will increase.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the volume-adjustable notification image 116a is composed of an illustration showing the left key 35c and the right key 35d used for volume adjustment, and the characters “volume adjustment”. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the volume setting image 117a is composed of a plurality of (5) scale images corresponding to the volume of a predetermined stage (for example, 5 stages) and characters of "volume". The number of scale images corresponding to the current volume setting is displayed in a mode (for example, display color) different from that of other scale images.

When the player operates either the left key 35c or the right key 35d during the volume adjustable period, the volume adjustable notification image 116a (FIG. 18A) is displayed, and the volume adjustable notification is displayed. The image 116a is erased from the image display means 60. Further, the volume is changed according to the player's operation, and the volume setting image 117a (FIG. 19A) corresponding to the changed volume is displayed on the image display means 60 for a certain period of time.

In the present embodiment, the volume adjustable period is set not only during the customer waiting state described later but also during other gaming states, but a predetermined period such as after the power is turned on may be excluded from the volume adjustable period. Further, the volume-adjustable notification image 116a may be displayed at all times during the volume-adjustable period, or the volume-adjustable notification image 116a may be displayed only during a specific period such as during a customer waiting state. If either the left key 35c or the right key 35d is operated while the volume setting image 117a is not displayed, the volume setting image 117a is displayed but the volume is not changed in the first operation. The volume may be changed by the second and subsequent operations after the volume setting image 117a is displayed.

The light amount adjusting means 156 controls the light amount adjustment of the lighting means 159, and the light amount adjustment to the effect that the operation for adjusting the light amount is possible during the light amount adjustable period in which the light amount can be adjusted by the player's operation. The possible notification image (notification image) 116b (FIG. 18B) is displayed on the image display means 60 at a predetermined timing, and when the player operates the light amount adjustment during the light amount adjustable period, the setting status of the light amount. The light intensity setting image 117b (FIG. 19B) showing the above is displayed on the image display means 60. In the present embodiment, the upper key 35a and the lower key 35b of the cross operating means 35 are assigned for the light amount adjustment operation, and if the upper key 35a is pressed during the light amount adjustable period, the light amount is increased and the lower key 35b is pressed. If so, the amount of light will decrease.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the light amount adjustable notification image 116b is composed of an illustration showing the upper key 35a and the lower key 35b used for the light amount adjustment, and the characters “light amount adjustment”. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the light amount setting image 117b is composed of a plurality of (5) scale images corresponding to the light amount of a predetermined stage (for example, 5 stages) and the characters of "light amount". The number of scale images corresponding to the current light intensity setting is displayed in a mode (for example, display color) different from that of other scale images.

When the player operates either the up key 35a or the down key 35b during the light amount adjustable period, when the light amount adjustable notification image 116b (FIG. 18B) is displayed, the light amount adjustable notification is displayed. The image 116b is erased from the image display means 60. Further, the light amount is changed according to the player's operation, and the light amount setting image 117b (FIG. 19B) corresponding to the changed light amount is displayed on the image display means 60 for a certain period of time.

In the present embodiment, the light amount adjustable period and the volume adjustable period are set to the same period, but both periods may be different. Further, the light amount adjustable notification image 116b may be displayed at all times during the light amount adjustable period, or the light amount adjustable notification image 116b may be displayed only during a specific period such as during a customer waiting state. Further, when either the upper key 35a or the lower key 35b is operated while the light amount setting image 117b is not displayed, the light amount setting image 117b is displayed in the first operation, but the light amount is not changed. The light amount may be changed by the second and subsequent operations after the light amount setting image 117b is displayed.

The customer waiting control means 157 receives a customer waiting demo command from the main control board 121 until the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54 start to change the first and second special symbols. It controls the effect during the waiting state (waiting period), and can execute the customer waiting effect process (FIG. 20) and the menu management process (FIG. 21) in the timer interrupt.

In the present embodiment, the period from receiving the customer waiting demo command from the main control board 121 to the start of the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols (during the customer waiting state) is a setting change by a menu selection operation, etc. It is set to a menu operation period during which (settings related to the game) are possible, and the player presses the effect button 34 while waiting for the customer to display the menu image 118b (FIG. 25, etc.), and further, the state. By pressing the upper key 35a, the lower key 35b, and the effect button 34 of the cross operation means 35, it is possible to select and execute any of the selection items displayed on the menu image 118b.

In the present embodiment, since the cross operating means 35 is also used for adjusting the volume and the amount of light, the period during which the menu image 118b is displayed (the period during which the cross operating means 35 can be used for the menu selection operation) is It is desirable to exclude it from the volume adjustable period and the light amount adjustable period so that the cross operating means 35 cannot be used for the volume and light amount adjusting operation.

Subsequently, the customer waiting effect processing shown in FIG. 20 will be described. In this customer waiting effect processing, first, the customer waiting state flag is determined (S1). This customer waiting state flag indicates whether or not the customer is waiting for a customer, and 1 is set if the customer is waiting for a customer, and 0 is set if the flag is not waiting for a customer. If the customer waiting flag is not 1 (S1: No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo command has been received from the main control board 121 (S2), and the customer waiting demo command has not been received (S2). : No) ends the customer waiting effect processing here.

The customer waiting demo command is used not only when the first and second special hold numbers are both 0 and the first and second special symbols are in the variable standby state, but also when the backup is restored from the customer waiting state, the RAM. It is transmitted from the main control board 121 to the effect control board 122 at the time of clearing or the like.

If a customer waiting demo command is received while not in the customer waiting state (S1: No → S2: Yes), the customer waiting state flag is set to 1 (customer waiting state) (S3), and an image is displayed. The display of the menu displayable notification image 118a to the means 60 is started (S4). Here, the menu displayable notification image (notification image) 118a is for notifying that the operation for displaying the menu image 118b is possible, and as shown in FIG. 24, the effect button used for the menu display. It is composed of an illustration showing how 34 is pressed and the characters "menu display with".

Then, the customer waiting normal effect is started (S5), the initial value is set in the demo timer (S6), and the customer waiting effect process is completed. In the customer waiting normal effect, the image of the effect symbol 114 in the state of being stopped due to the previous symbol change is continuously displayed on the image display means 60, the illumination means 159 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the speakers 18 and 25 emit light. Outputs a predetermined BGM. The demo timer is for measuring the duration of the normal effect of waiting for customers, and a value corresponding to 180 s is set as an initial value.

The menu operationable period starts when the customer waiting demo command is received, but the display of the menu displayable notification image 118a on the image display means 60 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) after receiving the customer waiting command. ) It may be after the lapse. In addition to the predetermined time (for example, 30 s) after the start of the customer waiting state, the menu displayable notification image 118a is displayed during the predetermined period during the customer waiting state (for example, the company logo is being displayed during the customer waiting demo production described later). You may not do it.

If the customer waiting state flag is 1 (customer waiting state) in S1 (S1: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the first and second special symbols has arrived, that is, the first and second It is determined whether or not a variation pattern designation command or the like has been received (S7). Then, when the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols has not started yet (S7: No), whether or not the customer waiting normal production is in progress, that is, the customer waiting normal production is in progress and the customer waiting demonstration production described later is in progress. (S8), if the customer waiting normal production is in progress (S8: Yes), the demo timer is subtracted by 1 (S9), and the value of the demo timer after the subtraction is 0. At (S10: Yes), the execution of the customer waiting demo production is started (S11). On the other hand, if the value of the demo timer after subtraction is not 0 (S10: No), the customer waiting normal effect is continued as it is (S10a).

In the customer waiting demonstration effect, the model image image, the company logo image, the stop image of the effect symbol 114, and the like are repeatedly displayed on the image display means 60 in a predetermined pattern, the illumination means 159 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the speaker 18 A predetermined BGM is output from, 25. The audio output may be stopped in the customer waiting demo production.

After the start of the customer waiting demo production (S8: No), the customer waiting demo production is repeatedly executed (S12) until the fluctuation start timing of the first and second special symbols arrives (S7: Yes). It should be noted that the customer-waiting demonstration effect and the customer-waiting normal effect may be alternately and repeatedly executed.

Further, when it is determined in S7 that the fluctuation start timing of the first and second special symbols has arrived (S7: Yes), the customer waiting state flag is set to 0 (S13), and the customer waiting during execution is performed. The normal effect or the customer waiting demo effect is ended (S14), the display of the menu displayable notification image 118a is ended (S15), the menu non-operation timer is cleared to 0 (S16), and the customer waiting effect process is ended. The menu non-operation timer will be described later.

Subsequently, the menu management process shown in FIG. 21 will be described. In this menu management process, first, a subtraction process of the menu non-operation timer, that is, a process of subtracting 1 on the condition that the value is larger than 0 is performed (S21, S22). Here, the menu non-operation timer is for measuring the non-operation period during menu display, and the initial values are set in S48 (FIG. 22) and S66 (FIG. 23) described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not any of the effect button 34 and the up / down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 is pressed, and when the effect button 34 is pressed (S23: Yes), when the effect button is pressed. The process (S24) is performed when the upper key 35a of the cross operation means 35 is pressed (S25: Yes), the process when the upper key is pressed (S26), and when the lower key 35b is pressed (S27: Yes). Executes the process (S28) when the down key is pressed, respectively. In the present embodiment, simultaneous pressing of each key of the effect button 34 and the cross operation means 35 is not allowed.

The process (S24) when the effect button is pressed when the effect button 34 is pressed is performed by the procedure shown in FIG. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state flag is 1, that is, whether or not the menu can be operated (S41), and when the customer waiting state flag is not 1 (S41: No). At this point, the process when the effect button is pressed ends.

If the customer waiting state flag is 1 (S41: Yes), it is determined whether or not the menu image flag is 1 (S42). Here, the menu image flag indicates whether or not the menu image is being displayed, and 1 is set while the menu image is being displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the menu image 118b includes a plurality of (four in this case) selection item images 164a to correspond to a plurality of selection items including "return" for returning to the previous display state. It is composed of 164d, and a cursor indicating a tentative selection state is positioned in any of the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164d.

The menu image 118b of FIG. 25 is composed of four types of selection item images 164a to 164d of "history", "mode change", "guidance", and "back", and is indicated by a cursor (hatched in the drawing) in the initial state. ) Is located in the "back" selection item image 164d.

If the menu image flag is not 1 in S42 (S42: No), the display of the menu displayable notification image 118a is terminated (S43), and the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c are displayed on the image display means 60. Is started (S44, S45) and the menu display sound is output from the speakers 18 and 25 (S46). Here, the menu operation notification image 118c is for notifying the operation method related to the menu image 118b, and as shown in FIG. 25, is an illustration showing the up / down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 used for moving the cursor. It is composed of the characters of "selection", the illustration of the effect button 34 used for determining the selection item (selection confirmation operation), and the characters of "decision".

Then, 1 (during menu image display) is set in the menu image flag (S47), an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 10s) is set in the menu non-operation timer (S48), and the process when the effect button is pressed is completed. To do. In this way, when the effect button 34 is pressed while waiting for customers and the menu image 118b is not displayed, the menu image 118b is displayed on the image display means 60.

If the menu image flag is 1 (menu image is being displayed) in S42 (S42: Yes), the determination sound is output from the speakers 18 and 25 (S49), and the selection item image of the cursor position (temporary selection state) is output. The specific process corresponding to (S50 to S54) is executed. That is, if the selection item image at the cursor position has a lower menu (S50: Yes), the lower menu is displayed (S51), and if the selection item image at the cursor position is "return" (S52: Yes). When returning to the previous state (S53), the lower menu does not exist in the selection item image of the cursor position (S50: No), and it is not "return" (S52: No), the selection item of the cursor position The process corresponding to the image is executed (S54). Then, an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 10s) is set in the menu non-operation timer (S48), and the process when the effect button is pressed is terminated. As described above, the act of pressing the effect button 34 while the selection item image is displayed is an example of the selection confirmation operation for selecting the selection item image at the cursor position (temporary selection state).

In the example of the menu image 118b shown in FIG. 25, the selection item image in which the lower menu exists is "mode change". This "mode change" is for changing the mode setting, and when this "mode change" is selected, the lower menu image 119 as shown in FIG. 26 is displayed. The lower menu image 119 is composed of a plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e (lower selection items) including a "menu screen" for returning to the first menu screen, and the initial position of the cursor is other than the "menu screen". The selection item is set to any of the images 164a to 164d.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a in the customer waiting state is different for each of the plurality of types, for example, the four types of the first to fourth modes, and the four types of modes can be switched. Can be performed by this "mode change" menu operation. Since the arrangement of the movable bodies 75a to 78a is different for each mode, the movable concealed area C and the non-concealed area D are also different for each mode.

In the first mode, as shown in FIG. 28A, the first movable body 75a is in the first upper position, the second movable body 76a is in the second lower position, and the third movable body 77a is in the third external position. The fourth movable body 78a is in a state of being stopped at the fourth external position, respectively. Further, in the second mode, as shown in FIG. 28B, only the stop position of the first movable body 75a changes from the first upper position to the first lower position with respect to the first mode, and the first mode On the other hand, the lower side of the non-concealed area D is narrowed and the upper side is widened.

Further, in the third mode, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the second movable body 76a is changed from the second lower position to the second upper position with respect to the first mode, and is less concealed than the first mode. The lower side of the area D is narrowed. Further, in the fourth mode, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are moved from the third and fourth external positions to the third and fourth internal positions, respectively, with respect to the third mode. This is a variation, and the width of the non-concealed region D is narrower than that of the third mode. In the initial state, it is assumed that the first mode is set.

When the lower menu image 119 corresponding to this "mode change" is displayed, the initial position of the cursor is set to the selection item image corresponding to the mode at that time (corresponding to the first mode in the initial state) as shown in FIG. It is desirable to set the selection item image 164a) to be selected, but regardless of the mode at that time, the selection item image 164e corresponding to the "menu screen" for returning to the first menu screen is set at the initial position of the cursor. You may.

A lower menu may be further provided in any of the selection item images of the lower menu image 119. That is, the number of layers of the menu is arbitrary. In addition, the initial position of the cursor when moving to a specific menu image may be different depending on whether the cursor is moved from a higher menu image or a lower menu image. It is desirable to set the initial position of the cursor when returning from the menu image to a selection item image such as "menu screen", "return", etc. for moving to a higher level.

Further, in the example of the menu image shown in FIG. 25, the selection item image having no lower menu is "history", and when the selection of this "history" is decided, the jackpot history as shown in FIG. 27 Information is displayed. Even when the selection of the selection item image that does not have such a lower menu is determined, as shown in FIG. 27, the image display means 60 has a "menu screen" or the like for returning to the upper menu such as the menu screen. The selection item image of the above and the menu operation notification image 118c for notifying the determination operation of the selection item are displayed.

Further, the processing when the upper key 35a of the cross operating means 35 is pressed (S26 in FIG. 21) and the processing when the lower key 35b is pressed (S28 in FIG. 21) are the same. The procedure is as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 23 shows a flowchart of the processing when the upper key is pressed, and only the difference between the processing when the upper key is pressed and the processing when the lower key is pressed is shown in parentheses. Here, the processing when the upper key is pressed will be described, and the processing when the lower key is pressed will also be mentioned therein.

In the process when the upper key (lower key) is pressed as shown in FIG. 23, it is first determined whether or not the menu image flag is 1, that is, whether or not the menu image or the like is being displayed (S61), and the menu image flag is set. If it is not 1, that is, if the menu image or the like is not being displayed (S61: No), the processing when the up key (down key) is pressed ends here.

If the menu image flag is 1, that is, if the menu image or the like is being displayed (S61: Yes), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is the highest position (the lowest position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed). (S62), if it is not the highest position (the lowest position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S62: No), move the cursor up one (in the case of processing when the down key is pressed, down one). (S64), if it is the highest position (the lowest position in the case of processing when the lower key is pressed) (S62: Yes), the cursor is moved to the lowest position (the highest position in the case of processing when the lower key is pressed) (S63). ). Then, the cursor movement sound is output from the speakers 18 and 25 (S65), the initial value (for example, the value corresponding to 10s) is set in the menu non-operation timer (S66), and the processing when the up key (down key) is pressed is performed. finish.

In this way, the up / down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 are effective for the operation related to menu selection while the menu image 118b is displayed, the upper key 35a moves the cursor upward, and the lower key 35b moves the cursor downward. The cursor is moved in a circular motion by moving the images and moving them continuously.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Following the processing of S23 to S28 as described above, it is determined whether or not the value of the menu non-operation timer is 0 (S29), and the value of the menu non-operation timer is not 0, that is, the effect button 34. If any of the up and down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operating means 35 has not yet passed a predetermined time (for example, 10s) since the last operation, the menu management process ends here.

If the value of the menu non-operation timer is 0 in S29, that is, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 s) has elapsed since any of the effect button 34 and the up / down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 was last operated. (S29: Yes), on condition that the menu image flag is 1 (displaying the menu image, etc.) (S30: Yes), the display of the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c is terminated (S31, S32). ), The display of the menu displayable notification image 118a is started (S33), 0 is set in the menu image flag (S34), and the menu management process is terminated. In this way, when the non-operation period during the menu display reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 s), the display of the menu image 118b or the like ends, and the operation wait state is set.

The power saving mode setting means 158 sets the power saving mode. When the power saving mode that consumes less power than the normal mode is selected, the power saving mode is set to the power saving mode while waiting for a customer, and the power saving mode is in progress. The power saving mode notification image 120 (FIG. 29, etc.) indicating that the power saving mode is displayed on the image display means 60. During the power saving mode, the energization of the illumination means 159 is stopped. It should be noted that a switching operation means for selecting either the normal mode or the power saving mode may be provided on the back side of the front frame 3 or the like so that the person in charge of the game hall or the like can operate it.

In addition, when the volume is set in a predetermined range (for example, the first stage of the first to fifth stages), the power saving mode is set, and in other cases, the normal mode is set. The normal mode and the power saving mode may be automatically switched according to the setting status of the setting item (for example, volume).

Subsequently, the relationship between the various images displayed on the image display means 60 and the areas A, B1 to B5, C, and D on the display screen 60a of the image display means 60 will be described for each of the various scenes.

FIG. 30A shows a display image of the image display means 60 in a scene while waiting for a customer. In the example of FIG. 30A, it is assumed that the first mode (FIG. 28A) and the power saving mode are set, and that the customer waiting normal production is in progress. Further, FIG. 30B shows the correspondence between each image of FIG. 30A and the area on the display screen 60a. In FIG. 30 (b), the lower the image in the table, the higher the display priority (the same applies to FIGS. 31 (b) to 38 (b)).

As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, a background image 160 (shown in gray in FIG. 30A) is displayed on the display screen 60a for the entire screen area A, and the immediately preceding symbol is displayed. An image of the effect symbol 114 in a state of being stopped due to fluctuation is displayed straddling the non-concealed area D and the movable concealed area C. Of the effect symbols 114, the entire symbol image 114a is displayed in the non-concealed region D, and a part of the decorative image 114b is displayed behind the movable concealed region C and the first movable body 75a. As a result, the limited non-concealed area D can be effectively used while clearly notifying the result of the immediately preceding symbol change.

Of the three effect symbols 114 on the left, right, and middle, the left and right effect symbols 114 are displayed so as to straddle at least one of the non-concealment area D and the first to third fixed concealment areas B1 to B3. May be good. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide interval between the three effect symbols 114, and it is possible to effectively utilize the limited non-concealed region D to more clearly notify the result of the symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable that the portion displayed in the first to third fixed concealment areas B1 to B3 is the decorative image 114b, but a part of the symbol image 114a is displayed in the first to third fixed concealment areas B1 to B3. You may.

The layout such as the size of the decorative image 114b may be different depending on the type (number) of the design image 114a. In this case, the decorative image 114b is displayed so as to straddle the non-concealed area D and the predetermined concealed area (any of the above-mentioned concealed areas may be used) even if the decorative image 114b differs depending on the type of the symbol image 114a. You may. Further, a part of the decorative image 114b may be displayed across the non-concealed area D and a predetermined concealed area, and the other decorative image 114b may be displayed only in the non-concealed area D. Further, the layout of the decorative image 114b may be changed according to the fluctuation lines of the three effect symbols 114 on the left, right, and middle.

The decorative image 114b is displayed so as to straddle the non-concealed area D and the predetermined concealed area. For example, it is desirable to configure the decorative image 114b in this way when the symbol is stopped. In the fluctuating state of the symbol, it is not necessary to display over the non-concealed region D and the predetermined concealed region, and various display configurations may be made according to the fluctuating state of the symbol.

A predetermined animation may be added to the design image 114a and the decorative image 114b. For example, the symbol image 114a and the decorative image 114b are animated when the symbol changes, temporarily stops, reaches, stops, or stops in a detached mode, and the symbol stops in a hitting mode. May be good. Further, there may be a plurality of animation operations, and the animation operations may be different depending on the type of the design image 114a or the decorative image 114b or the above-mentioned situation. Even when such an animation is executed, the decorative image 114b may be displayed so as to straddle the non-concealed area D and the predetermined concealed area.

Further, when the animation is executed, it may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and the predetermined concealed area, and when the animation is not executed, it may be displayed only in the non-hidden area D. Further, as the reverse configuration, when the animation is executed, it may be displayed only in the non-hidden area D, and when it is not executed, it may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and the predetermined concealed area. By doing so, the visibility of the decorative image 114b can be improved at least when the animation is executed.

The decorative image 114b and the symbol image 114a of the effect symbol 114 are changed according to the game state (normal / time saving / latent / probability change), the game mode (background A / background B), the special game mode (look-ahead mode), and the like. You may. In this case, depending on the game state, the game mode, and the special game mode, the decorative image 114b differs depending on whether it is displayed across the non-concealed area D and the predetermined concealed area D or only in the non-concealed area D. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the error notification image 163, the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b are all displayed in the non-concealed region D. Since these images have a higher display priority than the effect symbol 114, they are displayed on the front side when they overlap a part of the effect symbol 114, but in that case, the symbol image 114a is avoided and overlaps with the decorative image 114b. It is desirable to display as.

It should be noted that the volume setting image 117a displayed when the player operates the left and right keys 35c and 35d while the volume adjustable notification image 116a is displayed, and the player moves up and down keys 35a while the light amount adjustable notification image 116b is displayed. As for the light amount setting image 117b displayed when the 35b is operated, all of them are displayed in the non-concealed region D as shown in FIG. 30 (b) (not shown in FIG. 30 (a)).

Further, the holding pedestal image 161 is located on the lower side of the display screen 60a at least a part of the non-concealed area D, the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5, and the movable concealed area C (here, the first to fifth fixed areas C). It is displayed so as to straddle the concealed areas B1 to B5). Since the first and second special hold numbers are both 0 during the customer waiting state, the hold pedestal image 161 is of low importance. Therefore, at least a part of the hold pedestal image 161 is displayed in an area other than the non-concealment area D to be non-concealed. Area D can be used more effectively. The entire holding pedestal image 161 may be displayed in an area other than the non-concealed area D, or the holding pedestal image 161 may not be displayed.

Further, the power saving mode notification image 120 is located on the lower side of the display screen 60a and on the upper side of the holding pedestal image 161 at least a part of the non-concealed area D and the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 (here, the first). It is displayed straddling the fourth fixed concealment area B1 to B4). Since the power saving mode notification is less important than the error notification, the non-concealed area D can be used more effectively by displaying at least a part of the power saving mode notification image 120 in an area other than the non-hidden area D. it can.

Regarding the error notification image 163, when a plurality of errors are notified, all of the error notification images 163 corresponding to the plurality of errors may be displayed in the non-hidden area D. Further, when notifying a plurality of errors, up to a predetermined number (about 1 to 4) of the error notification images 163 are displayed in the non-hidden area D, and when notifying an error exceeding a predetermined number, a predetermined number is displayed. The excess amount is displayed across the non-concealed area D and at least one of the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5, or displayed in the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5. You may.

Further, the display area may be set according to the content of the error, and the error notification image 163 regarding the lower plate full error that may occur in the normal game is displayed in the non-hidden area D, and in the normal game such as opening the door. At least a part of the error notification image 163 regarding an error that cannot occur may be displayed in the first to fifth fixed concealment areas B1 to B5. In the case of a lower plate full error, it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 in the non-concealed area D, which is most visible to the player, because the lower plate opening operation by the player is required to clear the error.

In addition, regarding errors that may occur when a goto action is performed, such as a magnetic detection error, it is necessary to warn the player that the goto action may have been performed and notify the hall employees. Therefore, it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 in the non-concealed area D that is most easily visible to the player or the hall employee.

FIG. 31A shows a state in which the menu image 118b is displayed on the display screen 60a. The menu image 118b is displayed when the player operates the effect button 34 during the menu operation operable period (customer waiting state). Further, FIG. 31 (b) shows the correspondence between each image of FIG. 31 (a) and the area on the display screen 60a.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), a background image 160 (shown in gray in FIG. 31 (a)) is displayed on the display screen 60a for the entire screen area A, and a menu image 118b is displayed. The four selection item images 164a to 164d and the menu operation notification image 118c constituting the above are displayed. When this menu image 118b is displayed, the cursor (shown by hatching in FIG. 31A) is located at the selection item image 164d corresponding to "return".

The selection item image (initial temporary selection item image) 164d corresponding to at least the initial cursor position is entirely displayed in the non-concealed area D, while the other selection item images 164a to 164c are displayed. At least one of them (here, the selection item image 164a corresponding to the "history") protrudes outside the non-concealed area D into the non-concealed area D and the movable concealed area C (for example, the rear side of the first movable body 75a). The others (here, the selection item images 164b and 164c) are displayed straddling, and the whole is displayed in the non-concealed area D. Further, the entire menu operation notification image 118c is displayed in the non-concealed area D.

In this way, by displaying the entire selection item image (initial temporary selection item image) corresponding to at least the initial cursor position in the non-hidden area D, the player can be surely recognized the initial cursor position. It is possible to smoothly shift to the subsequent cursor movement operation and selection confirmation operation. Further, the non-concealed area D is more effective by displaying at least one of the selected item images other than the initial cursor position straddling the non-concealed area D and the area outside the non-concealed area D (for example, the movable concealed area C). Can be used for. Of course, all of the four selection item images 164a to 164d constituting the menu image 118b may be displayed in the non-concealed area D.

The menu operation notification image 118c is displayed only in the non-hidden area D, and the selection item images 164a to 164d corresponding to the initial cursor position and the other selection item images 164a to 164d are displayed in the non-hidden area D and the concealed area. It may be displayed so as to straddle. Even with this configuration, each selected item is not invisible, and at least the menu operation notification image 118c is visible, so that the player can perform a predetermined menu operation. It is possible to reliably notify that there is.

The menu image 118b may have a first menu hierarchy and a second menu hierarchy in which the display screen 60a transitions when the selection items displayed in the first menu hierarchy are operated by the player. For example, the menu hierarchy shown in FIG. 31 is set as the first menu hierarchy, and when a mode change is selected from each selection item, a second menu hierarchy in which the mode to be set can be selected is displayed. You may do so. Further, the menu hierarchy is not limited to the first layer and the second layer, and a plurality of layers may be further provided. Then, it is desirable that the display mode is the same as that of the first menu hierarchy in the second menu hierarchy and the like corresponding to each selection item selected by the player. Further, the display mode may be different between the first menu hierarchy and the second menu hierarchy. However, it is desirable to make a difference in which of the above-mentioned display modes is used.

Even if a predetermined error occurs during the display of the menu image 118b, it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 in the non-concealed area D. Further, it is desirable that the error notification image 163 is superimposed on each selection item of the menu image 118b.

Even while the menu image 118b is being displayed, the volume may be adjusted or the light intensity may be adjusted by operating a predetermined operating means or selecting and operating a predetermined selection item. .. Further, in this case, when displaying the volume setting image 117a or the light amount setting image 117b, it is desirable that the image is displayed only in the non-concealed area D.

When the movable bodies 75a and 76a move from the origin position to a predetermined effect position, the movable bodies 75a and 76a may stop operating at the predetermined effect position due to a defect or the like. In this way, even if the menu image 118b is displayed with the movable bodies 75a and 76a still positioned at the effect position, the display mode of each selection item of the menu image 118b, the menu operation notification image 118c, etc. The error notification image 163, the volume setting image 117a, and the light amount setting image 117b are displayed at positions that do not overlap with the movable bodies 75a and 76a and are displayed only in the non-concealed area D or at a position straddling the non-concealed area D and the concealed area. It is desirable to configure it as follows.

When initializing the movable body at the time of turning on the power, clearing the RAM, or at any other predetermined timing, at least the selection item image (initial temporary selection item image) corresponding to the initial cursor position is viewed from the front when initializing. It is desirable to display it at a position that does not overlap with the movement path of the movable body. As a result, even if the menu display operation is performed during the initialization of the movable body, the player can be surely recognized the initial cursor position.

In the selection item image corresponding to the initial cursor position, the part other than the part indicating the selection item name (for example, the character part of "return") is located at a position that overlaps with the movement path of the movable body at the time of initialization in front view. It may be displayed. Further, it is desirable that the menu operation notification image 118c is also displayed at a position that does not overlap with the operation path of the movable body at the time of initialization in the front view.

32 (a) and 33 (a) are examples of fluctuations of the effect symbol 114 due to the reach fluctuation pattern. FIG. 32 (a) shows the normal fluctuation before the reach is established, and FIG. 33 (a) shows the reach is established. It shows each of the later reach fluctuations. As is clear from FIGS. 32 (a) and 33 (a), the arrangement (stop position) of the movable body is different between the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32 (a) and the reach fluctuation shown in FIG. 33 (a). , The size of the non-concealed area D is different accordingly.

That is, during the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32 (a), the first movable body 75a is in the upper position, the second movable body 76a is in the upper position, and the third is in the same manner as in the fourth mode shown in FIG. 28 (d). , The fourth movable body 77a and 78a are stopped at the internal positions, respectively, but the second movable body 76a is in the lower lower position as shown in FIG. 33 (a) at a predetermined timing and immediately before the end of the normal fluctuation. In addition, the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a move to the outer external positions, respectively, so that the non-concealed region D is expanded to the lower side and both the left and right sides, respectively. The timing of changing the stop position of the movable body in the symbol variation due to the reach variation pattern may be the start of the reach effect, the execution of the look-ahead effect, the execution of the movable body effect, the end of the reach effect, or the like.

Further, in response to the change (enlargement) of the non-concealed area D, the display mode of the image displayed on the display screen 60a is also changed. That is, during the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32, the holding pedestal image 161 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a at least a part of the non-concealed area D and the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 (here, the first to first). It is displayed straddling the fourth fixed concealment area B1 to B4), and the hold display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z are displayed on the front side of the hold pedestal image 161 and in the non-hiding area D. Has been done. It should be noted that all or part of the hold display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z may be arranged in at least one of the movable concealment area C and the first to fifth fixed concealment areas B1 to B5. In that case, it is desirable that the player can see all of them if he looks into them.

On the other hand, during the reach fluctuation shown in FIG. 33, the holding pedestal image 161 and the holding display images X1 to Y1 are erased leaving the changing holding image Z, and the changing holding image Z expands the non-concealed area D. It moves to the side (lower side in this case) and is displayed so as to straddle the non-concealed area D and the area outside the non-concealed area D (for example, the fourth fixed concealed area B4). A part of the changing hold image Z during the reach fluctuation is hidden behind the central display frame unit 47 in the front view, but the entire image can be visually recognized when the player looks into it from above. ing.

As a result, the wider display area can be used for the reach effect in combination with the expansion of the non-concealed area D. It is desirable that the reach effect image 171 in this case is displayed in the full screen area A as shown in FIG. 33 (b).

The hold pedestal image 161 and the hold display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z are moved downward in accordance with the movement of the second movable body 76a, and the hold pedestal image 161 and the hold display images X1 to, Y1 to Y1 may be displayed so as to disappear outside the display screen 60a, or may be displayed in an enlarged area without being erased. Alternatively, the hold pedestal image 161 may be erased to leave the hold display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z in the enlarged area.

Further, regarding the effect symbol 114, during the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32, a part of the decorative image 114b is displayed in the area outside the non-concealed area D (for example, the movable concealed area C), and the other part is displayed in the non-concealed area D. During the reach fluctuation shown in FIG. 33, the decorative image 114b is erased and only the symbol image 114a is displayed in the non-concealed region D.

Further, regarding the volume setting image 117a displayed when the player performs the volume adjustment operation, the entire non-concealed region D is obtained in both the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32 and the reach fluctuation shown in FIG. 33. However, during the reach fluctuation, the display position may be moved to the enlarged side (for example, the lower side) of the non-concealed region D as compared with the normal fluctuation. In this case, it is desirable to move the display position of the volume setting image 117a after the movement of the second movable body 76a or the like is completed.

This is to prevent the player from being informed that the movement of the display position of the volume setting image 117a causes the subsequent shift to the reach variation. The handling of the light amount setting image 117b (not shown in FIGS. 32A and 33A) displayed when the player performs the light amount adjustment operation is the same as that of the volume setting image 117a.

It should be noted that the volume setting image 117a, the light amount setting image 117b, etc. are displayed in the non-concealed area D both during normal fluctuation (before changing the non-concealed area D) and during reach fluctuation (after changing the non-concealed area D). By displaying the image in the area belonging to the non-concealed area D both before and after the enlargement, the display position may not be moved when the reach fluctuates. Further, as in the examples of FIGS. 32 and 33, when the position and / or the width of the non-concealed area D can be changed by switching the stop position of the movable body during the symbol change, whether or not to change the position and / or the width. The player may arbitrarily select the body and the like. Further, during the reach fluctuation, the medium effect symbol or the like during the scroll fluctuation may be displayed larger than the other left effect symbol, the right effect symbol or the like. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time for one effect symbol to pass on the display screen 60a by scrolling.

When the movable bodies 75a and 76a are operated from the origin position to a predetermined effect position during the reach fluctuation, the volume setting image 117a and / or the light amount setting even when the movable bodies 75a and 76a are located at the predetermined effect position. It is desirable to display the image 117b in the non-concealed region D. Further, as a matter of course, the player can adjust the volume and / or the amount of light even in such a situation, but the setting result is actually reflected after the predetermined production involving the operation of the movable bodies 75a and 76a is completed. It is desirable to do it after that. Further, even if the effect does not involve the movement of the movable bodies 75a and 76a, it may be configured as described above.

By doing so, it becomes possible to execute the production without deteriorating the interest of the production by the sound or the lamp at the time of executing the predetermined production. Further, since the setting operation itself by the player is not invalid but is effectively accepted, the player is not inconvenienced or uncomfortable with the setting operation suddenly becoming impossible.

FIG. 34A shows a display area of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 displayed at each stage in the step-up notice effect which is an example of the normal notice effect. In this step-up notice production, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the number of stages of the five stages from the first stage to the fifth stage, and the step-up notice image SU1 is used to indicate the step-up notice. The display area gradually changes (enlarged here) up to the image SU5.

In the examples of FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the entire step-up notice image SU1 and the step-up notice image SU2 are displayed in the non-concealed area D, but a part of the step-up notice image SU3 is not displayed. It is displayed in the movable concealment area C beyond the concealment area D, and in the step-up notice image SU4, not only the movable concealment area C but also the second to fifth fixed concealment areas B2 to B5 are expanded, and finally the step-up notice image. In SU5 (not shown in FIG. 34 (a)), it is displayed in the full screen area A (FIG. 34 (b)). Even if a part of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 is displayed outside the non-concealed area D, the part of each of these images that suggests the jackpot reliability, etc. (character part indicating the character's dialogue, etc.) Is desirable to display the whole in the non-concealed area D.

Further, the introduction effect may be performed when the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 are displayed at a predetermined display position. Here, the introduction effect is to move the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 toward a predetermined display position, or to display the introduction effect image immediately before displaying the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 at a predetermined display position. The purpose is to notify the player of the occurrence of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5. This introduction effect may be displayed so as to straddle all or at least one of the first to fifth fixed concealment areas B1 to B5 and the non-concealment area D.

Further, the volume setting image 117a displayed when the player performs the volume adjustment operation is entirely displayed in the non-concealed area D, but a part suggesting the jackpot reliability and the like (character indicating the character's dialogue). It is desirable to avoid the display (parts, etc.). The same applies to the light amount setting image 117b (not shown) displayed when the player performs the light amount adjusting operation (not shown in FIG. 34A). It should be noted that the volume setting image 117a, the light amount setting image 117b, and the like may be displayed in an overlapping manner with a part other than the part suggesting the jackpot reliability or the like in the step-up notice image or the introduction effect.

By doing so, even if the step-up notice image is displayed using most of the non-concealed area D, the volume setting image 117a and the volume setting image 117a and the like are not impaired in the visibility of the step-up notice image. The light amount setting image 117b can be displayed in the non-concealed region D.

When displaying the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5, the display is basically started from the step-up notice image SU1, and the step-up notice images SU2, SU3 ... SU5 are displayed step by step. , When displaying the SU image of the next stage, the display of the previous SU image may be deleted. Further, the next SU image may be displayed without deleting the display of the previous SU image. In this case, it is desirable to display the next SU image so as to overlap a part of the previous SU image. Further, a larger SU image may be displayed as the steps are repeated.

Further, it was decided to display the next SU image so as to overlap the previous SU image. For example, the step-up notice image SU1 is displayed so that it overlaps with at least a part of the step-up notice image SU1. Is displayed, and when the step-up notice image SU3 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the step-up notice image SU2, the step-up notice image SU1 may be deleted when the step-up notice image SU3 is displayed. Good. Further, the process is not limited to deletion, and the step-up advance notice image SU1 may be made invisible by displaying the step-up advance notice image SU3 superimposed on the step-up advance notice image SU1.

It may be possible to execute a step-up notice ghost effect (failure effect). It is possible to display each SU image of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 in the Gase production, but the display mode is slightly different from that in the successful production. For example, in the step-up notice image SU1's disappointing effect, after the introduction effect of the step-up notice image SU1 is once executed, the step-up notice image SU1 in the non-executed state (for example, only the character does not display the balloon) is displayed, and then When the step-up notice image SU1 is executed, the step-up notice image SU1 (character and balloon are displayed) in the execution state is displayed, but this time it is a ghost effect, so the step-up notice image SU1 in the execution state is displayed. The step-up notice image SU1 in the non-executed state is deleted (with fade-out) and the step-up effect is ended without being performed.

In the case of executing the Gase effect in this way, the SU image in the introduction effect or the non-execution state may also be configured to be displayed in a predetermined display area for each step of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5. In addition, the step-up notice image SU5 may be configured so that there is no ghost effect.

The display areas of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various display modes may be used. For example, the display mode of the step-up notice image SU5 may be applied to the step-up notice image SU1 or the step-up notice image SU2, or the display mode of the step-up notice image SU1 or the step-up notice image SU2 may be applied to the step-up notice image SU3. It may be applied to ~ SU5. In this way, the above-mentioned display mode may be appropriately set for each SU image.

35 (a) and 36 (a) show display images of the image display means 60 in the button conversation notice effect, which is an example of the normal notice effect. It should be noted that this button conversation notice effect is a fusion of the button notice effect and the conversation notice effect, and at the time of operation indicating a scene in which the character utters a dialogue when the player operates the effect button 34 during the operation valid period. The production image 165 is displayed, and the content of the dialogue suggests the reliability of the jackpot. During the operation valid period, the operation guidance image 166 indicating that the effect button (operation means) 34 should be operated is displayed.

FIG. 35A shows a state in which the operation guidance image 166 is displayed during the operation valid period. The operation guidance image 166 is composed of an illustration showing how the effect button 34 is pressed and the characters “PUSH!”, And the whole thereof is displayed in the non-concealed area D. Further, around the operation guidance image 166, radial and other effect images 167 are displayed so as to straddle the non-concealment region D and the region outside the non-concealment region D (here, the movable concealment region C and the third fixed concealment region B3). Has been done.

A gauge image showing the progress of the operation valid period may be displayed. In this case, it is desirable to display the gauge image in the non-concealed area D. The operation guidance image 166 may be displayed so that a part thereof (for example, a portion showing the effect button 34) straddles at least one of the concealed areas B1 to B5 and C, but even in that case, the gauge portion is not. It is desirable to display in the concealed area D. When a plurality of operation means are provided and it is possible to execute a notice effect (button notice effect) corresponding to each of the plurality of operation means, it is desirable to configure each of the notice effects as described above. Further, when there is a difference in jackpot reliability or the like between a plurality of advance notice effects corresponding to a plurality of operation means, the above may be configured only for the advance notice effects having high reliability.

Further, FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the player operates the effect button 34 in the state shown in FIG. 35 (a) and the effect image 165 at the time of operation is displayed. The operation-time effect image 165 is composed of a first display unit 165a composed of characters representing a dialogue suggesting jackpot reliability, and a second display unit 165b composed of other characters, balloons, and the like. The entire display unit 165a is displayed in the non-concealed area D, and the second display unit 165b is the non-concealed area D and the area outside it (here, the transparent concealed area B4a of the fourth fixed concealed area B4). Of course, it may be displayed across other concealed areas B1 to B3, B5, and C). Since the transparent concealment area B4a is an area corresponding to the rear side of the transparent entry prevention means 111, the second display unit 165b on the rear side of the entry prevention means 111 can be visually recognized even from the front.

Further, in both of FIGS. 35 (a) and 36 (a), the fluctuating effect symbol 114 is displayed in the non-concealed area D as a whole with only the symbol image 114a, and the player makes a volume. The entire volume setting image 117a displayed when the adjustment operation is performed is also displayed in the non-concealed area D. The same applies to the light amount setting image 117b (not shown) displayed when the player performs the light amount adjusting operation (not shown in FIGS. 35A and 36A).

As the type of the operation guidance image 166, various different operation guidance images 166 such as "continuous hit", "long press", "do not press", and "release" may be displayed. Further, as the type of operation button, when a plurality of operation means are provided, the first button image and the second button image may be displayed. Further, when it is possible to change the mode of the operation means 1, the button image of the first mode, the button image of the second mode, and the like may be displayed. Further, depending on the reliability of the lottery result of the variable display, the display mode of the button image may be displayed in various display modes such as blue, green, red, and rainbow colors.

It is desirable that the volume setting image 117a and / or the light amount adjustment image 117b be displayed so as not to overlap with the gauge image, not limited to the effect button image and the operation guidance image 166. Further, when the operation effective period differs depending on the display mode of the effect button 34 and the display mode of the operation guidance image 166, it is conceivable to increase or decrease the display area of the gauge image, but in any case. It is desirable to display the image at a position that does not overlap with the gauge image.

Of course, in the execution of an effect that involves button operation such as a button conversation notice effect, the player can adjust the volume and / or the amount of light even in such a situation, but the setting result is actually reflected by the button. It is desirable that the operation effect is completed. However, the actual setting result may be reflected at least by the end of the operation valid period in which the button image or gauge image is displayed, or after the operation by the player is performed, the effect image at the time of operation is displayed. It may be displayed and reflected before the display ends.

By doing so, it becomes possible to execute the production without deteriorating the interest of the production by the sound or the lamp at the time of executing the predetermined production. Further, since the setting operation itself by the player is not invalid but is effectively accepted, the player is not inconvenienced or uncomfortable with the setting operation suddenly becoming impossible.

37 (a) and 38 (a) show the display image of the image display means 60 in the mini character notice effect which is an example of the normal advance notice effect. In this mini character notice effect, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), first, a plurality of mini character images, for example, a first mini character image (first effect image) 168 and a second mini character image (second effect image) 169 are displayed. Appear. At this time, both the first mini character image 168 and the second mini character image 169 are displayed so as to straddle the non-concealed area D and the area outside the non-concealed area D (here, the movable concealed area C).

Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the ratio of the first mini character image 168 displayed in the non-hidden area D becomes smaller, and the ratio of the second mini character image 169 displayed in the non-hidden area D becomes smaller. The display positions of the mini character images 168 and 169 are changed so as to be large, and the reliability display image 170 is displayed in the non-concealed area D corresponding to the second mini character image 169. The reliability display image 170 displays the dialogue of the second mini character image 169, and is a first display unit 170a composed of characters representing the dialogue suggesting jackpot reliability and a second display unit composed of other balloons and the like. It is composed of 170b. The entire first display unit 170a may be displayed in the non-concealed area D, and at least a part of the second display unit 170b may be displayed outside the non-concealed area D (for example, the movable concealed area C). Good.

Further, the fluctuating effect symbol 114 is displayed in the non-concealed area D as a whole with only the symbol image 114a, and the volume setting image 117a displayed when the player performs the volume adjustment operation is also the same. The whole is displayed in the non-hidden area D. The same applies to the light amount setting image 117b (not shown) displayed when the player performs the light amount adjusting operation (not shown in FIGS. 37A and 38A). Since the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b are set to have a higher priority than the reliability display image 170, the volume setting image 117a and the like are displayed on the front side when they overlap with the reliability display image 170. However, it is desirable that the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b are displayed so as not to overlap at least the first display unit 170a of the reliability display images 170.

Further, the holding pedestal image 161 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a so as to straddle the non-concealed area D and the outer areas (here, the first to fourth fixed concealed areas B1 to B4). The hold display images X1 and Y1 and the changing hold image Z are displayed on the front side of the hold pedestal image 161 and in the non-concealed area D. Here, the hold pedestal image 161 is set to have a higher priority than the mini character images 168 and 169, and a part of the second mini character image 169 overlaps with the hold pedestal image 161 and is hidden behind. (Fig. 37 (a)). Then, when the second mini character image 169 is moved so that the proportion displayed in the non-concealed area D becomes large (FIG. 37 (a) → FIG. 38 (a)), the portion of the portion not hidden in the hold pedestal image 161 is formed. The proportion is also increasing. The mini character images 168 and 169 may be set to have a higher priority than the hold pedestal image 161.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment displays the image display means 60 capable of displaying an image on the display screen 60a and the game members 45, 47, 49, 74 arranged in front of the display screen 60a. The display screen 60a includes movable bodies 75a to 78a that are configured to be operable on the front side of the screen 60a and can be stopped at a predetermined stop position, and operating means 34 and 35 that can be operated by the player. Fixed concealment areas (first display area) B1 to B5 corresponding to the rear side of the members 45, 47, 49, 74 and movable concealment area (second display area) corresponding to the rear side of the stop positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a. ) C and a non-concealed area (third display area) D that is neither the fixed concealed area B1 to B5 nor the movable concealed area C, and the setting related to the game is based on the operation of the operating means 34 and 35 by the player. It is possible to display the notification images 116a, 116b, 118a for notifying that the operation means 34, 35 can be operated, and the notification images 116a, 116b, 118a can be moved to the fixed concealment areas B1 to B5. It is configured not to be displayed in the concealed area C but to be displayed in the non-concealed area D.

Further, the menu image 118b having a plurality of selection items can be displayed, and the notification image includes the menu displayable notification image 118a to the effect that the operation for displaying the menu image 118b is possible.

Further, the volume setting image 117a showing the volume setting status is not displayed in the fixed concealment areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealment area C, but can be displayed in the non-concealment area D. Further, the light amount setting image 117b showing the setting status of the light amount can be displayed in the non-concealed area D without being displayed in the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C. Further, the error notification image 163 for notifying an error can be displayed in the non-concealed area D without being displayed in the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C. Further, it is possible to switch to the power saving mode in which the power consumption is lower than usual, and the power saving mode notification image 120 indicating that the power saving mode is in progress straddles the non-concealed area D and the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5. It can be displayed.

Further, every time the starting means 56 and 57 detect a game ball, the starting detection processing means 138 that acquires a random number value and stores the random number value in the random number storage means 139 up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the symbol variation start. When the condition is satisfied, the symbol display means 53, 54 that fluctuates and displays the symbol based on the random number value stored in the random number storage means 139, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation by the symbol display means 53, 54 are specific modes. It is stored in the random number storage means 139 by providing the profit state generating means 142 for generating the profit state in the case of the case, and displaying the hold display images X1 to Y1 on the hold pedestal image 161 and displaying them on the image display means 60. It is possible to notify the number of pending numbers, which is the number of random numbers that have not yet been subjected to symbol variation by the symbol display means 53 and 54, and the reserved pedestal image 161 straddles the non-concealed area D and the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5. Can be displayed.

Further, the effect symbol 114 composed of the symbol image 114a and the decorative image 114b can be variablely displayed by the image display means 60, and the immediately preceding symbol changes during the waiting period during which the variable display of the effect symbol 114 is not performed. It is possible to display the effect symbol 114 when stopped at, and among the effect symbols 114 during the standby period, the symbol image 114a straddles the non-concealed area D and the decorative image 114b straddles the non-concealed area D and the movable concealed area C. It can be displayed individually. Further, in this case, the stop positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a can be changed in a plurality of ways, and in any of the plurality of stop positions, the symbol image 114a is set as the non-concealed area D and the decorative image 114b is set as the non-hidden area. It may be displayed straddling D and the movable concealment area C, respectively.

Generally, a plurality of types of effect symbols 114 (for example, 9 types corresponding to the numbers 1 to 9) are prepared, but since the decorative image 114b is also designed differently for each type, the size and shape are also different. It may be different for each type. Even in such a case, it is desirable to adopt the above-described configuration for all types of effect symbols 114.

Further, the above configuration may be adopted only for either an odd number symbol, which is often advantageous to the player when configuring the jackpot mode (specific mode), or an even number symbol other than the odd number symbol. Regarding the effect symbols 114 constituting the even-numbered symbols, the symbol image 114a is displayed in the non-concealed region D, and the decorative image 114b is displayed across the non-concealed region D and the movable concealed region C, respectively, to form an odd-numbered symbol. The entire symbol 114 may be configured to be displayed in the non-concealed region D.

Further, the stop positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a can be changed in a plurality of ways, and the broadcast images 116a, 116b, 118a may be displayed in the non-concealment area D in any of the plurality of stop positions.

Further, the operation time effect image (notice effect image) 165 relating to the reliability of the profit state generation can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and the operation time effect image (notice effect image) 165 is displayed on the first display unit suggesting the reliability. It is composed of 165a and the other second display unit 165b, the first display unit 165a is in the non-concealed area D, and the second display unit 165b is at least one of the fixed concealment areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealment area C. Each can be displayed across the non-concealed area D.

Further, the game members 45, 47, 49, 74 include a transparent portion 111, and the fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 include a transparent concealment region (first transparent display region) B4a corresponding to the rear side of the transparent portion 111, and the second The display unit 165b can be displayed so as to straddle the transparent concealed area B4a and the non-concealed area D. In this case, the entry prevention means 111 for preventing the game ball from entering the rear side may be provided on the lower front side of the image display means 60, and at least a part of the entry prevention means 111 may be a transparent portion.

Further, the volume setting image 117a showing the volume setting status can be displayed on the image display means 60 with a higher priority than the operation effect image (notice effect image) 165, and the volume setting image 117a is displayed on at least the first display unit. It can be displayed in the non-concealed area D so as not to overlap with 165a. As the transparent concealed area is a region similar to the non-concealed area D, at least a part of the image to be displayed in the non-concealed area D in the above description may be displayed in the transparent concealed area.

Further, as a notice effect regarding the reliability of the occurrence of the profit state, the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 in a plurality of stages can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and the display area of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 changes according to the stage. The step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 are arranged in the non-concealed area D up to the first predetermined stage, and the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C after the first predetermined stage. Each can be displayed across at least one and the non-concealed area D.

Further, in the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5, the portion suggesting the reliability can be displayed in the non-concealed area D in all of the plurality of stages. Further, the volume setting image 117a showing the volume setting status can be displayed on the image display means 60 with a higher priority than the advance notice effect images SU1 to SU5, and the volume setting image 117a is overlapped with at least a portion suggesting reliability. It can be displayed in the non-concealed area D so as not to become.

Further, a menu image 118b having a plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and when any of the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e is selected by the selection operation, the selection item image Is configured to execute the process corresponding to, and the selection item image is selected when the selection confirmation operation is performed while any of the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e is in the tentative selection state. Of the plurality of selected item images 164a to 164e, the initial temporary selection item image initially set to the temporary selection state can be displayed in the non-hidden area D.

Further, among the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e, at least a part of the selection item images other than the initial provisional selection item image can be displayed so as to straddle the non-concealment area D and the movable concealment area C. Further, the selection item image corresponding to the process of returning to the upper screen may be used as the initial provisional selection item image. Of course, the selected item image may be displayed across at least one of the non-concealed area D and the first to fourth fixed concealed areas B1 to B4.

Further, when the operation means 34 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation guidance image 165 can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and the operation guidance image 166 indicating that the operation means 34 should be operated during the operation valid period. The effect image 167 corresponding to the operation guidance image 166 is configured to be displayed on the display screen 60a, the entire operation guidance image 166 is in the non-concealed area D, and the effect image 167 is movable in the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5. It is possible to display each of the concealed area C and the non-concealed area D.

Further, the operation-time effect image 165 is composed of a first display unit 165a that suggests the reliability of profit state generation and a second display unit 165b other than that, and the entire first display unit 165a is set as the non-concealed area D. The second display unit 165b can be displayed across at least one of the fixed concealment areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealment area C and the non-concealment area D, respectively.

Further, it is possible to reduce the movable concealed area C and expand the non-concealed area D by moving the movable bodies 75a to 78a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the symbol. The predetermined timing can be set to or near the establishment of the reach state in the variable display of the symbol. Further, the display position of the predetermined image displayed on the display screen 60a can be changed in response to the expansion of the non-concealed area D. In this case, the display position of the predetermined image can be changed after the movement of the movable bodies 75a to 78a is completed and the non-concealed area D is expanded.

Further, the display position of the predetermined image can be moved in the enlargement direction of the non-concealed area D. Before and after the expansion of the non-concealed area D, the entire predetermined image can be displayed in the non-concealed area D. The predetermined image includes at least one of a volume setting image 117a showing a volume setting status and a light amount setting image 117b showing a light amount setting status.

It is also possible to erase a part of the predetermined image when changing the display position of the predetermined image. Further, the predetermined image includes the hold display images X1 to Y1 to the changing hold image Z. It is also possible to change the display position of the holding image Z during fluctuation and delete the holding display images X1 to Y1. It is also possible to change the display position of the holding image Z during fluctuation and delete the holding pedestal image 161.

Further, in the advance notice effect regarding the reliability of the occurrence of the profit state, the second effect body image 169 is displayed in the non-concealed area D so that the ratio of the first effect body image 168 displayed in the non-concealed area D becomes small. The display positions of the first effect body image 168 and the second effect body image 169 are changed so that the ratio is increased, and the reliability display image 170 regarding the reliability of the profit state generation is changed to the second effect body image 169. Correspondingly, it can be displayed in the non-hidden area D.

39 to 60 illustrate the second embodiment. The structural difference between the pachinko machine of the present embodiment and the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is only the configuration of the movable effect means. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations common to both embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted if not particularly necessary.

In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 39 to 42, a plurality of movable effect means, for example, tiltable movable effect means 201 and elevating movable effect means 202, are arranged on the front side of the back mounting base 61. .. As shown in FIG. 41 and the like, the tilting movable effect means 201 includes a tilting movable means 203 and a tilting driving means 204 for driving the tilting movable means 203. The tilting movable means 203 includes a plurality of, for example, three display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c on the left, right, and bottom, and two interlocking portions 203d and 203e for interlocking the three display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c. The display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are supported from the rear side by the mounting bases 205a to 205c fixed to the back mounting base 61, respectively.

The left display frame movable body 203a is arranged on the front side corresponding to the left side portion of the image display means 60, and is a vertically long vertical frame portion and an upper left frame projecting from the upper end side of the vertical frame portion substantially to the right at right angles. The front view is formed in a substantially L shape together with the portion. The left display frame movable body 203a is provided with a slide shaft 206 in the front-rear direction on the upper end side thereof, and the slide shaft 206 is slidable with respect to a guide hole 207 in the vertical direction provided in the mounting base 205a. The left display frame movable body 203a can slide in the vertical direction and rotate around the slide shaft 206 by being mounted on the left display frame movable body 203a.

The right display frame movable body 203b is arranged on the front side corresponding to the right side portion of the image display means 60, and is a vertically long vertical frame portion and an upper right frame projecting substantially leftward at a right angle from the upper end side of the vertical frame portion. The front view is formed in a substantially L shape together with the portion. The right display frame movable body 203b is pivotally supported by the mounting base 205b by a pivot axis 208 in the front-rear direction provided on the lower end side thereof, and a rearward projecting slide portion 209 provided on the upper end side is provided on the mounting base 205b. By slidably inserting it into the provided arc-shaped guide hole 210, it is possible to swing around the pivot 208 within a predetermined angle range.

The lower display frame movable body 203c is arranged in a horizontally long shape on the front side corresponding to the lower side of the image display means 60, and is pivotally supported by the mounting base 205c on the right end side via the pivot axis 211 in the front-rear direction. .. A slide portion 212 is provided on the left end side of the lower display frame movable body 203c so as to project backward, and the slide portion 212 is slidably inserted into the arc-shaped guide hole 213 formed in the mounting base 205c. As a result, the lower display frame movable body 203c can swing around the pivot 211 between a substantially horizontal normal posture and a downwardly downward tilted posture.

The left interlocking portion 203d interlocks the left display frame movable body 203a and the lower display frame movable body 203c, and is formed in a plate shape having a substantially triangular front view, and the upper corner portion is the pivot axis 214 in the front-rear direction. The slide shaft 215 in the front-rear direction is connected to the lower end side of the left display frame movable body 203a via a guide hole 216 in the substantially left-right direction provided at the lower end side of the lower display frame movable body 203c. It is slidably connected via, and the remaining left corner portion is pivotally supported on the mounting base 205a via a pivot axis 217 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, when the lower display frame movable body 203c shifts from the normal posture to the inclined posture, the left interlocking portion 203d rotates clockwise around the pivot 217, and the pivot 214 moves downward to the right, so that the left display frame movable body The 203a swings counterclockwise while moving downward, and shifts from a normal posture in which the vertical frame portion is substantially vertical to an inclined posture in which the vertical frame portion is inclined downward to the right (FIG. 43 (a). ) → (b)).

The right interlocking portion 203e interlocks the right display frame movable body 203b and the lower display frame movable body 203c, and is formed in an elongated shape, and one end side of the right display frame movable body 203b is interposed via a pivot axis 218 in the front-rear direction. The lower corners of the lower display frame are connected to the right end side of the lower display frame movable body 203c via a pivot axis 219 in the front-rear direction. The Axis 218 is arranged on the right display frame movable body 203b at a position separated to the right side from the Axis 208, and the Axis 219 is located on the lower display frame movable body 203c at a position separated to the right side from the Axis 211. Is located in.

As a result, when the lower display frame movable body 203c shifts from the normal posture to the tilted posture, the pivot 218 is pushed up via the right interlocking portion 203e, so that the right display frame movable body 203b swings counterclockwise around the pivot 208. By moving, the posture shifts from the normal posture in which the vertical frame portion is substantially vertical to the tilted posture in which the vertical frame portion is inclined downward to the right (FIGS. 43 (a) → (b)).

From the above, when the lower display frame movable body 203c swings between the normal posture and the tilted posture, the left display frame movable body 203a and the right display frame movable body 203b also move between the normal posture and the tilted posture in conjunction with the swing. Change. That is, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c have a normal posture (FIGS. 43 (a) and (c)) that substantially surrounds a part of the display screen 60a of the image display means 60 in a rectangular shape in a front view, and left from the normal posture. It can be deformed from the tilted posture (FIGS. 43 (b) and (d)) tilted at a predetermined angle. The display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are urged toward the inclined posture side by their own weight.

As shown in FIG. 41, the inclined driving means 204 is provided on the same mounting base 205c as the lower display frame movable body 203c, and displays the driving source 221 including the stepping motor and the driving force of the driving source 221 below. It is provided with a drive transmission member 222 that transmits to the frame movable body 203c. The drive transmission member 222 is composed of spur gears mounted on the mounting base 205c in a state of being rotatable around a shaft 222a in the front-rear direction, and the drive gears 221a mounted on the drive shaft of the drive source 221 mesh with each other. There is. The drive transmission member 222 is provided with a protrusion-shaped first engaging portion 223 on the side surface side corresponding to a part in the circumferential direction, and the lower display frame movable body 203c is provided with the first engaging portion 223. A second engaging portion 224 corresponding to the above is provided.

The first engaging portion 223 is the second engaging portion on the lower display frame movable body 203c side at the first angle position when the drive transmission member 222 is rotated in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise) by the drive of the drive source 221. After contacting the portion 224 from below, the second engaging portion 224 is pushed upward according to the progress of rotation, and when the drive transmission member 222 reaches the second angle position, the lower display frame is movable. The body 203c is arranged so as to be in a normal posture. Therefore, from that state, when the drive transmission member 222 is rotated in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) by driving the drive source 221, the support position of the second engaging portion 224 by the first engaging portion 223 is gradually lowered. When the drive transmission member 222 reaches the first angle position, the lower display frame movable body 203c is in an inclined posture. In this way, by operating the drive source 221 in both directions within a predetermined step range, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are placed in the normal postures (FIGS. 43 (a) and (c)) and the tilted postures (FIG. 43 (b)). , (D)) can be transformed.

As shown in FIG. 42 and the like, the elevating movable effect means 202 includes a sub screen movable body 231 and an elevating drive means 232 for driving the sub screen movable body 231 in the vertical direction, and is located on the front side of the tilt movable effect means 201. Have been placed. The sub-screen movable body 231 is arranged horizontally on the front side of the image display means 60, and a sub-image display means 233 composed of a liquid crystal display means smaller than the image display means 60 is arranged on the front side thereof together with an arbitrary decoration. The left and right ends are supported by a pair of elevating drive means 232 and 232 arranged on the left and right sides of the image display means 60 so as to be movable in the vertical direction via the drive connecting bodies 234 and 234, respectively. There is.

The elevating drive means 232 is supported by the back mounting base 61 via a vertically long mounting base 235, and is arranged along the side edge of the image display means 60 from the upper end side to the lower end side, and the drive connecting body 234 is provided. An elongated cylindrical elevating guide 236 that guides in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 237a that is arranged in the vicinity corresponding to one end side and the lower end side of the elevating guide 236, and the other end side and the upper end side of the elevating guide 236. A driven pulley 237b arranged in the vicinity thereof, a drive source 238 composed of a stepping motor or the like that rotationally drives the drive pulley 237a, and a predetermined location on the circumference of the drive pulley 237a and the driven pulley 237b. The drive connecting body 234 is provided with an endless gear belt 239 to which the drive connecting body 234 is fixed, and the end portion of the sub screen movable body 231 is rotatably connected to the driving connecting body 234 by a pivot 240 in the front-rear direction.

Further, one of the left and right pivots 240 and 240 is slidably connected to the elongated holes 241 in the left-right direction provided on the sub-screen movable body 231 side or the drive connecting body 234 side, and is slidably connected to the left and right. Even when the elevating drive means 232 and 232 perform an asymmetric drive operation, the sub-screen movable body 231 can be tilted to follow the movement within a predetermined range.

The sub-screen movable body 231 of the present embodiment has an upper normal posture (FIG. 43 (a)) when both the left and right elevating drive means 232 and 232 are stopped at the upper position, and the left elevating / lowering with respect to the upper normal posture. The upper tilted posture (FIG. 43 (b)) when the drive means 232 descends by a predetermined step, and the lower normal posture (FIG. 43 (c)) when both the left and right elevating drive means 232 and 232 stop at the lower position. It is possible to change between four types of stop postures, that is, the lower tilted posture (FIG. 43 (d)) when the elevating drive means 232 on the right side is raised by a predetermined step with respect to the lower normal posture.

The sub-screen movable body 231 is substantially horizontal in the upper and lower normal postures (FIGS. 43 (a) and (c)), and is displayed in the upper and lower inclined postures (FIGS. 43 (b) and (d)). It has an inclined shape that descends to the left corresponding to the inclined posture of the frame movable bodies 203a to 203c. Since the sub-image display means 233 operates integrally with the sub-screen movable body 231, the sub-screen movable body 231 is substantially horizontal when it is in the normal posture, and is tilted downward to the left when it is in the tilted posture.

FIG. 44 is a block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. The control system of the present embodiment is different from the control system of the first embodiment (FIG. 11) in that the control targets of the image display control means 150a are the image display means 60 and the sub image display means 233. The control target of the movable body control means 150d is the tilting movable effect means 201 and the elevating movable effect means 202.

Further, in the present embodiment, at least one (here, both) of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c of the tiltable movable effect means 201 and the sub-screen movable body 231 of the elevating movable effect means 202 is shifted from the normal posture to the tilted posture. In accordance with this, at least a part of the image of the image display means 60 can be tilted and deformed to be displayed, and the symbol variation effect control means 152, the image display control means 150a and the like execute the tilt effect. It is also different from the control system (FIG. 11) of the first embodiment in that it has a configuration for performing the above.

Here, the tilt deformation is a rotation process (predetermined deformation process) of rotating a predetermined image by a predetermined angle of less than 90 degrees around a predetermined center, and the rotation angle is the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c, a sub screen. It substantially coincides with the tilt angle of the movable body 231 in the tilted posture.

Hereinafter, a configuration for executing the tilt effect will be described. First, the image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233 is divided into a plurality of layers in which a predetermined priority is set for each of the display means 60 and 233. ..

In the example of FIG. 49 (a), the background image, the effect symbol (design image), the character image, the hold pedestal image, the hold display image, the changing hold image, the volume setting image, and the error notification image displayed on the image display means 60. And the sub-effect symbols are drawn in a plurality of layers so that the display priority is higher in that order. Further, as shown in FIG. 49B, the background image and the bubble effect image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 are similarly drawn by dividing them into a plurality of layers so that the display priority is higher in that order. It is supposed to be done.

Further, deformation information regarding whether or not to perform a predetermined deformation (here, tilt deformation) is added to each image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub image display means 233, and the image to be deformed is subjected to deformation information. 1 is set for each image that is not deformed, and 0 is set for each image.

In the example of FIG. 49 (a), 0 (no deformation) is used for the deformation information of the right-handed guidance image, the volume setting image, the error notification image, and the sub-effect symbol, but the deformation information of the other background image, the effect symbol, etc. 1 (with deformation) is set respectively, and in the example of FIG. 49 (b), 0 (without deformation) is set in the deformation information of all the images displayed on the sub-image display means 233.

In the present embodiment, when the sub-screen movable body 231 is in the tilted posture, the sub-image display means 233 on the sub-screen movable body 231 is also tilted to the left, so that it is displayed on the sub-image display means 233. Even if the image is not tilted with respect to the sub image display means 233, the image is tilted with respect to the image display means 60 and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is not an image process called tilt deformation, but is tilted on the sub-image display means 233 via the sub-screen movable body 231 to be displayed on the image display means 60 or the like. On the other hand, it is designed to be tilted.

Subsequently, the drawing process on the image display means 60 by the image display control means 150a will be described. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of types of images displayed on the image display means 60, those with tilt deformation and those without tilt deformation are mixed. Therefore, instead of uniformly drawing all the images in the frame buffer for the image display means 60, as shown in FIG. 45, the frame buffer is an image that undergoes tilt deformation (an image having deformation information of 1). In addition to drawing to the frame buffer via another primary buffer, deformation processing is performed when drawing from the primary buffer to the frame buffer, and images that are not tilted and deformed (images with 0 deformation information) go through the primary buffer. It is designed to draw directly to the framebuffer without doing anything.

Further, the tilt deformation process (rotation process) performed when drawing from the primary buffer to the frame buffer is performed by the procedure shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. That is, first, the image data in the primary buffer is read (S101). Further, the coordinate axes (x, y), radius (r), and rotation angle (a) are specified respectively (S102 to S104), and the coordinates of the four vertices 0 to 3 are calculated (S105).

Then, the UV coordinates of the read image data (upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right) are specified (S106), and the UV coordinates of the image data are fixed to the coordinates of vertices 0 to 3 and drawn in the frame buffer (S107). .. As a result, the image of the primary buffer can be rotated by a predetermined angle around a predetermined center and drawn in the frame buffer (FIG. 47).

Subsequently, a specific example of the tilting effect will be described with reference to display examples of various images displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233, and display priorities of the various images and setting contents of deformation information. To do.

FIG. 48 shows the operations of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the changes in the display image accompanying the movement of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c when the tilt notice effect is executed. Here, the tilt notice effect (tilt effect) is an example of the "normal notice effect", and the movable body and the image are tilted, for example, based on the jackpot reliability during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. It has become. In the tilt notice effect of FIG. 48, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c change from the normal posture to the tilted posture, and the sub-screen movable body 231 changes from the upper normal posture to the upper tilted posture.

Further, in the example of FIG. 48, the image display means 60 has a background image 160, an effect symbol (symbol image) 114a, a character image 251 and a hold pedestal image 161 and hold display images X1 to Y1 to change in ascending order of priority. The middle hold image Z, the right-handed guidance image 162b, the volume setting image 117a, the error notification image 163, and the sub-effect symbol 252 are displayed, and the sub-image display means 233 displays the background image 160a and the bubble effect image in ascending order of priority. With 253 displayed, the tilt notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) → (b). The sub-effect symbol 252 is a so-called fourth symbol displayed separately from the effect symbol 114, and corresponds to the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, and is always changed during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. It is designed to be variablely displayed on the image display means 60.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, the deformation information of each of these images includes a right-handed guidance image 162b, a volume setting image 117a, an error notification image 163, and a sub-effect symbol 252 displayed on the image display means 60, and a sub-image. All the images displayed on the display means 233 are set to 0 (no deformation), and the other images are set to 1 (with deformation).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (b), when the tilt advance notice effect is executed, the background image 160, the effect symbol (design image) 114a, the character image 251 and the hold pedestal image 161 are held on the image display means 60. The display images X1 to Y1 and the pending image Z tilting to the left together with the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c due to tilt deformation, but the right-handed guidance image 162b and the volume setting image 117a have higher priority than those images. The error notification image 163 and the sub-effect symbol 252 are maintained in an upright state without being tilted and deformed.

Since each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is not tilted (FIG. 49 (b)), it stands upright without tilting with respect to the sub-image display means 233 even when the tilt notice effect is executed. Although the state is maintained as it is, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the sub-image display means 233 itself is tilted due to the tilt notice effect, so that the background image 160 on the image display means 60 side is tilted with respect to the image display means 60 and the like. It is in an inclined state in the same manner as the effect symbol (symbol image) 114a.

As described above, with respect to the right-handed guidance image 162b, the volume setting image 117a, the error notification image 163, and the sub-effect symbol 252 displayed on the image display means 60, a tilt warning effect is generated during their display, and the background image. Even when the tilt deformation is performed on 160 or the like, the tilt deformation is not performed. As a result, the player can easily and surely recognize various important notification contents while performing the tilting notice effect on the image display means 60.

FIG. 50 shows a change in the displayed image when a door opening error occurs during execution of the tilt notice effect or when the player performs a volume adjustment operation. The priority and fluctuation information of each image related to the tilt advance notice effect are the same as those in FIG. 49.

As shown in FIG. 50 (a), when the tilt notice effect is executed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub screen movable body 231 are tilted to the left. .. Then, among the images displayed on the image display means 60, the background image 160, the effect symbol (symbol image) 114a, the character image 251, the hold pedestal image 161 and the hold display images X1 to Y1 to hold during change. Since the deformation information of the image Z is 1 (with deformation), tilt deformation is performed, and the image Z is tilted to the left together with the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c, but the deformation information of the sub-effect symbol 252 is 0 (no deformation). Therefore, the tilt deformation is not performed and the image is maintained in an upright state. Since the deformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is 0, tilt deformation is not performed, but the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself causes the image to be tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like. It will be in a state of being.

When a door opening error occurs in that state, the error notification image 163 is displayed on the image display means 60 as shown in FIG. 50 (b), but the deformation information is 0 (no deformation) for this error notification image 163. Therefore, it is displayed in an upright state without tilt deformation (FIG. 49 (a)). Similarly, when the player performs the volume adjustment operation during the execution of the tilt advance notice effect, the volume setting image 117a is displayed on the image display means 60 as shown in FIG. 50 (c). Since the deformation information of the image 117a is 0 (no deformation) (FIG. 49 (a)), the image 117a is displayed in an upright state without any tilt deformation.

Although not shown, the deformation information of the right-handed guidance image 162b is 0 (no deformation) even when the right-handed guidance image 162b is displayed on the image display means 60 during the execution of the tilt advance notice effect. Therefore, it is displayed in an upright state without tilt deformation (FIG. 49 (a)).

FIG. 51 shows the operations of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the accompanying changes in the display image when the tilt descent notice effect is executed. Here, the tilt descent notice effect is an example of the "normal notice effect" like the tilt notice effect shown in FIG. 48 and the like, and the movable body is based on the jackpot reliability during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. However, unlike the tilt notice effect, the sub-screen movable body 231 is not only tilted, but also changes from the upper normal posture to the lower tilted posture with descent. (Fig. 43 (a) → (d)).

In the example of FIG. 51, the image display means 60 has a background image 160, an effect symbol (symbol image) 114a, a character image 250, 251, a hold pedestal image 161 and a hold display image X1 to Y1 to change in ascending order of priority. With the intermediate hold image Z and the sub-effect symbol 252 displayed, and the background image and the bubble effect image 253 displayed in the sub-image display means 233 in ascending order of priority, FIGS. 51 (a) → (b). The tilt descent notice production is being executed as shown.

Then, when the sub-screen movable body 231 descends while tilting from the upper side of the image display means 60 to substantially the center due to the tilt descent notice effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the character image 250 on the image display means 60 , The position and mode related to the moving motion of the sub-screen movable body 231 and the posture after the movement, for example, the sub-screen movable body 231 is pushed diagonally downward from its upper side, and the sub-screen movable body after the movement is pushed. The movable body effect image 254 corresponding to 231 is displayed.

As described above, for the character image 250 and the movable body effect image 254 displayed in relation to the operation of the sub-screen movable body 231, the deformation information is 1 (with deformation) as shown in FIG. 52 (a). Therefore, the display is tilted according to the tilt of the sub-screen movable body 231 due to the tilt deformation.

Further, when the sub-screen movable body 231 descends while tilting due to the tilt descent notice effect (FIG. 51 (b)), the effect symbol 114 changes to a smaller evacuation symbol 255 while avoiding the sub-screen movable body 231 and the image display means 60. However, since the deformation information of this retracted symbol 255 is 0 (no deformation) as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the tilt deformation is not performed and the retracted symbol 255 is displayed in an upright state. The other background image 160, the hold pedestal image 161, the hold display images X1 and Y1, the changing hold image Z, and the sub-effect symbol 252 displayed on the image display means 60 are also shown in FIG. 52 (a). Since the deformation information is 0 (no deformation), the tilt deformation is not performed and the image is maintained in an upright state. Since the deformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is 0, tilt deformation is not performed, but the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself causes the image to be tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like. It will be in a state of being.

In this way, the image displayed in relation to the movable body may be tilted and deformed according to the movement of the movable body, and the other images may not be tilted and deformed.

FIG. 53 shows the operations of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the accompanying changes in the display image when the tilt notice effect is executed at the start of the symbol variation (immediately after the start).

As shown in FIG. 53A, at the start of symbol change, the image display means 60 is changing the background image 160, the effect symbol 114a, the hold pedestal image 161 and the hold display images X1 to Y1 to the image display means 60 in ascending order of priority. The hold image Z, the volume setting image 117a, and the sub-effect symbol 252 are displayed, and the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 are displayed in the sub-image display means 233 in ascending order of priority. Immediately after the symbol variation starts. The notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 53B, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are shown in the normal posture to the tilted posture, and the sub-screen movable body 231 is shown in the upper normal posture to the upper tilted posture, respectively, as shown in FIG. Transition according to the time chart. Further, among the images displayed on the image display means 60, the background image 160, the effect symbol 114, the hold pedestal image 161 and the hold display image in which the deformation information shown in FIG. 54 (a) is 1 (with deformation). As shown in FIG. 55, the X1 to X1, Y1 to, and the pending image Z being changed are tilted and deformed in synchronization with the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and displayed, and are gradually tilted to the left.

Further, substantially at the same time when the tilting operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c is completed, the effect image 256 (deformation information: 1) showing cracks is displayed on the image display means 60 in a state of being tilted according to the effect symbol 114 or the like. Will be done.

On the other hand, for the other images displayed on the image display means 60, that is, the volume setting image 117a and the sub-effect symbol 252, the deformation information is 0 (no deformation) as shown in FIG. 54 (a). , Tilt deformation is not performed and it is maintained in an upright state. Since the deformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is 0, tilt deformation is not performed, but the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself causes the image to be tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like. It will be in a state of being.

After that, the tilt notice effect ends at a predetermined timing, and as shown in FIGS. 53 (b) to (a), the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c change from the tilted posture to the normal posture, and the sub screen movable body 231 changes from the upper tilted posture. Return to the upper normal posture respectively. As shown in FIG. 55, the return operation at the end of the tilt notice effect is performed at a lower speed than the tilt operation at the start of the tilt notice effect.

Further, among the images displayed on the image display means 60 in the tilted deformation state, the background image 160, the effect symbol 114, the hold pedestal image 161, the hold display images X1 to Y1, and the changing hold image Z are reversed. The orientation is tilted and deformed, and as shown in FIG. 55, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the like are gradually returned to the upright state in synchronization with the return operation. On the other hand, the effect image 256 showing the crack displayed when the tilting operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the like is completed is deleted from the image display means 60 substantially at the same time as the return operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the like is started. Will be done.

FIG. 56 shows the operations of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the accompanying changes in the display image when the tilt descent notice effect is executed at the start of the symbol variation (substantially at the same time as the start). ing. As shown in FIG. 56A, at the start of the symbol variation, the image display means 60 has the background image 160, the hold pedestal image 161 and the hold display images X1 to Y1 to the image display means 60 in ascending order of priority. The save symbol 255, the volume setting image 117a, and the sub-effect symbol 252 are displayed, and the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 are displayed in the sub-image display means 233 in ascending order of priority. Almost at the same time, the tilt descent notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 56B, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are changed from the normal posture to the tilted posture, and the sub-screen movable body 231 is changed from the upper normal posture to the lower tilted posture, respectively, as shown in FIG. 58. Transition according to the time chart shown. Further, the background image 160, the hold pedestal image 161 and the hold display images X1 to Y1 to the image display means 60, the changing hold image Z, the save symbol 255, the volume setting image 117a, and the sub-effect symbol 252 are As shown in FIG. 57A, since all the deformation information is 0 (no deformation), the tilt deformation is not performed and the upright state is maintained. Since the deformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is 0, tilt deformation is not performed, but the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself causes the image to be tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like. It will be in a state of being.

Further, when the sub-screen movable body 231 descends while tilting from the upper side of the image display means 60 to substantially the center due to the tilt descent notice effect, as shown in FIG. 56B, the character image 250 and the movable body substantially simultaneously with the completion of the operation. The effect image 254 and the effect image 254 are displayed on the image display means 60.

Since the deformation information of the character image 250 and the movable body effect image 254 is set to 1 (with deformation) as shown in FIG. 57 (a), tilt deformation is performed, and after the sub-screen movable body 231 is moved. The position and mode related to the posture of, for example, the character image 250 is pushing the sub-screen movable body 231 diagonally downward from above, and the movable body effect image 254 is along the periphery of the sub-screen movable body 231 and the character image 250. Are displayed respectively.

After that, the tilt descent notice effect is completed at a predetermined timing, and as shown in FIGS. 56 (b) to (a), the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are changed from the tilted posture to the normal posture, and the sub screen movable body 231 is tilted downward. It returns from the posture to the upper normal posture respectively. As shown in FIG. 58, the return operation at the end of the tilt descent notice effect is performed at a lower speed than the tilt operation at the start of the tilt descent notice effect.

At that time, the character image 250 and the movable body effect image 254 displayed on the image display means 60 in the tilted deformation state are erased substantially at the same time as the start of the return operation of the sub-screen movable body 231 and the like. Then, the image display means 60 includes a background image 160, a hold pedestal image 161 that is maintained in an upright state without being tilted and deformed even during the tilt descent notice effect, hold display images X1 and Y1, and a changing hold image. Z, the retracted symbol 255, etc. are left, and the remaining symbol changes are continued.

FIG. 59 (a) shows a display image when the tilt effect is executed during the customer waiting normal effect in the customer waiting state, and FIG. 60 (a) shows the game during the execution of the tilt effect shown in FIG. 59 (a). The display images when the person operates the effect button 34 to display the menu image 118b are shown. Further, FIGS. 59 (b) and 59 (c) show display priority and deformation information of each image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub image display means 233, respectively, corresponding to FIG. 59 (a). There is.

Similarly, FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (c) show display priority and deformation information of each image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233, respectively, corresponding to FIG. 60 (a). ing. The tilting effect may be executed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state (reception of the customer waiting demo command).

In the example of FIG. 59 (a), the image display means 60 has a background image 160, an effect symbol 114, a holding pedestal image 161 and a menu displayable notification image 118a, a volume adjustable notification image 116a, and a light amount adjustment in ascending order of display priority. The possible notification image 116b, the power saving mode notification image 120, and the error notification image 163 are displayed, and the sub-image display means 233 displays the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 in ascending order of display priority. The tilting effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), among the images displayed on the image display means 60 in FIG. 59 (a), the background image 160, the effect symbol 114, the hold pedestal image 161 and the menu displayable notification image 118a, Since the deformation information is set to 1 for the volume adjustable notification image 116a, the light amount adjustable notification image 116b, and the power saving mode notification image 120, the tilt deformation is performed and the image is tilted to the left. Since the deformation information is set to 0, the image is maintained in an upright state even after the tilting effect is executed. Each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is not tilted because the deformation information is 0, but the sub-image display means 233 itself is tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like. It becomes.

The menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b are displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) has elapsed after the customer waiting state is started by receiving the customer waiting demo command. May be started. Further, the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b may be displayed when the tilting effect is executed during the customer waiting state.

Further, when the player performs the volume adjustment operation and the light amount adjustment operation in the state of FIG. 59A, the volume adjustable notification image 116a and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b are deleted, and the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image are deleted. 117b is displayed, but as shown in FIG. 59B, since the deformation information is set to 0 for the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b, the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b are displayed. Is displayed in an upright state without tilt deformation (not shown). The deformation information of the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b may be set to 0 to maintain the upright state even after the tilting effect is executed.

Further, when the player operates the effect button 34 in the state shown in FIG. 59 (a) (during the execution of the tilt effect), the image display means 60 has a new menu image as shown in FIG. 60 (a). 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c are displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 60B, since the deformation information of the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c is set to 0, tilt deformation is performed. It is displayed in an upright position.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment includes an image display means 60 capable of displaying an image, and the image display means 60 can display a volume setting image 117a indicating a volume setting status and display an image. When the effect control means 122 for controlling the specific effect of performing a predetermined transformation process on the image displayed on the means 60 is provided and the specific effect is executed while the volume setting image 117a is being displayed, the specific image does not include the volume setting image 117a. A predetermined deformation process (here, an inclination deformation process) is performed on the volume setting image 117a, but the predetermined deformation process is not performed on the volume setting image 117a. Further, when performing a predetermined deformation process on a specific image, the movable bodies 203a to 203c, 231 are operated in response to the predetermined deformation process. Further, the effect symbol 114 can be variablely displayed by the image display means 60, and the specific image includes the effect symbol.

Further, every time the starting means 56 and 57 detect a game ball, the starting detection processing means 138 that acquires a random number value and stores the random number value in the random number storage means 139 up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the symbol variation start. When the condition is satisfied, the symbol display means 53, 54 that fluctuates and displays the symbol based on the random number value stored in the random number storage means 139, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation by the symbol display means 53, 54 are specific modes. The symbol display means 53, which is stored in the random number storage means 139 by displaying the hold display images X1 to Y1 to the image display means 60, is provided with the profit state generation means 142 to generate the profit state in the case of It is possible to notify the number of pending numbers, which is the number of random numbers that have not been subjected to the symbol variation due to 54, and the specific image includes the reserved display images X1 to Y1 to 1. In addition, the specific image includes an effect image.

In addition, it is configured to determine whether or not to perform the predetermined deformation processing based on the deformation information given in advance for each image, and the deformation information to the effect that the predetermined deformation processing is performed is provided to the specific image in the volume setting image 117a. Is given transformation information to the effect that the predetermined transformation processing is not performed.

Further, when a new image is displayed during the execution of the specific effect, if the image is a specific image that does not include the volume setting image 117a, a predetermined transformation process is performed on the specific image, but at least the volume setting image 117a is performed. If this is the case, the volume setting image 117a is configured not to undergo a predetermined transformation process.

Further, when the specific effect is executed while the error notification image 163 is being displayed, the specific image that does not include the error notification image 163 is subjected to the predetermined transformation processing, but at least the error notification image 163 is subjected to the predetermined transformation processing. It is configured not to do. Further, when a new image is displayed during the execution of the specific effect, if the image is a specific image that does not include the error notification image 163, the predetermined transformation processing is performed, but if the image is the error notification image 163, the predetermined transformation processing is performed. It is configured not to.

Further, the image display means 60 can display launch guidance images 162a and 162b indicating that the image display means 60 should aim at one of the left and right sides of the game area 23, and execute a specific effect while displaying the launch guidance images 162a and 162b. In this case, the specific images that do not include the launch guidance images 162a and 162b are subjected to the predetermined transformation processing, but the launch guidance images 162a and 162b are not subjected to the predetermined transformation processing.

Further, the effect symbol 114 can be switched between the normal symbol and the retracted symbol 255 smaller than the normal symbol, and when the specific effect is executed while the retracted symbol 255 is displayed, the specific image that does not include the retracted symbol 255 is not included. It is configured so that the predetermined transformation process is performed, but the predetermined transformation process is not performed on the evacuation symbol 255.

Although the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention have been described in detail above, they can also be configured as follows. That is, in the first embodiment, the mode may be changed by a player operation other than the selection operation from the menu screen. In addition, the mode may be changed by the player's operation even during the symbol change other than the waiting state. In this case, it is desirable to be able to change the mode on the condition that the operation of the movable body is not reserved in the notice relating to the symbol change.

In the notice shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the first effect body image 168, the second effect body image 169, and the like are not limited to the characters, and any effect body image can be used. Further, the first effect body image 168 may not be provided. A lightning effect image is used as the effect image, and the lightning effect is increased so that at least a part of the image is displayed in the non-concealed area D from the state where at least a part thereof is displayed in the first to fifth fixed concealed areas and the movable concealed area C. By changing the image, it is possible to create a lightning bolt running on the screen.

As in the notice shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, from the first state in which at least a part of the effect image such as the mini character image is displayed in any of the first to fifth fixed concealment areas and the movable concealment area C. When the ratio displayed in the non-concealed area D is changed to the second state larger than the first state, the display mode (color, size, etc.) of at least a part (for example, an item possessed by the mini character) of the effect body image is changed. The shape, etc.) may be configured to suggest the jackpot reliability, etc. In this case, if the ratio of the portion suggesting the reliability displayed in the non-concealed area D is also larger in the second state than in the first state, the player can win the jackpot reliability etc. as the notice progresses. It becomes easier to recognize, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the notice production.

In the look-ahead hold change effect, when the display mode of the hold display images X1 to Y1 is changed based on the look-ahead determination result, the entire hold display image before the change is displayed in the non-hidden area D, and the hold display image after the change is held. The display image may be displayed so as to extend the enlarged portion, the added effect portion, etc. from the non-concealed area D, and the display image may be displayed straddling the non-concealed area D and the area outside the non-concealed area D. ..

If the first to fifth fixed concealment areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealment area C are widened, the non-concealment area D becomes narrower, but the non-concealment area D is the other first to fifth fixed concealment areas B1 to B5. It is desirable to make it wider than the movable concealment area C. Further, any still image or moving image can be used for the background image 160.

In the first embodiment, the stationary movable bodies 75a to 78a are set as the movable concealment area C on the rear side, but of course, the movable body may operate at the time of the advance notice effect or the mode change. Therefore, of the entire screen area A, the area corresponding to the rear side of all the movable areas of the movable body (all areas where the movable body may move) may be set as the movable concealment area C. In this case, the non-concealed area D is narrower than the case of the movable concealed area C for the stopped movable body, but the image displayed in the non-concealed area D shows the state of the movable body. However, it is always visible from the front, and higher visibility can be ensured for images of high importance. Further, even when the movable concealment area C for the stopped movable body is adopted, the error notification image 163 relating to the abnormality of the movable body (movable body error) is after all the movable areas of the movable body. It is desirable to avoid the side.

When the movable concealment area C for a stationary movable body is adopted as in the first embodiment, images of high importance (volume setting image 117a, light amount setting image 117b, error notification image 163, etc.) are used. If the movable body effect is executed during the display, the movable body may move to the front side of those images and the visibility may be temporarily impaired. Therefore, when the movable body temporarily stops at an effect position other than the origin position during the effect of the movable body, the image of high importance should be displayed avoiding the area behind the movable body at the effect position. Is desirable. As a result, even if the visibility may be temporarily hindered by the passage of the movable body, it is possible to prevent the invisible state from being invisible for a long time.

However, when executing a movable body effect in which a plurality of movable bodies operate at the same time (for example, a movable body effect during a symbol change due to a jackpot fluctuation pattern, a movable body effect executed when developing from SP reach to SPSP reach, etc.), It is unavoidable that the visibility of highly important images is hindered for a long time.

This is because if high visibility is required even in such a case, there is a high possibility that the degree of freedom of the movable body will be deprived and the effect of the effect will be reduced as a result. Further, since such a movable body effect is often executed in a scene advantageous to the player, it is considered that a decrease in visibility is tolerated to some extent even for an image having a high degree of importance.

In the embodiment, as an example of the launch notification regarding the launch operation, the launch guidance notification that the launch should be aimed at one of the left and right sides of the game area is illustrated, but the game ball is launched in the direction opposite to the target direction. The firing warning notification may be configured to be feasible. It is desirable that the launch notification images (launch guidance image, launch warning image) related to the launch notification such as the launch guidance notification and the launch warning notification are displayed so as not to overlap with the volume and light amount setting images 117a and 117b. In this case, the launch notification image such as the launch guidance image may be displayed large so that a part of the launch notification image protrudes from the concealed areas B1 to B3, B5, and C, but an important message portion such as "to the right!" Is desirable to be displayed in the non-concealed area D.

In the step-up notice effect, the display area may be gradually changed (enlarged) from the first stage to the final stage, or the display area may not be changed over a plurality of consecutive steps. The display area may not be changed until a predetermined stage (for example, the fourth stage), and the display area may be changed (enlarged) at the next stage (for example, the fifth stage).

Further, as a method of executing the step-up notice effect, it may be divided into a fanning part in which the step-up notice effect is undecided and an execution part in which the stage of the step-up notice effect is confirmed. In the fanned part, the step-up notice effect is gradually created, and in the execution part, the step-up notice effect is executed at a predetermined stage. In this case, the raised step-up notice effect is not always executed in the subsequent execution part in the fanned part, and even if the step-up notice effect is raised from the first stage to the fourth stage, the step-up notice effect is then performed. Is finished, and as a result, the step-up notice effect may not be executed.

This is the so-called Gase production (Gase step-up notice production). By doing so, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the step-up notice effect and give a feeling of expectation that a higher-level step-up notice effect that is rarely seen may be executed. Then, in the case of such a step-up notice effect, the display area is not changed when the fanning stage is started, and when the step-up notice effect is executed in the execution portion, it is displayed according to the stage of the step-up notice effect. The area may be changed.

Further, even in such a case, the display area is gradually changed (enlarged) from the first stage to the final stage, and the display area is not changed until a predetermined stage (for example, the fourth stage), and the next stage (for example) For example, the display area may not be changed over a plurality of consecutive steps, such as changing (enlarging) the display area in the fifth step).

In the second embodiment, it is desirable that the entire undeformed image is displayed in the non-concealed area, but a part of the image may be displayed so as to extend beyond the non-concealed area. Although the non-concealed area and the like are not mentioned in the second embodiment, the areas displayed in gray in FIG. 43 are the window frame portion 74, the base plate 45, the central display frame unit 47, and the grand prize unit in the front view. 49, a non-concealed area that is not blocked by any of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 is shown.

The transformation effect such as the tilt advance notice effect may be executed as a "look-ahead advance notice effect" performed based on the look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means 138a, or may be used as a jackpot determination result at the start of symbol variation by the special symbol processing means 140. It may be executed as a "normal notice production" performed based on the above. Further, it may be executed in the promotion effect (round promotion or probabilistic promotion) in the case of a big hit, or may be executed during the reach fluctuation.

In the second embodiment, the launch guidance image is configured not to be deformed (not tilted) even when the specific effect accompanied by the deformation process is executed, but the specific effect is not executed (not selected) while the launch guidance image is displayed. It may be configured as follows. That is, the launch guidance notification changes the launch direction that is advantageous to the player, such as when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the special game state (time saving state, probability change state), or when the game state shifts from the special game state to the normal game state. In the case of, it is performed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a predetermined time (3 seconds, etc.) elapses, a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are completed, a second special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number, etc.). In the meantime, it may be configured not to execute (do not select) a specific effect accompanied by transformation processing such as a tilt advance notice effect. The launch warning image in the launch warning notification can be handled in the same manner as the launch guidance image.

It may be announced by a countdown or the like that a transformation effect such as a tilt notice effect will be executed. In this case, a countdown notification effect may be performed as a part of the tilt notice effect, or a countdown notification effect may be performed separately from the tilt notice effect before the tilt notice effect.

Regarding the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, the light amount adjustable notification image 116b, etc., either when the transformation effect is performed during the display or when they are displayed after the transformation effect is executed. Also, the tilt deformation may not be performed.

While waiting for customers, it is desirable not to perform the deformation effect when the player performs the volume adjustment operation, the light amount adjustment operation, etc., but even when the deformation effect is performed, the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image It is desirable not to perform tilt deformation for 117b.

It may be possible to display the menu during a symbol change other than the waiting state for customers. In this case, a sub-window may be displayed on a part of the display screen 60a to display the menu image 118b or the like. When the menu image 118b or the like is displayed during the symbol variation, it is desirable that the menu image 118b is not tilted and deformed together with the sub window even if the deformation effect such as the tilt notice effect is executed.

The effect using the RTC (real-time clock) may be executable. This RTC is a dedicated timekeeping chip, and even when the power is off, the date and time are counted by supplying power from the built-in battery. The RTC effect may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed based on the RTC (for example, when a predetermined date and time has passed since the power was turned on). Since this RTC effect is executed as an effect that is commonly set for the same game machine, when a plurality of the same game machines are installed side by side in the game hall, the timing such as after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. The common RTC effect is executed all at once.

Further, since such an RTC effect is executed regardless of the progress of the game, the execution timing may be reached during the execution of another effect such as the reach effect. In this case, the reach effect or the like is prioritized. , The RTC effect may be executed in a sub-window displayed on a part of the display screen 60a. Further, at this time, when a deformation effect such as a tilt advance notice effect is executed, it is desirable not to perform the tilt deformation for the RTC effect executed in the sub-window. Further, when the deformation effect is performed on the RTC effect side of the sub-window, it is desirable that the RTC effect performs the tilt deformation, while the reach effect side does not perform the tilt deformation.

Whether or not to perform tilt deformation on a predetermined image may be different depending on the content of the notice and the like. The hold pedestal image 161 may be tilted in the first notice effect and not tilted in the second notice effect. The same applies to the background image 160, the effect symbol 114, the hold display images X1 to Y1, the changing hold image Z, and the like. However, for images that do not depend on the content of the effect, such as the error notification image 163, the volume setting image 117a, and the light amount setting image 117b, it is desirable to set the images without deformation regardless of the content of the notice.

When the effect symbol 114 composed of the symbol image 114a such as numbers and the decorative image 114b such as characters is subjected to the deformation effect, the decorative image 114b may be configured to be tilted and deformed. Since the number part is a part that directly indicates the lottery result according to the display content, it is desirable to exclude it from the target of tilt deformation and maintain a display mode that is easy for the player to recognize.

In the embodiment, an example of tilting deformation of an image is shown as an example of predetermined deformation processing, but in addition to rotation processing of rotating a predetermined angle around a predetermined center, enlargement processing, reduction processing, translation processing, or a combination thereof, etc. Any image processing can be adopted. Regarding the enlargement / reduction process, the enlargement / reduction ratio may be uniform, or the enlargement / reduction ratio may be different in a plurality of directions.

In the second embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to perform the predetermined deformation processing based on the deformation information given in advance for each image, but the first method in which a plurality of layers are the targets of the predetermined deformation processing. Even if the layer and the second layer, which is not the target, are classified in advance, the image of the first layer is subjected to the predetermined transformation processing, and the image of the second layer is not subjected to the predetermined transformation processing. Good.

In the second embodiment, with respect to the image to be displayed on the sub-image display means 233, the image display means 60 and the like are obtained by tilting the sub-image display means 233 via the sub-screen movable body 231 instead of the image processing of tilt deformation. However, a predetermined deformation process such as tilt deformation may be performed on the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233.

In this case, if the predetermined deformation process is a rotation process such as tilt deformation, the rotation process for the image displayed on the sub image display means 233 may be in the same direction as the rotation of the sub image display means 233, or may be reversed. May be good. If the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation of the sub-image display means 233 and at substantially the same angle, the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 can be displayed to the player. It will be in an upright position. The sub-image display means 233 may not be operated, and the image to be displayed on the sub-image display means 233 may be subjected to a predetermined transformation process.

In the second embodiment, the predetermined deformation process for the image displayed on the image display means 60 or the like is configured to be performed according to the deformation operation of the movable bodies 203a to 203c, 231 but has nothing to do with the deformation operation of the movable body. In addition (for example, without deforming the movable body), a predetermined deformation process may be performed on the image.

The sub-effect symbol 252 shown in the embodiment assumes a so-called fourth symbol that resides on the liquid crystal and displays blinking or the like in response to fluctuations in the first and second special symbols. Even when the symbol is provided separately from the image display means 60 by an LED or the like, a so-called mini symbol may be displayed on the image display means 60 as a sub-effect symbol 252. This mini symbol is a simple and small representation of the changing effect symbol 114 using numbers and symbols so that it is always displayed on the image display means 60 during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. It has become. It is desirable that this mini-design is not subjected to deformation processing such as tilt deformation. Further, it is desirable to display this mini symbol in the non-concealed area D.

For convenience of explanation, the configuration of the movable effect means is different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and the relationship between the image display area and the displayed image is different in the first embodiment and in the second embodiment. Although the transformation processing of the display image has been mainly described, both embodiments may be combined in any way. A second embodiment may be applied to the first embodiment to enable a modified effect such as a tilting notice effect to be executed, or an image display area and a display image in the first embodiment may be applied to the second embodiment. Relationships may be applied.

When the illumination panel is mounted on the front side of the game board 16, the light emission effect by the illumination panel may be executed when the deformation effect such as the tilt advance notice effect is executed. In this case, since the design portion of the illumination panel may hinder the visibility of the liquid crystal display object, at least one of the images such as the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b that do not perform the predetermined deformation processing is selected. It is desirable to display the part at a position that does not overlap with the design part of the illumination panel.

Regarding the advance notice effect for executing the predetermined transformation process, the type of image to be transformed, the time (period) and number of times to execute the transformation process, and the degree of deformation of the transformation process are determined according to the reliability suggesting the lottery result of the variable display. Etc. may be made different. For example, when the lottery result of the variable display is out of order, it is easy to execute a notice effect for executing a predetermined transformation process having low reliability, and there are fewer types of images to be subjected to the transformation process than when the lottery result is a hit. , The time (period) for executing the transformation process is short, the number of times is small, and the degree of the transformation process is small. In this way, depending on the lottery result of the variable display, the advance notice effect with different deformation processing may be executed.

Although it was decided not to perform the transformation processing on the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b, the transformation processing may be performed. However, in this case, it is desirable that the volume / light amount can be adjusted based on the operation by the player even during the deformation process. Further, it is desirable to update the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b so that they can be displayed even during the transformation process in order to reflect the adjustment contents by the player.

In a notice effect suggesting a lottery result of a variable display, a message display for notifying a player of predetermined information, or the like, a display indicating that the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is possible by a predetermined operation may be performed. Further, as a matter of course, it is desirable to enable the functions of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment even during such a notice effect or message display. When a predetermined operation is performed by the player, it is desirable to display the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b at a position that does not overlap with the advance notice effect or the message display.

Regarding the advance notice effect for executing the predetermined transformation process, the predetermined image on which the predetermined transformation process is executed may be changed to a new predetermined image and displayed. Specifically, when the background image 160 is deformed by a predetermined deformation process, the background image 160 is displayed in a reduced size at the same time as the deformation so as to fade out from the liquid crystal. At the same time, the new background image 160 is enlarged and displayed while being deformed so as to fade in on the liquid crystal. In this way, the background change effect that changes the background image 160 by executing the predetermined transformation process may be executed. Further, even in this case, it is desirable to display the display object that does not execute the above-mentioned transformation process without executing the transformation process.

When the background change effect of changing the background image 160 by executing the predetermined transformation process is executed, not only the background image 160 but also other predetermined images may be similarly changed. For example, when the display mode of the hold is different for each background, the background image 160 may be changed and the hold image may be changed as well. Further, even if it is not necessary to change the display, it may be configured to fade out together with the background image 160 and then fade in again together with the new background image 160.

Not limited to the background change effect, the display object before the execution of the predetermined transformation process and the display object after the execution of the predetermined transformation process may be changed by executing the predetermined transformation process. By changing / updating the displayed object by utilizing the predetermined transformation process in this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production rather than simply fading out / fading in the displayed object to change / update.

When the predetermined transformation process is executed to execute the change effect, for example, the display mode of the hold display may be changed. Specifically, when the hold display mode before executing the predetermined transformation process is blue, the hold display mode after executing the predetermined transformation process may be displayed in red. In the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold in this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the hold change effect by utilizing the predetermined transformation process.

When the predetermined transformation process is executed to execute the change effect, for example, the SU stage of the step-up effect (eg, SU1 → SU2) may be changed. Specifically, when the step-up image SU1 is the step before the predetermined transformation process is executed, the step-up image SU2 may display the step after the predetermined transformation process is executed. In the step-up notice for updating the SU stage in this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the step-up effect by utilizing the predetermined transformation process.

When the predetermined transformation process is executed to execute the change effect, for example, the button image, the gauge image, or the operation guidance image 166 of the button effect may be changed. Specifically, when the button image before executing the predetermined transformation process is the first button image, the button image after executing the predetermined transformation process may be displayed as the second button image. In the button effect using the operating means in this way, the interest of the button effect can be enhanced by utilizing the predetermined deformation process.

Further, the button effect may be operated during the valid period during the predetermined transformation process. If an operation is performed by the player during the predetermined transformation process, the predetermined transformation process may be interrupted to execute the operation effect. Further, the operation-time effect may be executed after the predetermined transformation process is completed.

Further, the operation of the button effect may be invalidated during the predetermined transformation process. It may be configured so that the operation validity period starts after the predetermined transformation process is executed.

The button effect is a fade-in period for displaying an image imitating a button or a button image in a fade-in manner, an operation period for displaying a button image, a gauge image, and an operation guidance image 166 and starting an operation valid period, and after the operation period ends. It is desirable that it is composed of a fade-out period in which an image imitating a button or a button image is displayed in a fade-out manner, and an operation-time effect period executed thereafter. Then, when the predetermined transformation process is executed in the button effect, the predetermined transformation process may be executed in the entire period of each period or at least one period or a plurality of periods.

It may be configured to execute a predetermined effect accompanied by a predetermined deformation process during the execution of the vibration effect by the vibrating means provided in the operating means or the like (may be provided in addition to the operating means). As described above, when the predetermined deformation process is configured to be executed in various effects, the vibration effect may be executed during the predetermined deformation process. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player via the vibration effect that the predetermined deformation process is in progress.

The effect accompanied by the predetermined deformation process may be configured so that the reach fluctuation period after the symbol is in the reach state is easier to be executed than the normal fluctuation period before the symbol is in the reach state. The effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed during the normal fluctuation period and the effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed during the reach variation period may be different from the effect, or may be a common effect. Further, the effect of executing the predetermined transformation process may not be performed at all in the normal fluctuation period, and the effect of executing the predetermined transformation process may be performed in the reach variation period. In any case, by making the appearance rate of the effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed different between the normal fluctuation period and the reach fluctuation period, the reach fluctuation period may be configured to be more easily executed.

When a plurality of reach effects can be executed in the reach variation period, it may be configured to have a reach effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed and a reach effect in which the predetermined deformation process is not executed depending on the type of reach. Further, the reach effect in which the predetermined transformation process is executed and the reach effect in which the predetermined transformation process is not executed may be different reach effects or may be a common reach effect. Further, when the reach effect being executed develops and the reach effect after development is executed, the reach effect before development and the reach effect after development may be used. Further, it may be a reach production with low reliability and a reach production with high reliability. In any case, the probability of executing the predetermined transformation effect may be different depending on the type of reach effect, so that the execution probability of the predetermined transformation effect may be different.

As described above, the predetermined deformation process may be executed in various effects, but more optimally, the predetermined lamp effect may be executed during the execution of the predetermined transformation process. In this case, the lamp effect corresponding to the image display to be subjected to the predetermined transformation processing is executed. Specifically, when the image deformed by the predetermined deformation process rotates counterclockwise, it is desirable to perform a lamp effect in which the light emitting means arranged on the board surface or the frame is turned on / off in order counterclockwise. Further, in the case of clockwise rotation, it is clockwise, and in the case of enlargement / reduction, each light emitting means may be configured to perform a lamp effect such as blinking display.

As described above, when the predetermined transformation processing is executed in various effects, the reliability of the lottery result of the variable display is high depending on whether the predetermined transformation process is not accompanied or the predetermined transformation is performed in the same advance notice effect. It may be configured differently. That is, when the advance notice effect is executed, the advance notice effect may be configured to indicate that the reliability is higher when the predetermined transformation process is executed than when it is not executed.

FIGS. 61 to 89 illustrate a third embodiment. In FIGS. 61 and 62, the game machine main body 300 includes an outer frame (first support frame) 301 and a front frame (second support frame) 302 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 301. The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via a pair of upper and lower first hinges 303 arranged on the left end side, and is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 on the right end side opposite to the first hinge 303 in the left-right direction. The locking means 304 provided can lock the outer frame 301 in a closed state.

The front frame 302 includes a main body frame 305 and a glass door 306 arranged on the front side of the main body frame 305. The glass door 306 is pivotally attached to the main body frame 305 via a pair of upper and lower second hinges 307 arranged on the left end side, and is closed to the main body frame 305 by the locking means 304. It can be locked. The first hinge 303 and the second hinge 307 are arranged so as to have the same axial center.

As shown in FIG. 62, the outer frame 301 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 308 and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 309. A front cover member 310 made of synthetic resin that covers the horizontal frame member 309 from the front side is attached to the lower horizontal frame member 309 so as to connect the lower front side of the left and right vertical frame members 308. The front cover member 310 projects forward from the left and right vertical frame members 308, and the main body frame 305 is arranged above the front cover member 310.

The main body frame 305 is made of synthetic resin, has a rectangular shape that can abut on the front edge side of the outer frame 301 on the upper side of the front cover member 310, and is mounted on a game board provided in a rectangular opening shape on the upper side. A portion 311 and a lower mounting portion 312 provided on the lower side of the game board mounting portion 311 are integrally provided.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the game board mounting portion 311 has a game board 313 that can be attached and detached from the front side, and the game board mounting portion 311 has a contact portion 314 that the game board 313 abuts from the front side. , The engaging portion 315 that engages with the game board 313 when the left and right end sides of the game board 313 are inserted into the game board mounting section 311 and the other end side of the game board 313 in the game board mounting section 311 are the main body frames. A fixing means 316 for detachably fixing to the 305 is provided. The game board mounting unit 311 may have the game board 313 detachable from the back side.

When the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 65, the one end side of the game board 313 is brought into contact with the game board mounting portion 311 from the front side of the game board mounting portion 311. It is inserted between the portion 314 and the engaging portion 315. Next, when the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305, the game board 313 moves backward with the engaging portion 315 side or the intermediate side between the contact portion 314 and the engaging portion 315 as the rotation center O. Since it rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A in FIG. 65, the game board 313 is played against the sliding resistance between the game board 313 and the game board mounting portion 311 as shown by the solid line in FIG. It can be pushed into the board mounting portion 311.

Then, when the game board 313 enters the game board mounting portion 311, the other end side of the game board 313 is tightened and fixed to the game board mounting portion 311 by a pair of upper and lower fixing means 316. As a result, the game board 313 can be easily attached. When removing the game board 313, a finger may be placed on an appropriate portion of the game board 313, and the game board 313 may be rotated in the reverse order around the rotation center O in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, the main body frame 305 is integrally or separately provided with a surrounding wall 317 projecting rearward from the outer circumference of the game board mounting portion 311. The surrounding wall 317 surrounds and protects the back side mechanism of the game board 313 mounted on the game board mounting portion 311 from the outer peripheral side, and includes an upper wall portion 318 protruding rearward from the upper side of the game board mounting portion 311. It includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 319 that project rearward from both the left and right sides of the game board mounting portion 311 and a bottom wall portion 320 that projects rearward from the lower side of the game board mounting portion 311.

The upper wall portion 318 and the bottom wall portion 320 are arranged vertically on both the upper and lower sides of the game board mounting portion 311, and the side wall portions 319 are arranged vertically on both the left and right sides on the rear side of the game board mounting portion 311. The bottom wall portion 320 is provided with a discharge port 321 for discharging the game ball that has passed through the back side of the game board 313 downward.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the glass door 306 includes a door base 322 made of synthetic resin formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the main body frame 305. In the door base 322, a window hole 324 is formed corresponding to the front side of the game area 323 formed in the game board 313, and a plurality of speakers 325 are provided at predetermined positions such as up, down, left and right around the window hole 324. A decorative cover 326 that is arranged and substantially covers each speaker 325 from the front side is attached.

Further, on the lower front side of the door base 322, as shown in FIG. 61, an upper plate (launching ball storage plate) 328 for storing game balls and supplying them to the launching means 327 and a game ball of the upper plate 328 are in a full state. At this time, a lower plate (surplus ball saucer) 329 for storing surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate 328 side, a launch handle 330 and the like operated to operate the launching means 327 are arranged, and further, the upper plate 328 is arranged. , A lower decorative cover 331 that substantially covers the lower plate 329 and the like from the front side is attached.

The lower decorative cover 331 is formed in a forward-facing bulge shape, and operating means such as an effect button 332 and a cross operating means 333 that can be pressed and operated by the player are provided on the upper side thereof. The cross operation means 333 includes four operation units 334: a rear upper key, a front lower key, a left left key, and a right right key.

As shown in FIG. 62, a glass unit 340 is detachably mounted on the back side of the door base 322 so as to substantially close the window hole 324 from the rear side, and on the first and second hinges 303 and 307 sides. Reinforcing sheet metal 335 arranged vertically along the edge, reinforcing sheet metal 336 arranged vertically along the edge on the opening / closing end side, and reinforcement arranged horizontally below the window hole 324. The sheet metal 337 is detachably fixed by screwing or the like.

Ball feeding means 338, ball guiding means 339, and the like are mounted on the back side of the reinforcing sheet metal 337. The ball feeding means 338 is for supplying the game balls in the upper plate 328 one by one to the launching means 327, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 327. The ball guiding means 339 guides the surplus ball that overflows from the upper plate 328 when the game ball of the upper plate 328 is full and the foul ball that has returned without reaching the game area 323 to the lower plate 329. The first and second hinges 303 and 307 are arranged adjacent to the ball feeding means 338.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 69, the game board 313 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting portion 311 on the main body frame 305, and the effect control board 345 and the power supply module board 346 are attached to the back side of the game board 313. The main control board 354 is arranged. Further, on the back side of the main body frame 305, a ball tank 347, a ball guide rail 348, and an external information extraction means 349 are arranged on the upper end side, and a ball payout means 350 and a ball guide means 351 are arranged on one side in the left-right direction. The relay board 352 is arranged in the vertical direction, and the LED connection board 353 is arranged in the vertical direction on the other side portion in the left-right direction. Further, on the back side of the main body frame 305, a payout board 355 and a ball rental board 356 are arranged on the left and right under the main control board 354.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the ball tank 347, the ball guide rail 348, and the external information extraction means 349 are arranged in the left-right direction along the upper side of the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317. The ball tank 347 is for storing game balls for prize balls and rental balls, is formed in a rectangular shape in a long plan view in the left-right direction, and abuts on the step portion 318a of the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317. It is detachably fixed. The ball tank 347 has an open upper side so as to receive a game ball replenished from the replenishment means 357 on the island side.

The ball guide rail 348 is for guiding the game ball from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350, and is inclined in the left-right direction from the lower side of the ball tank 347 to the upper side of the ball payout means 350. It is arranged and detachably attached to the back side of the main body frame 305. A ball breaking mechanism 358 is provided in the middle of the ball guide rail 348 as needed. The external information extraction means 349 is for extracting various game information to the outside, includes a plurality of extraction terminals 359 arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and is arranged above the ball guide rail 348.

Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portions 319 on the first and second hinges 303 and 307 sides are bent inward from the rear end in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. 63 to 68. The mounting base 360 is integrally provided, and the ball payout means 350 and the ball guiding means 351 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the back side of the mounting base 360, and are detachably mounted.

The ball payout means 350 is for paying out the game balls in the ball tank 347 based on the prize ball payout command from the payout board 355 and the ball lending command from the ball lending board 356. As shown in FIG. 64, the ball payout means 350 includes a payout case 362 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape flat in the front-rear direction, a storage passage 363 provided in a zigzag shape in the payout case 362, and a storage passage 363. A rotating body 364 for paying out the game ball and a drive motor (not shown) for driving the rotating body 364 are provided, and are detachably mounted on the back side of the rear mounting base 360. The game ball paid out from the ball payout means 350 is guided to the upper plate 328 via the ball guide means 351.

As shown in FIG. 64, the ball guiding means 351 has a payout passage 366 and a extraction passage 367. Then, when the ball payout means 350 pays out the game ball, the game ball from the ball payout means 350 is guided to the upper plate 328 via the payout passage 366, and from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350. When the game ball is pulled out, it is possible to pull out the game ball from the pull-out passage 367 through a pull-out port (not shown) to the outside of the machine. A relay board 352 is provided on the back side of the ball guiding means 351.

Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portion 319 located on the side opposite to the rotation center O when the game board 313 is attached / detached is provided with the side wall portion 319 as shown in FIGS. A sheet metal side wall reinforcing member 368 that is reinforced from the outside is provided, and a frame side joint portion 369 is provided from the side wall portion 319 along the bottom wall portion 320 in an L-shape in front view. The side wall reinforcing member 368 has a function of protecting the side wall portion 319 and the back side mechanism of the game board 313 from being damaged by contact with other members or the like when the front frame 302 is opened or closed.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, the frame-side joint portion 369 is arranged in front of and behind the board-side joint portion 370 on the back side of the game board 313, and is attached to and detached from the game board mounting portion 311 of the game board 313. It is electrically detachably connected to the panel side joint portion 370.

As shown in FIG. 62, a launching means 327, a lower speaker 325a, and the like are arranged on the front side of the lower mounting portion 312. Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, a first board mounting base 371 is mounted on the back side of the lower mounting portion 312 so as to cover the back side mechanism of the lower mounting portion 312 from the back side. On the back side of the mounting base 371, the payout board 355 housed in the payout board case 372 and the ball rental board 356 housed in the ball rental board case 373 are arranged on the left and right.

As shown in FIG. 69, the launching means 327 includes a support plate 374 made of sheet metal, a launch rail 375 mounted on the front surface of the support plate 374, and a game ball mounted on the front surface of the support plate 374 and for launching. A ball holding portion 376 held on the launch rail 375, a striking mallet 378 swingably supported around the drive shaft 377 in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the support plate 374, and a striking mallet mounted on the back side of the support plate 374. It is provided with a firing drive means 379 such as a rotary solenoid that drives 378 in the striking direction via a drive shaft 377, and when the firing handle 330 is rotated, the firing driving means 379 uses a striking mallet 378 according to the amount of operation. Is driven in the striking direction (clockwise) to launch the game ball on the launch rail 375 toward the game board 313.

The payout board 355 is for controlling the ball payout means 350 according to the payout command. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the payout board case 372 accommodating the payout board 355 is attached to and detached from the first board mounting base 371 by the engaging means 380 on the left and right one end side and the fastener 381 on the other end side. It is fixed as possible. The fastener 381 has a knob portion 382 that can be rotated around the front-rear axis on the first board mounting base 371, and the knob portion 382 tightens the payout board case 372 toward the first board mounting base 371. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the ball lending board 356 is for controlling the ball payout means 350 in accordance with a ball lending command from a ball lending button or the like. The ball lending board case 373 accommodating the ball lending board 356 is rotatably pivotally attached around the vertical axis by the pivot means 383 on the left and right one end side, and the first board mounting base 371 by the locking means 384 on the other end side. It is detachably fixed to. The locking means 384 has a lock button 385 that can be operated in the front-rear direction, and when the lock button 385 is pressed forward, the ball lending board case 373 is locked to the first board mounting base 371, and the lock button 385 is moved to the rear side. It is designed to unlock when pulled.

The game board 313 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape by a non-transmissive material such as plywood or a transparent material such as synthetic resin. On the front side of the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 70, a game area 323 and a guide rail 387 that guides the game ball launched from the launching means 327 to the upper side of the game area 323 are arranged substantially in the center. A central display frame (center case) 388, which is detachably attached to the game board 313 from the front side, is provided. A front decorative member 389 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the game area 323 on the front surface of the game board 313.

Further, on the back side of the game board 313, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68 and 71 to 75, a mounting frame 391 and a second board mounting base arranged so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391 are arranged. 392 and are attached. The mounting frame 391 includes the liquid crystal type image display means 393 arranged on the back side of the game board 313 corresponding to the central display frame 388, and the first to first ones arranged between the central display frame 388 and the image display means 393. The fourth movable effect means 394 to 397, the LED connection board 353 to which the LED for light emission effect on the front side of the front frame 302 is connected, and the harness cradle 399 for receiving the harness arranged on the back side are mounted. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the effect control board 345 and the power supply module board 346 are mounted on the back side of the image display means 393. As shown in FIG. 72, on the back side of the second board mounting base 392, the main control board case 513 accommodating the main control board 354 and the frame side joint portion 369 are electrically attached and detached when the game board 313 is attached and detached. A board-side joint portion 370 is provided.

The mounting frame 391 has a rectangular tubular shape that is short in the front-rear direction, and is detachably mounted on the back side of the game board 313. The first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are incorporated in the mounting frame 391 as shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, and the mounting frame 391 is attached to and detached from the game board 313 to the game board 313. On the other hand, it can be attached and detached from the back side integrally with the mounting frame 391.

In the game area 323, as shown in FIG. 70, a central display frame 388 is arranged substantially in the center thereof, and left flow path 401 and right flow path 402 are formed on both left and right sides of the central display frame 388. The starting winning means 403 is arranged substantially in the center below the central display frame 388, and the large winning means 404 and the ordinary winning means 405 are arranged on the left and right sides of the starting winning means 403. On the front side of the central display frame 388, various display means including the normal symbol display means 406, the normal hold quantity display means 407, the first special symbol display means 408, and the second special symbol display means 409 are arranged at appropriate positions. ing.

The guide rail 387 is arranged on the front side of the game board 313 so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the game area 323, and the game ball launched from the launching means 327 is directed to the upper side of the game area 323 via the guide path 411. It is designed to guide you. A large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 323, and the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 323 via the guide rail 387 is placed on the left flow path 401 and the right by the central display frame 388 or the like. It is distributed to any of the flow path 402 and flows down while colliding with the game nail.

As shown in FIG. 70 and the like, the game board 313 has a plurality of mounting holes 413 to 415 for mounting a central display frame 388, a starting winning means 403, a large winning means 404, a normal winning means 405, etc., an out port 416, etc. Is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 413 is for mounting the central display frame 388, and is provided at a substantially central portion in the game area 323. Further, the mounting hole 414 is for mounting the starting winning means 403 and the mounting hole 415 is for mounting the normal winning means 405, respectively, and is provided below the mounting hole 413. The out port 416 is arranged at the bottom of the game area 323.

As shown in FIGS. 76 to 80 and the like, the central display frame 388 covers the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 from the front side and forms a display window 418 corresponding to the image display means 393 inside. The central display frame 388 includes a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided into two in the circumferential direction so as to surround the display window 418, and the outer peripheral portion of the display window 418 is located in the mounting hole 413. As described above, it is detachably attached to the front side of the game board 313 with screws or the like. The central display frame 388 includes a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided into two in the circumferential direction. However, if necessary, the entire display frame 388 may be divided into three or more, and the front and rear display frames may be divided into three or more. It may be divided into a plurality of directions.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 76 to 80, the first display frame 419 is arranged along the front surface of the game board 313 on the outside of the mounting hole 413, and has a plate shape or other shape through which the game ball can pass. The front mounting portion 421 and the decorative front frame portion provided on the front side of the front mounting portion 421 in the shape of a front view gate from the top side to the left and right sides and projecting forward on the inner peripheral side of the front mounting portion 421. The window frame portion 423 that is bent rearward from the inner circumference of the front frame portion 422 and is arranged in the mounting hole 413 and surrounds the display window 418 from the outer periphery, and the rear of the window frame portion 423 on both the left and right sides of the display window 418. It is provided with left and right decorative members 424 arranged in the vertical direction, and is detachably attached to the front surface of the game board 313.

The decorative member 424 has a plate shape or other shape, and is arranged so as to project toward the display window 418 from the inner circumference of the window frame portion 423 as shown in FIGS. 73, 76, and 77. Of the left and right decorative members 424, one of the decorative members 424 is fixed to the front frame portion 422 or the like via the mounting portion 424a, and the other decorative member 424 is fixed to the window frame portion 423 or the like via the mounting portion 424a. It is fixed.

The front mounting portion 421, the front frame portion 422, and the window frame portion 423 constitute a front member 426 that divides the game area 323 on the outer peripheral side of the central display frame 388, and the decorative member 424 is an image on the rear side of the front member 426. It constitutes a rear member 427 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the display means 393. Various display means such as the normal symbol display means 406, the normal hold quantity display means 407, the first special symbol display means 408, and the second special symbol display means 409 are arranged at appropriate positions on the front side of the first display frame 419. ing.

The second display frame 420 includes a stage 429 for dropping the game ball from the front side of the game board 313 to the start winning means 403, and a warp port 430 for guiding the game ball flowing down the left flow path 401 side to the stage 429. Is provided.

The second display frame 420 is arranged between the left and right lower ends of the window frame portion 423 of the first display frame 419, and has a plate shape or the like that abuts on the front surface of the game board 313 on the lower side of the mounting hole 413. It is provided with a front mounting member 432, a stage 429 arranged on the upper side of the front mounting member 432, and an entry prevention member 431 arranged from the upper side to the rear side of the stage 429, and both left and right ends are left and right of the first display frame 419. It is detachably connected to both lower ends of the window with screws or the like.

The front mounting member 432 is integrally provided with a reinforcing peripheral wall portion 433 arranged on the inner circumference of the mounting hole 413 in substantially the entire length in the left-right direction on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 76 to 80, the front mounting member 432 has a warp port 430 that opens to the left flow path 401 side and a guide passage 434 that guides the game ball from the warp port 430 to the stage 429 side. And are formed. The guide passage 434 is communicated with the guide passage 435 formed in the intrusion prevention member 431 on the rear side, and the game ball that has entered the warp port 430 while flowing down the left flow path 401 is passed from the guide passage 434 through the guide passage 435. It is designed to guide and guide to one end side of the stage 429.

The warp port 430 is provided on the front side of the front mounting member 432. The front mounting member 432 is provided with an opening portion 437 on the front side of the warp opening 430, and a passage wall 438 for the guide passage 434 protruding forward in a U shape is integrally provided on the lower side of the warp opening 430. ing. The rear side of the guide passage 434 is communicated with the guide passage 435 via the connection hole 439. The guide passage 435 is formed between the front mounting member 432 and the passage wall 440 provided on the entry prevention member 431 in a U-shaped cross section.

By providing the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 having such a structure on the front mounting member 432, it is possible to integrally mold the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 into the front mounting member 432 by the front and rear split molds. Therefore, the number of parts of the second display frame 420 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the warp port member including the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 is detachably provided on the front mounting member 432 from the front side. it can.

The rear sides of both the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 are configured to be open, and the open side excluding the connection hole 439 with the guide passage 435 is the game board 313, the stage 429, the entry prevention member 431, etc. It may be closed with the member of. In short, the front mounting member 432 including the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 may be integrally molded by the front and rear halves.

The stage 429 has a substantially arcuate shape in front view in which both the left and right sides are raised, and has a central drop portion 450 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction and a left and right drop portions 451 arranged on both the left and right sides of the center drop portion 450. Then, after the game ball guided from the warp port 430 freely rolls in the left-right direction, it falls to the front side of the game board 313 from either the central drop portion 450 or the left-right drop portion 451. The central drop portion 450 is substantially directly above the start winning means 403, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will win the start winning means 403 when the game ball falls from the central drop portion 450.

In addition to the guide passage 435, the entry prevention member 431 is provided with a rear entry prevention plate 443 provided substantially parallel to the game board 313 so as to cover the stage 429 from the rear side, and is bent from the upper end of the rear entry prevention plate 443 to the front side. Then, an upper entry prevention plate 444 that covers the stage 429 from above is integrally provided, and the game balls that are flowing down the flow paths 401 and 402 by these entry prevention plates 443 and 444, or the game balls that bounce off on the stage 429. It is designed to prevent entry to the rear side. The entry prevention member 431 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the display image displayed on the image display means 393 via the entry prevention member 431 can be visually recognized from the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, 81 to 83, and the like, the mounting frame 391 is formed in substantially parallel to the game board 313, and a rear wall portion 446 in which a rectangular opening 455 is formed substantially in the center thereof. After that, the peripheral wall portion 447 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the wall portion 446 to the back surface of the game board 313, and bending outward from the front edge side of the peripheral wall portion 447 along the game board 313 with a fixing screw or the like. It is integrally provided with a fixing portion 448 fixed to the game board 313. The upper, lower, left and right wall portions of the peripheral wall portion 447 are arranged close to the upper wall portion 318, the side wall portion 319 and the bottom wall portion 320 of the surrounding wall 317 on the outer side thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 73, 75, and 81, the image display means 393 is vertically detachably mounted along the game board 313 on the back surface side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391. A mounting portion 453, a bulging portion 454 having a U-shaped cross section in a plan view, which is vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453 and bulges rearward from the image display means 393, and the bulging portion 454. A harness cradle 399 arranged on the lower side behind the display means mounting portion 453 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 72, 73, 75, 81, etc., a plurality of openings 456 are formed in the left and right bulges 454 in the vertical direction, and the rear side of the openings 456 is formed on the outer side in the horizontal direction. It is a handle part 457. A plurality of handle portions 457 are provided in each of the bulging portions 454 in the vertical direction, and by hooking a finger on any of the handle portions 457 on the left and right sides thereof, the game board 313 can be easily transported even when each component is attached. You can do it. In particular, since the mounting frame 391 has a plurality of handle portions 457 in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides, the handle portion is in the optimum position in terms of weight balance in consideration of the mounting status of each component on the game board 313. It is possible to use 457.

As shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 73, 81, and 82, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the opening 455 and is provided on the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 on the front surface side. A receiving portion 460 that receives the image from the front side, a bulging portion 454 that is provided on both the left and right sides of the receiving portion 460 and guides the left and right sides of the image display means 393 in the insertion / removal direction, and is provided below the receiving portion 460. A protruding wall 461 that abuts the image display means 393 on the insertion end side is provided, and the upper side is an insertion / removal portion 462 for the image display means 393.

The height of the protrusion 461 to the rear is about half of that of the bulge 454, and is bent upward from both left and right ends of the receiving portion 460 to reach the lower side of the bulge 454. The upper end side of the image display means 393 is detachably fixed to the upper receiving portion 460 by a plurality of fixing means 463 in the left-right direction, and the lower end side of the image display means 393 is a plurality of left-right directions to the protruding wall 461. It is detachably fixed by the fixing means 464.

The insertion / removal portion 462 of the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the upper end side of the mounting frame 391 as shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 81, and 82, and the game board 313 is attached to the front frame 302. In the state of being mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, the frame side members such as the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317 of the front frame 302 and the ball tank 347 are close to the upper side of the insertion / removal portion 462, and the upper wall thereof. It is covered from above by a frame-side member such as a portion 318 and a ball tank 347. Therefore, when the game board 313 is attached, the image display means 393 cannot be removed from the insertion / removal portion 462.

As shown in FIG. 73, the bulging portion 454 has a U-shaped cross section in a plan view with the front side open, and is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453. A guide rail 465 for guiding the image display means 393 on both the left and right sides is configured by the receiving portions 460 on both the left and right sides.

The internal space of the bulging portion 454 has a function as an accommodating portion for accommodating a part or all of the internal mechanism (game parts) in the mounting frame 391. Of the left and right bulging portions 454, the bulging portion 454 on the ball payout means 350 side is arranged so as to be close to the rear mounting base 360 and overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the bulge on the opposite side to the ball payout means 350. The portion 454 is provided with a side substrate mounting base 467 that projects to the back side of the image display means 393. The side board mounting base 467 has a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer side in the left-right direction is detachably fixed to the back side of the bulging portion 454, and the lower end side is detachably fixed to the back side of the harness cradle 399 by a fixing tool such as a screw. There is.

The left and right side portions of the side board mounting base 467 are fixed to the bulging portion 454 of the mounting frame 391 by a plurality of upper and lower fixtures 473, and the lower end portion is fixed to the harness pedestal 399 by a plurality of left and right fixtures 474. The harness cradle 399 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing tool 475 such as a screw. Screws and the like are used for the fixtures 473 to 475.

The side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 constitute a protruding member (fixing member) that protrudes to the back side of the display means mounting portion 453, and the left and right side portions of the display means mounting portion 453 and the left and right side portions. It overlaps the lower part from the back side, and constitutes a back side guiding means that guides the image displaying means 393 by pressing it from the back side when the image displaying means 393 is inserted or removed. In addition to the back side guiding means, the side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 constitute limiting means (back side pressing means) for restricting the movement of the image display means 393 to the rear side. Although the side board mounting base 467 and the harness cradle 399 are close to each other through a slight gap between the side board mounting base 467 and the image display means 393, even if they are slidably contacted with the image display means 393. Good.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 and 82, the LED connection board 353 is detachably mounted on the side board mounting base 467 without using screws or the like. An LED (not shown) for producing light emission on the front side of the front frame 302 is connected to the LED connection board 353. The side board mounting base 467 includes a peripheral wall portion 469 that surrounds the LED connection board 353, a board contact portion 470 that the LED connection board 353 contacts from the back side, and a board engagement that engages with the left and right one end edges of the LED connection board 353. It has a portion 471 and a substrate engaging claw 472 that engages with the left and right other end edges of the LED connecting substrate 353, whereby the LED connecting substrate 353 is detachably fixed.

A plurality of substrate contact portions 470 are provided in the circumferential direction on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 469 corresponding to the outer peripheral portion of the LED connection substrate 353. A plurality of substrate engaging portions 471 are provided in the vertical direction on the inside of one of the left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469 corresponding to the middle between the substrate contact portions 470. The substrate engaging claws 472 are elastically deformable with respect to the LED connection substrate 353 in the engaging and disengaging directions, and a plurality of the substrate engaging claws 472 are provided in the vertical direction on the left and right other sides of the peripheral wall portion 469.

When mounting the LED connection board 353 on the side board mounting base 467, first, one end side of the LED connection board 353 is inserted between the board contact portion 470 and the board engagement portion 471. Next, when the LED connection board 353 is pressed toward the side board mounting base 467 side with the board contact portion 470 and the board engagement portion 471 side as fulcrums, the board engagement claw 472 elastically deforms outward and the LED connection board 353. Is housed in the peripheral wall portion 469, and the outer peripheral portion thereof abuts on each substrate contact portion 470. Then, when the LED connection board 353 passes through the board engagement claw 472, the board engagement claw 472 is restored by an elastic force and engages with the other side edge of the LED connection board 353.

Therefore, with this configuration, the LED connection board 353 can be easily attached to and detached from the side board mounting base 467, and the side board mounting base 467 can be removed and easily reused as a synthetic resin material. There are advantages that can be done. Further, screws for fixing the LED connection board 353 are not required, and the amount of screws used can be reduced as much as possible.

The mounting structure of the LED connection board 353 with respect to the side board mounting base 467 can also be similarly adopted when mounting the mounted member with respect to another mounting base.

The image display means 393 is configured by accommodating a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a storage case 482, and is configured by FIG. 65, FIG. 67, FIG. 68, FIG. 73, FIG. 85, FIG. 86. As shown in the above, the insertion / detachment portion 462 is inserted vertically into the display means mounting portion 453, and the upper and lower ends of the storage case 482 are fixed by the fixing means 464,464. The storage case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and the image display panel 481 is detachably housed from the open side on the front side. The image display panel 481 is held by a storage case 482 and a holding frame 483 arranged so as to correspond to the front outer circumference of the image display panel 481. The holding frame 483 is fixed to the peripheral wall portion 484 of the storage case 482.

A plurality of fixing means 464 and 464 are provided on both the upper and lower sides of the image display means 393 in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 67, the upper fixing means 463 has a mounting portion 485 that projects upward from the housing case 482 and a mounting hole provided in the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the mounting portion 485. It is provided with 486 and a fixing tool 487 such as a screw that is inserted from the mounting portion 485 into the mounting hole 486.

As shown in FIG. 68, the lower fixing means 464 is provided on the mounting portion 488 protruding downward from the storage case 482 and the protruding wall 461 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the mounting portion 488. It is provided with a mounting hole 489 and a fixing tool 490 such as a screw that is inserted from the mounting portion 488 into the mounting hole 489. The protruding wall 461 is provided with a positioning portion 491 for positioning the left and right positions of the image display means 393 with the mounting portion 488.

The positioning portion 491 is formed in a notch shape on the protruding wall 461 so that the mounting portion 488 is inserted and removed in the vertical direction, and a mounting hole 489 is provided in the positioning portion 491. The mounting portion 488 and the positioning portion 491 constitute a positioning means for the image display means 393. The harness cradle 399 is provided with an opening-shaped or notched-shaped operating portion 492 facing the fixing means 464, and a tool or the like for the fixing tool 490 is inserted from the operating portion 492 to insert the fixing tool 490. It is designed to perform operations such as turning.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the storage case 482 is integrally formed with the peripheral wall portion 484 and the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 484, and the upper rear wall portion 493 and the lower rear wall portion 493 abutting against the back surface of the image display panel 481. It is equipped with a wall portion 494. The storage case 482 has a large depth in the front-rear direction on the upper rear wall portion 493 side, and ribs and other reinforcing portions 493a are provided on the front side or both front and rear sides, and slightly behind the lower rear wall portion 494. It is protruding. An effect control board 345 and a power supply module board 346 are mounted on the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 493. The lower rear wall portion 494 is close to the back surface of the image display panel 481, and the harness cradle 399 is provided close to the back side of the lower rear wall portion 494.

The effect control board 345 has a function of controlling various effect images displayed on the image display means 393, a function of controlling the effect image, and a function of controlling various other movable effect means 394 to 397. , It is housed in the effect control board case 495. As shown in FIG. 85A, the effect control board case 495 is configured by connecting the front case 495a and the rear case 495b so as to be openable and closable in the front-rear direction. The rear case 495b is provided with an opening 498 corresponding to the connector 497 on the back surface of the effect control board 345, and a harness (not shown) is connected to the connector 497 on the opening 498 side.

The effect control board case 495 is detachably attached to the back side of the storage case 482 by the fixed engaging portion 499, the contact portion 500, the fastener 501, and the engaging claw 502 with respect to the storage case 482 of the image display means 393. ing. The fixed engaging portion 499 and the contact portion 500 project rearward from the accommodating case 482 at intervals of 495 minutes from the effect control board case, and the effect control board case 495 can be freely engaged and disengaged from the fixed engaging portion 499. The contact portion 500 engages with the fixed engaging portion 499, and sandwiches the effect control board case 495 in the left-right direction.

The fastener 501 is rotatably supported on the contact portion 500 by the pivot 505, and is operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the effect control board case 495 to the accommodation case 482. The fastener 501 can be positioned at the fastening position and the releasing position on the contact portion 500. The engaging claw 502 projects from the accommodating case 482 to the back side and is arranged on the upper side of the contact portion 500, and is engaged with the effect control board case 495 in a disengaged manner.

As shown in FIG. 89A, the abutting portion 500, the fastener 501, and the engaging claw 502 do not interfere with the side substrate mounting base 467 when the image display means 393 is inserted into and detached from the display means mounting portion 453. Have been placed. On the other hand, the fixed engaging portion 499 is located on the edge side of the accommodation case 482 in the left-right direction, and when the image display means 393 is to be inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 with the left and right sides wrong, FIG. As shown in the above, the fixed engaging portion 499 interferes with the upper end of the side board mounting base 467 to prevent the image display means 393 from being inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 in that state. ..

Therefore, the fixed engaging portion (first member) 499 and the side board mounting base (second member) 467 constitute an erroneous mounting preventing means 516 for preventing erroneous mounting of the image display means 393 on the display means mounting portion 453. Has been done.

The fixed engaging portion (first member) 499 constitutes an attachment for detachably attaching the effect control board case 495 to the accommodation case 482, and the attachment target is the effect control board case. Parts other than 495 may be used. Further, the first member may be a protrusion provided in a protruding shape for other purposes, and is not limited to the attachment.

As shown in FIG. 85B, the power supply module board 346 is housed in the power supply module board case 506, and the engaging means 503, 504 is housed on the upper side of the effect control board 345 and on the back side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the house case 482. It is detachably attached via such means.

When the image display means 393 is mounted on the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313, the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side as shown in FIG. 89 (a). And attach it. In FIG. 89, the game board 313 and the image display means 393 are in an upright posture for the convenience of drawing creation. However, when the image display means 393 is attached when assembling the game board 313 side, for example, the front surface is on the lower side. The work is performed with the game board 313 tilted horizontally.

When mounting the image display means 393, the image display means 393 is inserted from the insertion / removal portion 462 side along the guide rail 465 of the display means mounting portion 453 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 89 (a). Then, the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 until the insertion end side of the storage case 482 abuts on the protruding wall 461.

When the mounting portion 485 on the insertion end side of the storage case 482 enters the positioning portion 491 of the protruding wall 461, the positioning function of the mounting portion 485 and the positioning portion 491 enables the image display means 393 in the display means mounting portion 453. Can be positioned at an appropriate position in the left-right direction. Next, the image display means 393 may be fixed to the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 by the fixing means 436 and 464 on both the upper and lower sides.

If the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the display means mounting portion 453 is in the open state in this way, the image display means 393 can be attached / detached substantially in parallel with the game board 313 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, so that the periphery of the display means mounting portion 453. Although there are other components such as the side board mounting base 467 and the harness cradle 399 so as to overlap the image display means 393, there is an advantage that the image display means 393 can be easily attached and detached without removing them. is there. Therefore, other parts can be arranged so as to overlap the back side of the image display means 393.

Further, when the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453, the left and right one end sides of the image display means 393 enter the lower side of the side board mounting base 467, and then the lower side of the image display means 393 is a harness. Since it enters the lower side of the pedestal 399, the side board mounting base 467 and the harness pedestal 399 can be used as a kind of guide member. Therefore, even when the image display means 393 is inserted / removed while the game board 313 is upright, there is no risk that the image display means 393 may fall out rearward, and the image display means 393 can be easily and safely inserted / removed. It can be carried out.

When assembling, etc., if the left and right sides of the image display means 393 are mistaken and an attempt is made to insert the image display means 393 in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the effect control board case 495 is fixed. The fixed engaging portion 499 interferes with the side board mounting base 467 on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453, and the image display means 393 cannot be inserted into the display means mounting portion 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous insertion, erroneous mounting, and the like of the image display means 393.

Further, the fixed engaging portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 constitute the erroneous mounting prevention means 516, and the fixed engaging portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 are also used as the erroneous mounting preventing means 516. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the dedicated erroneous mounting preventing means 516 is provided.

Even when the fixed engaging portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 are also used to prevent erroneous mounting, members other than the fixed engaging portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 may be used. Further, it is also possible to provide a dedicated means and member for preventing erroneous mounting without using the other member in common.

When the effect control board 345 is mounted, one end side of the effect control board case 495 is engaged with the fixed engaging portion 499, and then the effect control board case 495 is brought into contact with the back surface of the accommodating case 482 to be fixed. It is sandwiched between the joint portion 499 and the contact portion 500. Further, when the effect control board case 495 is brought into contact with the back surface of the accommodation case 482, the engagement claw 502 engages with the effect control board case 495. Therefore, even when the game board 313 is upright, the effect control board case 495 does not fall off. Finally, the fastener 501 is rotated around the pivot 505 toward the effect control board case 495 side, and the effect control board case 495 is tightened and fixed to the back surface of the accommodation case 482 by the fastener 501.

On the rear side of the protruding wall 461, a harness cradle 399 arranged behind the lower side of the display means mounting portion 453 is provided so as to be close to the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393. ing. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the harness cradle 399 has three sides fixed to the protruding wall 461 on the lower side and on both the left and right sides by fixing tools 475 such as screws.

As shown in FIG. 72, a plurality of hanging portions 507 for the harness 476 are provided on the back surface of the harness cradle 399 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and the harness 467 is provided by using the hanging portions 507 at appropriate positions. Is supposed to stop. The hanging portion 507 stops the harness 476 wired along the back surface of the harness pedestal 399, is arranged substantially parallel to the harness pedestal 399 in the vertical or horizontal direction, and is elastically deformable at one end in the longitudinal direction. The side is connected to the harness cradle 399. The hanging portion 507 is formed in a claw shape or a hook shape.

When wiring the harness 476, the harness 476 is wired in the left-right direction and other predetermined directions along the back surface of the harness cradle 399, while the harness 476 is hooked on a part or all of the hanging portion 507 as needed. .. The hanging portion 507 is formed in the shape of a claw or a hook having appropriate elasticity, and the harness 476 is hard to come off.

By providing the harness pedestal 399 on the lower rear side of the display means mounting portion 453 and arranging the harness 476 on the back side of the harness pedestal 399 in this way, the image display means 393 is inserted and removed from the display means mounting portion 453. At that time, it is possible to prevent the image display means 393 and the harness 476 from being confused. Further, by arranging the harness cradle 399 close to the back surface of the image display means 393, the harness cradle 399 can also be used as a guide for the image display means 393.

As shown in FIG. 72, the second board mounting base 392 is mounted on the back surface of the game board 313 so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391 including the harness cradle 399. The second board mounting base 392 has a rear wall portion 508 located on the back side of the harness cradle 399, side wall portions 509 fixed to the game board 313 on both left and right sides of the lower portion of the mounting frame 391, and a ball discharge port 510. It has a bottom wall portion 511 formed and fixed to the game board 313 under the mounting frame 391.

The second board mounting base 392 is provided with an opening 512 corresponding to the back side of the harness wired on the back side of the harness cradle 399 by the wall portion 508, and the opening 512 is mainly closed from the back side. A main control board case 513 that houses the control board 354 is detachably attached to the back side of the rear wall portion 508.

As shown in FIG. 83, the main control board case 513 is configured by connecting the front case 513a and the rear case 513b so as to be openable and closable in the front-rear direction. The main control board case 513 is arranged in a horizontally long shape close to the lower side of the effect control board case 495, and is detachably mounted on the second board mounting base 392 by the engaging means 514, 515 on both the left and right sides. ing.

The frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side joint portion 370 are configured in a substantially L-shape in front view as shown in FIGS. 66, 69, 71, and 72, and the frame-side joint portion 369 is a front frame 302. The board-side joint portion 370 is arranged in the lower part on the side far from the hinges 303 and 307 of the game board 313 facing forward and backward in the front-rear direction in the lower part on the side farther from the hinges 303 and 307 of the game board 313.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, the frame-side joint portion 369 has a joint support portion 519 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall portion 319 and a joint that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall reinforcing member 368. The joint reinforcing portion 520 that reinforces the support portion 519 from the back side, the frame side mounting plate 521 arranged on the front side of the joint support portion 519, and the first to third frame side connectors that are forwardly mounted on the frame side mounting plate 521. It is equipped with 525 to 527.

The frame-side mounting plate 521 has a first frame-side mounting portion 522 arranged in the vertical direction and a second and third frame-side mounting portions 523 and 524 arranged in the left-right direction, and the first frame thereof. The first frame-side connector 525 is mounted on the side mounting portion 522, and the second and third frame-side connectors 526 and 527 are mounted on the second and third frame-side mounting portions 523 and 524, respectively. The first to third frame-side connectors 525-527 are supported so as to be floatable via attachments 528 on both ends.

As shown in FIGS. 66, 71, and 72, the board-side joint portion 370 is arranged at the lower corner portion of the rear wall portion 508 of the second board mounting base 392 facing the frame-side joint portion 369, and thereafter. It has a vertical first board side mounting portion 530 and a left and right second and third board side mounting portions 531 and 532 formed on the wall portion 508, and the first board is attached to the first board side mounting portion 530. The side connectors 533 are arranged so that the second and third board side connectors 534 and 535 are arranged rearward on the second and third board side mounting portions 531, 532, respectively.

The first to third frame side mounting portions 522-524 and the first to third frame side connectors 525-527 are mounted on the first to third board sides with the side closer to the rotation center O of the game board 313 located on the front side. The portions 530 to 532 and the connectors 533 to 535 on the first to third board sides are inclined diagonally with respect to the line segment in the left-right direction so that the side close to the rotation center O of the game board 313 is located on the front side. Are arranged. Then, the first to third frame side connectors 525-527 and the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 rotate when the game board 313 is rotated with the engaging portion 315 side as the rotation center O. The pin insertion / removal portions are sequentially connected in the tangential direction around the rotation center O from the side closer to the moving center O.

The first to third board side mounting portions 530 to 532 are arranged on a line segment passing through the substantially rotation center O, and the first to third board side mounting portions 530 to 532 are arranged on the first to third board. The first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 are mounted via the side relay boards 536 to 538. Therefore, the pin insertion / removal portions of the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 are substantially parallel to the first to third board side mounting portions 530 to 532, and the front side of the first to third board side mounting portions 530 to 532. It is located close to. The first to third board side relay boards 536 to 538 are provided with first to third relay connectors 539 to 541 for connecting a harness 476 to each board on the game board 313 side.

The first to third frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 are configured corresponding to the first to third board-side connectors 533 to 535 of the board-side joint portion 370. The second and third frame-side connectors 526 and 527 and the second and third board-side connectors 534 and 535 are located on the side closer to the second frame-side connector 526 and the second board-side connector 534 on the side far from the rotation center O. It is arranged above the third frame side connector 527 and the third board side connector 535. The first to third frame side connectors 525-527 and the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 may be arranged so that the pin insertion / removal portions are inserted / removed substantially at the same time, and are far from the rotation center O. It may be arranged so that the pin insertion / removal portion is sequentially inserted / removed from the side.

If the frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side joint portion 370 having such a configuration are provided, the game board 313 is rotated around the rotation center O when the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting portion 311. By doing so, the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 and the panel-side connectors 533 to 535 of the panel-side joint portion 370 are connected in the tangential direction, so that the panel-side connectors 533 to 535 are connected to the frame-side connector 525. It is possible to connect to ~ 527 without difficulty.

That is, one end side of the game board 313 is inserted between the contact portion of the game board mounting portion 311 and the 314 and the engaging portion 315, and the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed from the front side in the direction of the arrow to play the game. By rotating the board 313 around the rotation center O, the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side connectors 533 to 535 of the board-side joint portion 370 are connected in the tangential direction. The panel-side connectors 533 to 535 can be easily connected to the frame-side connectors 525 to 527.

When the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 65, the one end side of the game board 313 is brought into contact with the game board mounting portion 311 from the front side of the game board mounting portion 311. It is inserted between the portion 314 and the engaging portion 315, and then the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305. Then, the game board 313 rotates around the rotation center O in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A in FIG. 65, so that the game board 313 can be pushed into the game board mounting portion 311.

Then, when the game board 313 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A, the board-side connectors 533 to 535 of the board-side joint portion 370 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 are shown in FIG. 87 (a). As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the corresponding board-side connectors 533 to 535 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 are sequentially connected in the tangential direction from the side closer to the rotation center O through the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the panel-side connectors 533 to 535 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 can be connected without difficulty.

Further, by arranging the plurality of frame-side joint portions 369 and the board-side joint portion 370 in an L-shape, for example, on the board-side joint portion 370 side, the two sides of the corner portion of the second board mounting base 392 can be formed. It is possible to arrange the board side joint portion 370 by effectively utilizing it. Therefore, despite the fact that there are a plurality of frame-side connectors 525-527 and board-side connectors 533-535, the frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side joint portion 370 can be efficiently utilized by effectively utilizing the space having few two sides. Can be placed in.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the first and second movable effect means 394 and 395 are arranged above and below the front side of the image display means 393 in the mounting frame 391, and the front side of the image display means 393. The third and fourth movable effect means 396,397 are arranged on the left and right of the above.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the first movable effect means 394 includes a first movable effect body 546 and a first drive means 547 that drives the first movable effect body 546 in the vertical direction. By driving the first driving means 547, the image display means 393 can be moved in the vertical direction between the upper position on the upper front side and the lower position on the lower front side while maintaining a substantially horizontal state. The first driving means 547 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the first movable effect body 546.

The first movable effect body 546 includes a support 548 arranged in a horizontally long shape on the front upper portion of the image display means 393 and a decorative body 549 mounted on the front side of the support 548, and the left and right sides of the support 548 are provided. Both ends are supported by a pair of first driving means 547 arranged on the left and right sides of the image display means 393 so as to be movable in the vertical direction via the first driving connecting body 550.

The first driving means 547 is supported by the mounting frame 391 via a vertically elongated support member 551. The first drive means 547 is arranged in the vertical direction along the outer edge of the image display means 393 toward both upper and lower ends thereof, and has an elongated columnar elevating guide body 552 that guides the first drive connecting body 550 in the vertical direction. , A drive pulley 555 arranged near the lower end of the elevating guide body 552, a driven pulley 554 arranged near the upper end side of the elevating guide body 552, and a drive source 555 such as a stepping motor for rotationally driving the drive pulley 553. It is provided with an endless timing belt 556 that is wound around a drive pulley 553 and a driven pulley 554 and to which a first drive connecting body 550 is fixed at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction thereof.

An end portion of the first movable effect body 546 is rotatably connected to the first drive connecting body 550 by a pivot axis 557 in the front-rear direction. An elongated hole 558 through which the pivot 557 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction is formed on one end side of the first movable effect body 546. Therefore, the first movable effect body 546 can be inclined obliquely within the range in which the pivot 557 slides in the elongated hole 558.

The decorative body 549 employs a three-dimensional decoration with an airplane motif, and has a fuselage portion 559 and wing portions 560 extending from the fuselage portion 559 to the left and right sides. The decorative body 549 is arranged so that the tip end side of the body portion 559 projects into the display window 418 of the central display frame 388. The tip side of the wing portion 560 is arranged in front of the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388.

The wing portion 560, which is a part of the decorative body 549, constitutes a front side portion arranged on the front side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and other parts except the fuselage portion 559 and the like are on the rear side of the decorative member 424. It constitutes the rear side to be arranged. Therefore, by arranging the decorative body 549 on both the front and rear sides of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388 in this way, it is possible to sufficiently secure the arrangement area of the first movable effect means 394.

Further, the distance between the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388 is different between the upper and lower sides, and the decorative body 549 can pass through the left and right decorative members 424 in the front-rear direction at a position where the distance is widened. .. For example, in this embodiment, since the distance between the left and right decorative members 424 is large on the lower side, when the first movable effect means 394 is assembled to the mounting frame 391, the first is up to the lower side of the decorative member 424. The movable effect body 546 is moved so that the wing portion 560 of the decorative body 549 is positioned in front of the decorative member 424.

Inside the left and right side walls of the mounting frame 391, an LED substrate 542 is provided so as to illuminate the first movable effect body 546 of the first movable effect means 394, especially the decorative body 549. The LED substrate 542 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 543 in the vertical direction corresponding to the moving range of the first movable effect body 546, and the LED 543 is emitted to illuminate the decorative body 549 at the time of a predetermined movable effect.

The decorative body 549 may be a motif other than an airplane, and when moving in the left-right direction, the decorative body 549 may be assembled in a state where the decorative body 549 is moved inward from the decorative member 424. Further, the decorative body 549 may be movable between the front side of the decorative member 424 and a position deviated from the front side of the decorative member 424, and may move linearly in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, etc., as well as rotate or swing. You may try to do it. Further, it may be detached from the front side of the decorative member 424 by elastic deformation. Further, at least a part of the first movable effect means 394 may be arranged on the front side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and the other main part may be arranged on the back side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the second movable effect means 395 supports the second movable effect body 562 and the support member 563 fixed to the mounting frame 391, and supports the second movable effect body 562. A second driving means 564 that drives in the vertical direction is provided, and the second movable effect body 562 is driven by the second driving means 564 while maintaining a substantially horizontal state, and the lower position on the lower front side of the image display means 393. It can be moved to and from the upper position on the front side of the upper and lower middle parts. The second driving means 564 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the second movable effect body 562.

The second driving means 564 is arranged on the rear side of the first driving means 547 and on the front side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, and is arranged vertically on the lower side thereof along the side edge of the image display means 393. An elongated columnar elevating guide body 566 that guides the second drive connecting body 565 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 567 arranged near the upper end side of the elevating guide body 566, and a vicinity of the lower end side of the elevating guide body 566. A driven pulley 568 arranged in the above, a drive source 569 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the drive pulley 567, and a second drive connector wound around the drive pulley 567 and the driven pulley 568 and at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction thereof. It is provided with an endless timing belt 570 to which 565 is fixed.

The drive source 569 is fixed to the back side of the support member 563, and the rear end side is arranged in the bulging portion 454 of the mounting frame 391. Of course, in this case, the drive source 569, which is a part of the second drive means 564, is arranged in the bulging portion 454, but at least a part of the second movable effect means 395, for example, the second movable effect means 395. At least a part of the support mechanism and / or the second driving means 564 may be incorporated in the bulge 454.

By incorporating the game component, which is an internal mechanism arranged inside the mounting frame 391, into the bulging portion 454, the first movable effect means 394 and the second movable effect means 395 are placed on the front side of the image display means 393. It is not necessary to secure a large distance between the game board 313 and the image display means 393, and the image display means 393 can be placed close to the game board 313 side.

An end portion of the second movable effect body 562 is rotatably connected to the second drive connecting body 565 by a pivot axis 571 in the front-rear direction. A long hole 572 through which the pivot 571 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction is formed on one end side of the first movable effect body 546. Therefore, the second movable effect body 562 can be inclined obliquely within the range in which the pivot 571 slides in the elongated hole 572.

The first movable effect body 546 and the second movable effect body 562 are arranged vertically, but the movement path of the first movable effect body 546 and the movement path of the second movable effect body 562 are arranged so as to be offset in the front-rear direction. ing. Therefore, the first movable effect body 546 and the second movable effect body 562 can arbitrarily move in the vertical direction without interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 are arranged symmetrically corresponding to the left and right sides of the image display means 393, and the vertically elongated movable effect means. A body 574 and a driving means 575 for driving the movable effect body 574 in the left-right direction are provided, and the driving means 575 provides an outer external position in the left-right direction and an inner inner position in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 393. It is possible to move between. The drive means 575 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the movable effect body 574.

The movable effect body 574 is arbitrarily decorated (not shown) on the front side, and is arranged vertically on the front side along the left and right edges of the image display means 393. The drive means 575 is provided with a support portion 576 fixed inside the peripheral wall portion 447 of the mounting frame 391 and slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the support portion 576, and a movable effect body 574 is fixed to the front side. It is composed of an electromagnetic sliding means including a sliding portion 577. The movable effect body 574 can be moved between the outer external position in the left-right direction and the inner inner position in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 393 by the driving means 575.

The movable effect body 574 of the third movable effect means 396 and the fourth movable effect means 397 are separated from each other on the left and right sides, and do not interfere with each other even when moved to the internal position. Further, the movement path of each movable effect body 574 of the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 lies between the movement path of the first movable effect body 546 and the movement path of the second movable effect body 562, and moves. Occasionally, the movable effect bodies 574 of the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 do not interfere with each other.

The first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are used for the same movable effect as in the first embodiment, and all or a part of the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are appropriately moved. It is also possible to narrowly limit or widen the image display area 579 of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393.

For example, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 88A, the display screen 578 is limited by the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 to play a game in a narrow image display area 579, which is advantageous for reach and other players. In the case of a specific gaming state or a gaming state that is a precursor thereof, as shown in FIG. 88B, the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are retracted to the outside of the display screen 578 to display the display screen 578. It is also possible to expand the entire area to play a game in a wide image display area 579.

As a method of limiting the image display area 579, one or both of the upper and lower first and second movable effect means 394 and 395 are moved to the center side of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 to move the upper and lower sides of the image display area 579. The left and right width of the image display area 579 by moving one or both of the first method of limiting the width and the left and right third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 to the center side of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393. There is a second way to limit. There is also a method of limiting the vertical width and the horizontal width of the image display area 579 by combining the first method and the second method. Enlarging or reducing the vertical width and / or the horizontal width of the display area may be intermittently repeated a plurality of times by utilizing all or a part of the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397.

90 to 107 show a fourth embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, the image display means 393 can be inserted and removed in the lateral direction with respect to the display means mounting portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313. The insertion / removal type is illustrated.

The game board 313 is provided with a mounting frame 391 on the back side as shown in FIGS. 90 to 92. On the back side of the mounting frame 391, there are a liquid crystal type image display means 393 corresponding to the central display frame 388 on the front side of the game board 313, and an LED (not shown) for producing light emission on the front side of the front frame 302. The connected LED connection board 353, the harness pedestal 399 for receiving the harness arranged on the back surface side, and the relay board 352 for relaying each harness are mounted.

On the back side of the image display means 393, an effect control board case 495 accommodating the effect control board 345 and a power supply module board case 506 accommodating the power supply module board 346 are mounted, and under the effect control board case 495. A harness cradle 399 is provided on the side.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 98, the mounting frame 391 has a rear wall portion 446 formed substantially parallel to the game board 313 and a rectangular opening 455 formed substantially in the center thereof, and a rear wall portion 446. A peripheral wall portion 447 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the game board 313 to the back surface of the game board 313 is provided, and the front end portion of the peripheral wall portion 447 is fixed to the back side of the game board 313 by a fixing tool 586 such as a screw or a nail. ..

As shown in FIG. 93, on the back surface side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, the image display means 393 can be inserted and removed in the left-right direction along the game board 313, and the display means mounting portion 453 and the display means mounting. On the left and right end sides of the portion 453, a side substrate mounting base 467 that protrudes rearward from the image display means 393 and is arranged in the vertical direction and to which the LED connection substrate 353 is detachably mounted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 99, the image display means 393 is configured by accommodating a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a storage case 482. Then, the image display means 393 is connected to the display means mounting portion 453 in the left-right direction (horizontally) from the insertion / detachment portion 462 provided in an open shape on the side opposite to the side board mounting base 467 of the display means mounting portion 453. It can be inserted and removed in the direction), and is fixed at a predetermined mounting position by fixing means 584,585 at both left and right ends.

The storage case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIGS. 94 to 99, the image display panel 481 is detachably housed from the open side on the front side, and is inserted into the peripheral wall portion 484 from both the left and right sides to form an image. The image display panel 481 is detachably held by a fixture 586 such as a screw that comes into contact with the side surface of the display panel 481. The storage case 482 has an upper rear wall portion 493 and a lower rear wall portion 494, and the upper rear wall portion 493 is reinforced in a predetermined direction such as a vertical direction and a horizontal direction in order to secure the strength of the storage case 482. A rib 587 and a reinforcing ridge portion 588 having a U-shaped cross section are provided.

As shown in FIG. 99, between the front end surfaces of the reinforcing ribs 587 and the reinforcing ridges 588 on the upper and lower rear wall portions 494 and 494 sides of the housing case 482 and the back surface of the image display panel 481, front and rear A slight gap s is provided in the direction. Therefore, when the image display means 393 is handled as a single unit, even if one or both of the upper and lower rear wall portions 494 and 494 of the storage case 482 may be pressed toward the image display panel 481, it is reinforced. The upper and lower rear wall portions 494 and 494 of the housing case 482 are only slightly deformed toward the image display panel 481 within the range of the gap s between the rib 587, the reinforcing ridge portion 588, etc. and the image display panel 481. The image display panel 481 is not immediately deformed or damaged due to the deformation of the upper and lower rear wall portions 494 and 494 of the storage case 482.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, a plurality of fixing means 584, 585 are provided in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the image display means 393. Then, as shown in FIG. 98, the fixing means 584, 585 are provided in the mounting portions 589,590 protruding in the left-right direction from the storage case 482 and in the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the mounting portions 589,590. It is provided with a mounting hole 591, 592 provided and a fixing tool 594, 594 such as a screw inserted from the mounting portion 589,590 into the mounting hole 591, 592.

The attachment hole 591 of the fixing means 584 on the distal end side of the image display means 393 is provided in the notch 596 of the protruding wall 595 projecting rearward from the rear wall portion 446. Further, the notch portion 596 is formed corresponding to the attachment portion 589, and the attachment portion 589 can be inserted and removed in the lateral direction in the notch portion 596. Therefore, the notch portion 596 has a function as a positioning portion, and constitutes a positioning means for positioning the accommodation case 482 with the mounting portion 589 on the accommodation case 482 side.

An inclined guide portion 598 is provided on the tip side of the attachment portion 589, and a guide portion 599 is provided on the protruding wall 595 corresponding to the notch portion 596, and the guide portions 598 and 599 attach the guide portion 599. The portion 589 is guided to the notch portion 596 of the protruding wall 595. The guide portions 598 and 599 are composed of inclined portions, but may be an arc surface or the like.

On the back side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the accommodating case 482, as in the third embodiment, an effect control board case 495 accommodating the effect control board 345 and a power supply module board case 506 accommodating the power supply module board 346. Are detachably arranged. The effect control board case 495 is horizontally long in the left-right direction, and the power supply module board case 506 is arranged on the upper side thereof.

As shown in FIG. 90, the effect control board case 495 has an upper rear wall with a fixed engaging portion 499, an abutting portion 500, a fastener 501, and an engaging claw 502 with respect to the accommodating case 482 of the image display means 393. It is detachably attached to the back side of the portion 493. The fixed engaging portion 499 and the contact portion 500 project rearward from the accommodating case 482 at intervals of 495 minutes from the effect control board case 495, and the fixed engaging portion 499 has an engaging protrusion of the effect control board case 495. The 503 is engaged with each other in a disengaged manner, and the contact portion 500 sandwiches the effect control board case 495 with the fixed engaging portion 499 in the left-right direction.

The fastener 501 is rotatably supported on the abutting portion 500 by the pivot 505, and is operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the effect control board case 495 to the upper rear wall portion 493. The engaging claw 502 projects from the accommodating case 482 to the back side and is arranged on the upper side of the contact portion 500, and is engaged with the effect control board case 495 in a disengaged manner.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 92 and 100 to 103, a harness cradle 399 is provided on the lower side of the effect control board case 495 on the back surface side of the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482. The harness cradle 399 is composed of the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482 itself, and various harnesses 600 such as a flat harness connecting the effect control board 345 and the movable effect means (not shown) are directed in a predetermined direction. It is arranged in, and is stopped by a stopper 601.

On the back surface side of the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482 constituting the harness cradle 399, mounting portions 602 are provided in a concave shape at a plurality of locations, and a large number of mounting holes 603 are provided in each mounting portion 602 in the vertical and horizontal directions. It is provided.

The mounting portion 602 has a vertical portion 602a that is long in the vertical direction and a horizontal portion 602b that is long in the horizontal direction, and a pair (double) for the stopper 601 is attached to the vertical and horizontal portions 602a and 602b of the mounting portion 602. A large number of mounting holes 603 are provided, and by mounting the stopper 601 using any of the mounting holes 603, the mounting position of the stopper 601 can be arbitrarily changed in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Is.

As shown in FIG. 103, the stopper (stop portion) 601 includes a base portion 604, a pressing portion 605 integrally formed at one end of the base portion 604, and the other end side of the pressing portion 605 as the other end side of the base portion 604. The harness 600 is provided between the base portion 604 and the pressing portion 605, and the other end of the pressing portion 605 is engaged with the other end of the base portion 604. It is locked by the stopping means 606. The locking means 606 has a locking portion 607 on the base portion 604 side and a locked portion 608 on the pressing portion 605 side, and the locking portion 607 and the locked portion 608 are engaged and disengaged. There is.

The base 604 is approximately as thick as the recessing depth of the mounting 602, is provided with two (plural) mounting protrusions 609 that can be inserted into the mounting holes 603, and the mounting protrusions 609 are attached to the mounting holes 603. It is designed so that the stopper 601 can be detachably attached by inserting it. The stopper (stop portion) 601 may be provided integrally with the harness cradle 399.

One end of the harness 600 is connected to the effect control board 345. Further, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the other end of the harness 600 is guided from the side surface of the storage case 482 to the inside of the mounting frame 391 via the side surface of the mounting frame 391, and inside the mounting frame 391. It is connected to the movable effect means 394 to 397. The middle of the harness 600 is pressed by the pressing member 638 along the side surface of the peripheral wall portion 447 of the mounting frame 391. The pressing member 638 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing tool 637 such as a screw.

By providing a large number of mounting holes 603 in the mounting portion 602 of the storage case 482 in this way, it is possible to arrange the fasteners 601 at necessary locations according to the wiring position, wiring direction, etc. of the harness 600. It is possible to change the wiring of the harness 600 and to take any other measures. Further, the mounting portion 572 of the storage case 482 has a concave shape, and by arranging the stopper 601 in the mounting portion 572, the amount of protrusion of the stopper 601 to the rear of the base portion 604 can be reduced. As a result, the harness 600 can be arranged along the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 98 and 106, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the opening 455 and receives the image display means 393 from the front side, and the upper and lower sides of the receiving portion 460. 610 is provided with guide ridges 610 that guide the upper and lower sides of the image display means 393 in the horizontal insertion / removal direction, and the other end side opposite to the side board mounting base 467 arranged on the left and right one end sides is inserted / removed. It is part 462. The upper guide ridge 610 is formed in a rib shape, and the lower guide ridge 610 is formed in a U-shaped cross section. However, the guide ridge 610 may have substantially the same structure in both the upper and lower sides.

A pair of upper and lower guide rails 611 for guiding the image display means 393 in the left-right direction are configured on both the upper and lower sides of the opening 455 by the receiving portion 460 and the guide ridge 610. The guide rail 611 is composed of a receiving portion 460 and has a front rail portion 613 that guides the sliding portion including the tip sliding portion 612 of the accommodating case 482, and the accommodating case 482 that protrudes from the outside to the back side of the front rail portion 613. It has an outer rail portion 614 that guides both upper and lower sides from the outside. The tip sliding portion 612 is provided at both upper and lower ends of the storage case 482 on the insertion end side, and protrudes from the peripheral wall portion 484 of the storage case 482 toward the tip side.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the insertion / removal portion 462 is arranged on the back side of the other end of the display means mounting portion 453. On the other end side of the display means mounting portion 453, the insertion / removal portion 462 tilts the image display means 393 obliquely from the rear side with respect to the guide rail 611, and in that state, the tip sliding portion 612 is tilted at the guide rail 611. It suffices if it can be brought into contact with the front rail portion 613 of. Therefore, the insertion / removal portion 462 is provided in a predetermined range on the other end side of the display means mounting portion 453.

The front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611 is provided with an insertion portion 615, which is cut out and missing, corresponding to the front side of the side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353, and provides an image display means 393. When the insertion / removal portion 462 is inclined in an oblique direction with respect to the guide rail 611, the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615 and intersects the front rail portion 613. It is configured as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 96 and 104, the upper guide rail 611 comes into contact with the tip sliding portion 612 when the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615. A fulcrum portion 617 is provided as a fulcrum when the rear end side of the image display means 393 is rotated to the front rail portion 613 in a state where the tip sliding portion 612 is in contact with the regulating portion 616 and regulated. ing.

The tip sliding portion 612 and the regulating portion 616 are relative so that the tip sliding portion 612 rises when the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 so that the rear end side approaches the front rail portion 613. It has a guide unit 618 and a guide unit 619 for guiding the user.

The edge of the side board mounting base 467 on the insertion / removal portion 462 side is the insertion end of the image display means 393 when the image display means 393 in the inclined posture is moved to the mounting position side along the guide rail 611. The contact portion 620 is in contact with the side or the vicinity of the insertion end side.

The lower guide rail 611 has a fulcrum portion 617, but a regulation portion 616 is not provided. However, the lower guide rail 611 may be configured in the same manner as the upper guide rail 611. Therefore, the regulation unit 616 may be located on at least one of the upper and lower guide rails 611.

The mounting portion 572 of the accommodating case 482 protrudes from the tip sliding portion 612, but the tip sliding portion 612 corresponds to the front rail portion 613, whereas the mounting portion 572 corresponds to the opening 455. Therefore, even when the tip sliding portion 612 comes into contact with the regulating portion 616, the mounting portion 572 does not interfere with other members or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 90, 92, 96, and 105, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided with pushing means (movement assisting means) 623 on both the upper and lower sides corresponding to the rear end side of the image display means 393. ing. The pushing means 623 rotates the rear end side of the image display means 393 toward the front rail portion 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A around the fulcrum portion 617 of FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 is along the front rail portion 613. When the image display means 393 is pushed, the rear end of the image display means 393 is pushed into a predetermined mounting position along the front rail portion 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A (to assist the movement of the image display means 393 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A). The pressed portion 624 provided at the rear end of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 and the pressed portion 624 formed in an inclined shape on the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 come into contact with each other. It has a pressing guide portion 625 that presses and guides the accommodating case 482 to the mounting position.

The pushing means 623 is provided on both the upper and lower sides of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the front rail portion 613, and presses both the upper and lower ends of the storage case 482. The rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 is provided with a reinforcing portion 626 that bends in a U-shaped cross section corresponding to the pressing guide portion 625. The reinforcing portion 626 may be provided over the entire length in the vertical direction along the opening edge of the opening 455.

The pressed portion 624 is provided in a square shape on the accommodation case 482 side, and the pressing guide portion 625 is fixed to the rear wall portion 446 side of the mounting frame 391 in an inclined manner, but it may be configured in reverse. It is also possible to configure both the pressed portion 624 and the pressing guide portion 625 in an inclined shape or a curved shape.

Further, the pushing means 623 is an end portion opposite to the moving direction of the image display means 393 to the mounting position of the display means mounting portion 453, that is, an end portion opposite to the side substrate mounting base 467 with respect to the opening 455. In addition to the upper and lower sides, one or more may be arranged in the vertical direction, such as being provided in the middle portion or the central portion in the vertical direction. Further, the pressing guide portion 625 can also be configured by a rotating body or the like that rotates around the vertical axis.

As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the front rail portion 613 is provided with a riding portion 627 on the pushing means 623 side of the insertion portion 615. The storage case 482 of the image display means 393 is provided with a storage recess 628 into which the riding portion 627 is inserted when the image display means 393 is in a predetermined mounting position.

The ride-up portion 627 has a front surface of the accommodating case 482 when the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 in the direction indicated by 617A in FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 is along the front rail portion 613. The tip sliding portion 612 side of the accommodating case 482 is lifted in the direction indicated by the arrow 627A in FIG. 104 around the riding portion 627 to be removed from the regulating portion 616.

The accommodating recess 628 is formed in a concave shape on the front surfaces of the accommodating case 482 on both the upper and lower ends, and the riding portion 627 is inserted when the image display means 393 is located at a predetermined mounting position. The riding portion 627 is formed with an inclined pressing guide portion 625 side so that the tip sliding portion 612 of the housing case 482 can be easily slid. The lower guide rail 611 is provided with a notch 639 in the front rail 613, but the notch 639 may not be provided.

When mounting the image display means 393 on the display means mounting portion 453, for example, the game board 313 is tilted so that the front surface of the game board 313 is on the lower side and the mounting frame 391 is on the upper side, and in that state, FIG. 107 (a). )-(C).

First, on the insertion / removal portion 462 side, the image display means 393 is arranged in an inclined state in which the image display means 393 is inclined in an oblique direction with respect to the front rail portion 613 of the pair of guide rails 611 as shown in FIG. 107 (a), and the tip side thereof. The tip sliding portion 612 of the above is brought into contact with the guide rail 611. Next, the tip sliding portion 612 is slid along the front rail portion 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A, and moved to the lower mounting position of the side board mounting base 467 as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Let me.

At this time, if the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620 of the side substrate mounting base 467, the image display means 393 is tilted around the tip sliding portion 612 along the guide rail 611 as necessary to obtain an image. The tip end side of the display means 393 is inserted into the lower side of the side board mounting base 467.

While the image display means 393 is moving to the mounting position in an inclined state, the tip sliding portion 612 enters the lower side of the side substrate mounting base 467 and corresponds to the insertion portion 615. As shown, the tip end side of the image display means 393 including the tip sliding portion 612 enters the insertion portion 615, and the tip of the tip sliding portion 612 comes into contact with the regulating portion 616.

Therefore, although there is a side board mounting base 467 on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453 so as to be close to the back side of the image display means 393 in the mounted state, the tip side of the image display means 393 is mounted on the side board. It can be largely inserted under the base 467.

When the image display means 393 has a large inclination angle, the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620 when it approaches the side substrate mounting base 467. Therefore, when the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620, the image display means 393 is tilted so that the anti-insertion end side of the image display means 393 approaches the guide rail 611. As a result, the image display means 393 can be inserted into the insertion portion 615 at a predetermined angle.

Next, when the anti-insertion end side of the image display means 393 is pressed toward the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A along the front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611. Put it in a state. At this time, the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 is guided by the regulation portion 616 as it rotates around the fulcrum portion 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, and is deviated from the regulation portion 616.

Then, when the anti-insertion end side of the image display means 393 approaches the front rail portion 613, the pressed portion 624 on the anti-insertion end side of the image display means 393 is on the mounting frame 391 side, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 105. It abuts on the pressing guide portion 625 and guides the pressed portion 624 in the pushing direction along the inclination of the pressing guide portion 625 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A. As a result, the image display means 393 can be pushed along the guide rail 611 to a predetermined mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A in FIG.

Therefore, the image display means 393 is placed in an inclined manner between the upper and lower guide rails 611, and the rear end side of the image display means 393 is on the guide rail 611 while sliding the tip sliding portion 612 along the guide rail 611. By tilting the image display means 393 between the guide rails 611 so as to be mounted on the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 can be easily and surely guided to a predetermined mounting position along the guide rail 611.

When the image display means 393 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, the storage case of the image display means 393 before the pushing means 623 pushes the image display means 393 on the guide rail 611 into the mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A. The front surface of 482 abuts on the riding portion 627. Therefore, the tip side of the image display means 393 is slightly lifted, and in that state, the image display means 393 slides to the mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A.

Further, the mounting portion 589 and the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 have guide portions 598 and 599, and the mounting portion 589 is guided to the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 via the guide portions 598 and 599. .. Therefore, although the mounting portion 589 is projected on the tip end side of the image display means 393, the mounting portion 589 can be easily inserted into the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595.

When the image display means 393 moves to a predetermined mounting position, the riding portion 627 corresponds to the storage recess 628, so that the front surface of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 comes into contact with the receiving portion 460 including the front rail portion 613. After that, if the image display means 393 is fixed to the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 by a plurality of fixing means 584,585 on the left and right sides, the image display means 393 can be attached as shown in FIG. 98.

When the image display means 393 is removed from the display means mounting portion 453, the procedure is reversed. First, after releasing the fixing of the image display means 393 by the fixing means 584, 585, the effect control board case 495 mounted on the back side of the image display means 393 and other appropriate places are hung with fingers to detach the image display means 393. Move in the direction. Then, the pressed portion 624 of the image display means 393 slides along the inclined surface of the pressing guide portion 625, and the rear end side of the image display means 393 rises from the front rail portion 613. Therefore, the rear end side of the image display means 393 Can be grasped with fingers. Therefore, the image display means 393 can be easily taken out from the display means mounting portion 453.

When mounting the image display means 393, the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 is slid in a state of being in contact with the front rail portion 613, and the tip side thereof is a side substrate for the LED connection board 353. It can also be inserted under the mounting base 467. Therefore, in that case, the insertion portion 615, the regulation portion 616, the fulcrum portion 617, and the like of the guide rail 611 can be omitted.

The side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353 is arranged in the vertical direction with a gap between the side board mounting base 467 and the front rail portion 613 of the display means mounting portion 453 so that the image display means 393 can be accommodated. As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, the upper support base 629 and the lower support base 630 arranged on both sides of the opening 455 of the display means mounting portion 453 are detachably fixed from the back side.

The upper support base 629 bends toward the opening 455 side from a plurality of bases 631, 632 protruding rearward from the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 on the upper side of the opening 455 and from the rear end of the base 631, 632. It has a mounting portion 633. Of the plurality of bases 631, 632, one of the bases 631 is arranged in the left-right direction on the upper side of the opening 455, and the other base 632 is arranged in the up-down direction at the end of the opening 455. An opening 634 is formed in. A regulation portion 616 is formed corresponding to the opening 634, and a tip sliding portion 612 on the upper side of the storage case 482 projects.

The lower support base 630 has a plurality of base portions 635 that project rearward from the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 on the lower side of the opening 455, and a mounting portion that bends upward from the rear end of the base portion 635 toward the opening 455 side. It has 636 and is configured in an L shape. The side board mounting base 467 is detachably mounted on the mounting portions 633 and 636 of the upper and lower support bases 629 and 630 from the back side by fixing tools 640 and 641 such as screws. The LED connection board 353 is detachably mounted on the back side of the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment.

When the side board mounting base 467 is provided corresponding to the opening 455 for the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391 in this way, it can be integrally provided with the mounting frame 391. However, support bases 629 and 630 provided with base portions 631,632 and mounting portions 633 and 636 that bend from the rear end to the opening 455 side are provided vertically, and the side substrate mounting bases are provided on the support bases 629 and 630. By mounting the 467, the support bases 629 and 630 and the side board mounting base 467 can be rigidly configured, so that the durability of the mounting frame 391 including the display means mounting portion 453 can be improved.

Although the LED connection board 353 is attached to the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment, a relay board other than the LED connection board 353 or another board may be used. Further, the side board mounting base 467 may be integrally provided on the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the image display means 393 is first tilted obliquely with respect to the guide rail 611 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, and then the tip sliding portion 612 is left and right along the guide rail 611 in that state. While sliding in the direction, the rear end side of the image display means 393 is tilted toward the guide rail 611 with the tip sliding portion 612 as a fulcrum, and the image display means 393 is slid in the left-right direction to be attached. However, it may be attached by sliding it in the vertical direction. The other configurations are the same as those in the third embodiment.

Although the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the third and fourth embodiments, and various modifications are made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible.

Further, in the case of a game machine provided with a game board 313 detachably mounted on the support frames 301 and 302 and an image display means 393 mounted on the display means mounting portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313, an image display is performed. The means 393 may be removable from the display means mounting portion 453 from one of the insertion / removal portions 462 side in the vertical direction (for example, the upper insertion / removal portion 462 side shown in the third embodiment). It may be removable from one side in the left-right direction (for example, left or right which is one side in the left-right direction shown in the fourth embodiment). In that case, in the former, the frame-side member on the support frame 302 side arranged on the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the image display means 393 is a ball tank 347, a ball guide rail 348, an external information extraction means 349, etc. A ball payout means 350 or the like can be considered. Of course, other frame-side members may be used.

In the case of a game machine in which the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313 is provided with the display means mounting portion 453 and the display means mounting portion 453 is detachably provided with the image display means 393, in the third embodiment, the display means is mounted. A bulging portion that bulges rearward from the mounting frame 391 to guide the image displaying means 393 in the attachment / detachment direction in both the direction intersecting the attachment / detachment direction (vertical direction or left / right direction) of the image display means 393 with respect to the portion 453. A 454 is provided and the game parts in the mounting frame 391 are arranged in the bulging portion 454, and the bulging portion 454 intersects the attachment / detachment direction (vertical direction or horizontal direction) of the image display means 393. It may be provided on one side.

Further, as an internal mechanism in the mounting frame 391, there are movable effect means 394 to 397 in the mounting frame 391 on the front side of the image display means 393, and a part of the mechanical portion of the movable effect means 394 to 397 is bulged. It is conceivable to arrange it in 454, but other ones may be used. The bulging portion 454 may be the entire length or longer of the guide rail 611, or may be a part thereof. The movable effect means 394 to 397 include a movable effect body 546, 562, 574 arranged in front of the image display means 393, a support mechanism for movably supporting the movable effect body 546, 562, 574, and a movable effect body. It may be any one provided with the driving means 547,564,575 for driving 546,562,574, and may be other than those illustrated in the third embodiment. In that case, at least a part of the support mechanism and / or the driving means 547,564,575 may be arranged in the bulging portion 454.

The erroneous mounting prevention means 516 for preventing erroneous mounting of the image display means 393 on the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the first member 499 provided on the image display means 393 side and erroneously mounted on the display means mounting portion 453 side. It suffices to include a second member 467 that sometimes interferes with the first member 499, and as illustrated in the third embodiment, an engaging portion (fixing) for fixing the effect control board case 495. In addition to the combination of the tool) and the side board mounting base 467, various things can be used. Further, the erroneous mounting preventing means 516 may be dedicated to it, or may also serve as some kind of constituent member.

When the image display means 393 is detachably attached to the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, a pressing member that presses the image display means 393 from the back side on the insertion end side of the image display means 393. However, in addition to the dedicated member, the pressing member may also serve as another fixing member fixed to the mounting frame 391. In that case, the mounting frame 391 may be provided with a projecting member that projects to the back side of the image display means 393, and the projecting member may also be used as the back side pressing member. In the embodiment, the side board mounting base 467 is illustrated as the protruding member, and the board is arranged on the back side of the side board mounting base 467, but other than the side board mounting base 467 may be used.

When the image display means 393 and the movable effect means 394 are used in combination, at least a part of the movable effect means 394 may be in front of the image display means 393. Further, the center case 388 mounted from the front side substantially in the center of the game board 313 is arranged on the front side of the game board 313 and forms a game area 323 on which the game ball flows down on the outer peripheral side, and a front side member 426 and the front side member 426. It may be integrally provided with the rear member 427 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 on the rear side, or may be provided separately.

By arranging at least a part of the movable effect means 394 on the front side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the arrangement area of the movable effect means 394 can be expanded. In that case, the movable effect means 394 has a rear side portion arranged on the rear side of the rear side member 427 of the center case 388, and a front side overlapping the rear side portion from the rear side portion through the inside of the rear side member 427 of the center case 388. It is desirable to have a structure including a part.

The LED substrate may not be provided on the front side of the movable effect means 394, and the LED substrate may be provided on the rear side of the movable effect means 394. Since the rear side portion → the rear side member 427 → the front side portion are arranged from the rear side to the front side, the light emission effect from the LED substrate provided on the rear side portion should be reflected on the rear side member 427 and the front side portion. Is possible. Further, an LED substrate may be provided on the front side as well. In that case, it is desirable not to provide an LED substrate on the rear side. When the LED substrates are provided on both sides, it is desirable that at least a part of the LED substrates is arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

When at least a part of the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear side member 427 of the center case 388, it is provided on at least one of the rear side portion, the rear side member 427, and the front side portion. A predetermined light emitting effect may be executed by the light emitting means. Further, when the LED substrate is mounted on a part of the center case 388, a predetermined light emitting effect may be executed by the light emitting means provided on the LED substrate. Further, not limited to the center case 388, a predetermined light emitting effect may be executed by the light emitting means of the LED substrate provided on the game board 313 side or the frame side.

When at least a part of the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the front side portion movable effect that moves the front side portion may be executed. Further, the posterior movable effect of moving the posterior portion may be executed, or both may be executed.

It is desirable that the rear side portion of the center case 388 is molded of at least a part of a transparent or translucent resin member. Thereby, the rear member 427 arranged at the rear can be visually recognized from the front side.

It is desirable that at least a part of the front side portion of the movable effect means 394 is molded by a transparent or translucent resin member. This makes it possible to see the rear member 427 and the posterior portion arranged at the rear from the front side.

When the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the movable effect body 546 may be configured to overlap during the movable effect, or the movable effect body 546 may be overlapped. It may be configured to overlap at the time of non-movable production (origin position). Here, the time of the movable effect assumes both the case where the movable effect body 546 is located at a predetermined effect position and the case where the movable effect body 546 is moving toward the predetermined effect position. .. Further, the entire front side portion of the movable effect body 546 may be configured to overlap with the rear side member 427, or at least a part thereof may be configured to overlap with each other.

A part of the center case 388 on which the front side portions of the movable effect body 546 overlap may be a wall portion forming the rear part of the stage 429, or may be a ball bounce prevention portion located at the rear upper part of the stage 429.

A predetermined decorative portion may be provided on the rear member 427 of the center case 388. For example, character information, number information, and the like may be displayed. Further, by displaying at least a part of the decorative portion at a position that does not overlap with the front side portion of the movable effect body 546, the decorativeness of the rear member 427 can be enhanced without deteriorating the visibility of the decorative portion.

Even if a predetermined effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal so as to correspond to the movable effect body 546 in a state where the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear member 427 of the center case 388. Good. Here, the effect image may be, for example, a predetermined effect display corresponding to the reliability (eg, blue, green, red, gold) indicating the winning expectation of the variable display. Further, it is desirable that the display mode of the effect display is displayed according to the movable effect body 546, and the display mode may be determined according to, for example, the shape and size of the front side portion, the driving mode, and the like.

Although the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear side member 427 of the center case 388, it is desirable to provide a predetermined distance between the rear side member 427 and the front side portion. It is also desirable to provide a predetermined distance between the rear side portion and the rear side member 427. This makes it possible to prevent interference between the movable effect body 546 and the center case 388. Further, the shorter the predetermined interval, the more a sense of unity between a part of the movable effect body 546 and the center case 388 is created, so that the decorativeness can be further enhanced.

In addition, it was decided to provide a predetermined interval to prevent interference, but not limited to this, in order to give a sense of unity between the movable effect body 546 and the center case 388, they should be arranged in a state of interfering with each other. You may.

The front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear side member 427 of the center case 388, but the present invention is not limited to this, as long as it is a part of the game parts mounted from the front side of the game board 313. Any of them may be used, and the case is not particularly limited to the center case 388.

When the movable effect body 546 is located at the origin position and the front side portion is configured to be located on the front side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the movable effect body 313 is assembled at the time of assembling the movable effect body. Since the 546 is mounted from the rear side of the game board 313 and the center case 388 is mounted from the front side of the game board 313, there is a problem that assembly becomes difficult. For example, when the center case 388 is attached after the movable effect body 546 is attached to the game board 313, the rear member 427 of the center case 388 is assembled so as not to come into contact with the front side portion of the movable effect body 546. I have to do. In this way, the assembly work may become complicated.

Therefore, by configuring the movable effect body 546 to be arranged at different positions during assembly, it is possible to prevent the two from interfering with each other and to easily perform the assembly work. Then, in the initialization operation of the movable effect body 546 performed after the assembly is performed when the power is turned on, the movable effect body 546 is moved to the origin position of the main body, so that the front side portion is moved to the front side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388. It may be configured to be located.

Generally, the center case 388 is removable from the front side of the game board 313, whereas the movable effect means 394 is removable from the back side of the game board 313, so that the front side portion of the movable effect means 394 is detachable. Needs to be movable relative to the rear member 427 so that it disengages inward from the rear member 427. In that case, as long as the front side portion can move relative to the rear side member 427, any motion form such as rocking motion or linear motion may be adopted, and the front side member 426 and the posterior side may be adopted. Either one of the members 427 may move with respect to the other, or both may move. Further, the front side portion of the movable effect means 394 may be one side or both sides in the left-right direction of the image display means 393, or may be one side or both sides in the vertical direction. The shape and structure of the front side portions of the movable effect means 394 to 397 do not matter.

When the image display means 393 is inserted / removed from the insertion / removal portion 462 side with respect to a predetermined mounting position of the display means mounting portion 453, one end side of the guide rail 611 is used as the insertion / removal portion 462, and the guide rail is provided from the insertion / removal portion 462. The image display means 393 may be moved in the insertion / removal direction along 611. However, in this case, it is necessary to configure the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the display means mounting portion 453 in an open shape, and the moving distance of the image display means 393 at the time of insertion / removal becomes long.

In comparison with this, the image display means 393 is tilted diagonally with respect to the guide rail 611, and the tip end side thereof is brought into contact with the guide rail 611, and then the image display means 393 is moved from the tilted posture to the guide rail 611 side. When the image display means 393 is moved to a predetermined mounting position along the guide rail 611 while tilting, it is not necessary to open the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the guide rail 611, and the image display means 393 The travel distance can also be shortened. The image display means 393 is inserted and removed along the guide rail 611, and the insertion / removal direction may be the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, or the diagonal direction when viewed from the rear.

When the image display means 393 is inserted and removed in an inclined posture with respect to the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 is moved to the guide rail 611 side after the insertion side of the image display means 393 in the inclined posture is held by the holding portion. Although it is desirable to tilt the holding portion, the holding portion may be brought into contact with the back side of the image display means 393 in an inclined posture, or the tip side thereof may come into contact with the image display means 393 when it reaches a predetermined mounting position. .. Further, when the tip end side of the image display means 393 is inserted into the insertion portion 615 of the guide rail 611, the regulation portion 616 that the tip end side of the image display means 393 comes into contact with is also one of the holding portions. When the image display means 393 reaches a predetermined mounting position, its tip side comes into contact with the holding portion, the insertion portion 615 of the guide rail 611 is unnecessary.

The display means mounting unit 453 guides the image display means 393 to the mounting position and guides the image display means 393 to the guide rail 611 when the image display means 393 is moved from the inclined posture to the guide rail 611 side. If the pushing means 623 for pushing the image display means 623 along the guide rail 611 is provided, the image display means 393 can be easily and surely moved to the mounting position along the guide rail 611. It is desirable that the pushing means 623 is provided on the rear end side of the image display means 393 on the side opposite to the moving direction of the image displaying means 393 to the mounting position, but it may be provided in the middle of the moving direction of the image displaying means 393. It is possible.

Further, when the pushing means 623 moves the image displaying means 393 from the tilted posture to the guide rail 611 side, the pushing means 623 presses the pressed portion 624 on the image displaying means 393 side by the tilted pressing guide portion 625 to display an image. It is desirable to configure the means 393 so as to guide it to the mounting position, but the pressed portion 624 on the image display means 393 side is configured to be inclined, and the pressing guide portion 625 has a rod shape that abuts on the pressed portion 624. , Spherical, and other shapes are also possible. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, but can be similarly implemented in other game machines such as arrange ball machines and sparrow ball game machines.

FIGS. 61 to 177 exemplify a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 62, the pachinko machine 300 includes an outer frame 301 and a front frame 32 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 301. The game machine main body is composed of the outer frame 301 and the front frame 302.

The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via a pair of upper and lower first hinges 303 arranged on the left end side, and is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 on the right end side opposite to the first hinge 303 in the left-right direction. The locking means 304 provided can lock the outer frame 301 in a closed state.

The front frame 302 includes a main body frame 305 and a front door 306 arranged on the front side of the main body frame 305. The front door 306 is pivotally attached to the main body frame 305 via a pair of upper and lower second hinges 307 arranged on the left end side, and is closed to the main body frame 305 by the locking means 304. It can be locked. The first hinge 303 and the second hinge 307 are arranged so as to have the same axial center.

As shown in FIG. 62, the outer frame 301 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 308 and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 309. A front decorative member 310 made of synthetic resin that covers the horizontal frame member 309 from the front side is attached to the lower horizontal frame member 309 so as to connect the lower front side of the left and right vertical frame members 308. The front decorative member 310 projects forward from the left and right vertical frame members 308, and the main body frame 305 is arranged above the front decorative member 310.

The main body frame 305 is made of synthetic resin, has a rectangular shape that can abut on the front edge side of the outer frame 301 on the upper side of the front decorative member 310, and is mounted on a game board provided in a rectangular opening shape on the upper side. A portion 311 and a lower mounting portion 312 provided under the game board mounting portion 311 are integrally provided.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the game board mounting portion 311 has a game board 313 that can be attached and detached from the front side, and the game board mounting portion 311 has a contact portion 314 that the game board 313 abuts from the front side. , The engaging portion 315 that engages with the game board 313 when the left and right end sides of the game board 313 are inserted into the game board mounting section 311 and the other end side of the game board 313 in the game board mounting section 311 are the main body frames. A fixing means 316 for detachably fixing to the 305 is provided. The game board mounting unit 311 may have the game board 313 detachable from the back side.

When the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 65, the one end side of the game board 313 is brought into contact with the game board mounting portion 311 from the front side of the game board mounting portion 311. It is inserted between the portion 314 and the engaging portion 315. Next, when the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305, the game board 313 moves backward with the engaging portion 315 side or the intermediate side between the contact portion 314 and the engaging portion 315 as the rotation center O. Since it rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A in FIG. 65, the game board 313 is played against the sliding resistance between the game board 313 and the game board mounting portion 311 as shown by the solid line in FIG. It can be pushed into the board mounting portion 311.

Then, when the game board 313 enters the game board mounting portion 311, the other end side of the game board 313 is tightened and fixed to the game board mounting portion 311 by a pair of upper and lower fixing means 316. As a result, the game board 313 can be easily attached. When removing the game board 313, a finger may be placed on an appropriate portion of the game board 313, and the game board 313 may be rotated in the reverse order around the rotation center O in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, the main body frame 305 is integrally or separately provided with a surrounding wall 317 projecting rearward from the outer circumference of the game board mounting portion 311. The surrounding wall 317 surrounds and protects the back side mechanism of the game board 313 mounted on the game board mounting portion 311 from the outer peripheral side, and includes an upper wall portion 318 protruding rearward from the upper side of the game board mounting portion 311. It includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 319 that project rearward from both the left and right sides of the game board mounting portion 311 and a bottom wall portion 320 that projects rearward from the lower side of the game board mounting portion 311.

The upper wall portion 318 and the bottom wall portion 320 are arranged vertically on both the upper and lower sides of the game board mounting portion 311, and the side wall portions 319 are arranged vertically on both the left and right sides on the rear side of the game board mounting portion 311. The bottom wall portion 320 is provided with a discharge port 321 for discharging the game ball that has passed through the back side of the game board 313 downward.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the front door 306 includes a door base 322 made of synthetic resin formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the main body frame 305. In the door base 322, a window hole 324 is formed corresponding to the front side of the game area 323 formed in the game board 313, and a plurality of speakers 325 are provided at predetermined positions such as up, down, left and right around the window hole 324. A decorative cover 326 that is arranged and substantially covers each speaker 325 from the front side is attached.

Further, on the lower front side of the door base 322, as shown in FIG. 61, the upper plate (launching ball storage portion) 328 that stores the game balls and supplies them to the launching means 327 and the game balls of the upper plate 328 are in a full state. At this time, a lower plate (surplus ball receiving portion) 329 for storing the surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate 328 side, a firing handle 330 and the like operated to operate the launching means 327, and the like are arranged, and further, the upper plate. A lower decorative cover 331 that substantially covers the lower plate 329, the lower plate 329, etc. from the front side is attached.

The lower decorative cover 331 is formed in a forward-facing bulge shape, and operating means such as an effect button 332 and a cross operating means 333 that can be pressed and operated by the player are provided on the upper side thereof. The cross operation means 333 includes four operation units 334: a rear upper key, a front lower key, a left left key, and a right right key.

As shown in FIG. 62, a glass unit 340 is detachably mounted on the back side of the door base 322 so as to substantially close the window hole 324 from the rear side, and on the first and second hinges 303 and 307 sides. Reinforcing sheet metal 335 arranged vertically along the edge, reinforcing sheet metal 336 arranged vertically along the edge on the opening / closing end side, and reinforcement arranged horizontally below the window hole 324. The sheet metal 337 is detachably fixed by screwing or the like.

Ball feeding means 338, ball guiding means 339, and the like are mounted on the back side of the reinforcing sheet metal 337. The ball feeding means 338 is for supplying the game balls in the upper plate 328 one by one to the launching means 327, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 327. The ball guiding means 339 guides the surplus ball that overflows from the upper plate 328 when the game ball of the upper plate 328 is full and the foul ball that has returned without reaching the game area 323 to the lower plate 329. The first and second hinges 303 and 307 are arranged adjacent to the ball feeding means 338.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 69, the game board 313 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting portion 311 on the main body frame 305, and the effect control board 345 and the power supply module board 346 are attached to the back side of the game board 313. The main control board 354 is arranged. Further, on the back side of the main body frame 305, a ball tank 347, a ball guide rail 348, and an external information extraction means 349 are arranged on the upper end side, and a ball payout means 350 and a ball guide means 351 are arranged on one side in the left-right direction. The relay board 352 is arranged in the vertical direction, and the LED connection board 353 is arranged in the vertical direction on the other side portion in the left-right direction. Further, on the back side of the main body frame 305, a payout board 355 and a ball rental board 356 are arranged on the left and right under the main control board 354.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the ball tank 347, the ball guide rail 348, and the external information extraction means 349 are arranged in the left-right direction along the upper side of the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317. The ball tank 347 is for storing game balls for prize balls and rental balls, is formed in a rectangular shape in a long plan view in the left-right direction, and abuts on the step portion 318a of the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317. It is detachably fixed. The ball tank 347 has an open upper side so as to receive a game ball replenished from the replenishment means 357 on the island side.

The ball guide rail 348 is for guiding the game ball from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350, and is inclined in the left-right direction from the lower side of the ball tank 347 to the upper side of the ball payout means 350. It is arranged and detachably attached to the back side of the main body frame 305. A ball breaking mechanism 358 is provided in the middle of the ball guide rail 348 as needed. The external information extraction means 349 is for extracting various game information to the outside, includes a plurality of extraction terminals 359 arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and is arranged above the ball guide rail 348.

Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portions 319 on the first and second hinges 303 and 307 sides are bent inward from the rear end in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. 63 to 68. The mounting base 360 is integrally provided, and the ball payout means 350 and the ball guiding means 351 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the back side of the mounting base 360, and are detachably mounted.

The ball payout means 350 is for paying out the game balls in the ball tank 347 based on the prize ball payout command from the payout board 355 and the ball lending command from the ball lending board 356. As shown in FIG. 64, the ball payout means 350 includes a payout case 362 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape flat in the front-rear direction, a storage passage 363 provided in a zigzag shape in the payout case 362, and a storage passage 363. A rotating body 364 for paying out the game ball and a drive motor (not shown) for driving the rotating body 364 are provided, and are detachably mounted on the back side of the rear mounting base 360. The game ball paid out from the ball payout means 350 is guided to the upper plate 328 via the ball guide means 351.

As shown in FIG. 64, the ball guiding means 351 has a payout passage 366 and a extraction passage 367. Then, when the ball payout means 350 pays out the game ball, the game ball from the ball payout means 350 is guided to the upper plate 328 via the payout passage 366, and from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350. When the game ball is pulled out, it is possible to pull out the game ball from the pull-out passage 367 through a pull-out port (not shown) to the outside of the machine. A relay board 352 is provided on the back side of the ball guiding means 351.

Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portion 319 located on the side opposite to the rotation center O when the game board 313 is attached / detached is provided with the side wall portion 319 as shown in FIGS. A sheet metal side wall reinforcing member 368 that is reinforced from the outside is provided, and a frame side joint portion 369 is provided from the side wall portion 319 along the bottom wall portion 320 in an L-shape in front view. The side wall reinforcing member 368 has a function of protecting the side wall portion 319 and the back side mechanism of the game board 313 from being damaged by contact with other members or the like when the front frame 302 is opened or closed.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, the frame-side joint portion 369 is arranged in front of and behind the board-side joint portion 370 on the back side of the game board 313, and is attached to and detached from the game board mounting portion 311 of the game board 313. It is electrically detachably connected to the panel side joint portion 370.

As shown in FIG. 62, a launching means 327, a lower speaker 325a, and the like are arranged on the front side of the lower mounting portion 312. Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, a first board mounting base 371 is mounted on the back side of the lower mounting portion 312 so as to cover the back side mechanism of the lower mounting portion 312 from the back side. On the back side of the mounting base 371, the payout board 355 housed in the payout board case 372 and the ball rental board 356 housed in the ball rental board case 373 are arranged on the left and right.

As shown in FIG. 69, the launching means 327 includes a support plate 374 made of sheet metal, a launch rail 375 mounted on the front surface of the support plate 374, and a game ball mounted on the front surface of the support plate 374 and for launching. A ball holding portion 376 held on the launch rail 375, a striking mallet 378 swingably supported around the drive shaft 377 in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the support plate 374, and a striking mallet mounted on the back side of the support plate 374. It is provided with a firing drive means 379 such as a rotary solenoid that drives 378 in the striking direction via a drive shaft 377, and when the firing handle 330 is rotated, the firing driving means 379 uses a striking mallet 378 according to the amount of operation. Is driven in the striking direction (clockwise) to launch the game ball on the launch rail 375 toward the game board 313.

The payout board 355 is for controlling the ball payout means 350 according to the payout command. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the payout board case 372 accommodating the payout board 355 is attached to and detached from the first board mounting base 371 by the engaging means 380 on the left and right one end side and the fastener 381 on the other end side. It is fixed as possible. The fastener 381 has a knob portion 382 that can be rotated around the front-rear axis on the first board mounting base 371, and the knob portion 382 tightens the payout board case 372 toward the first board mounting base 371. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the ball lending board 356 is for controlling the ball payout means 350 in accordance with a ball lending command from a ball lending button or the like. The ball lending board case 373 accommodating the ball lending board 356 is rotatably pivotally attached around the vertical axis by the pivot means 383 on the left and right one end side, and the first board mounting base 371 by the locking means 384 on the other end side. It is detachably fixed to. The locking means 384 has a lock button 385 that can be operated in the front-rear direction, and when the lock button 385 is pressed forward, the ball lending board case 373 is locked to the first board mounting base 371, and the lock button 385 is moved to the rear side. It is designed to unlock when pulled.

The game board 313 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape by a non-transmissive material such as plywood or a transparent material such as synthetic resin. On the front side of the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 70, a game area 323 and a guide rail 387 that guides the game ball launched from the launching means 327 to the upper side of the game area 323 are arranged substantially in the center. A central display frame (center case) 388, which is detachably attached to the game board 313 from the front side, is provided. A front decorative member 389 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the game area 323 on the front surface of the game board 313.

Further, on the back side of the game board 313, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68 and 71 to 75, a mounting frame 391 and a second board mounting base arranged so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391 are arranged. 392 and are attached. The mounting frame 391 includes the liquid crystal type image display means 393 arranged on the back side of the game board 313 corresponding to the central display frame 388, and the first to first ones arranged between the central display frame 388 and the image display means 393. The fourth movable effect means 394 to 397, the LED connection board 353 to which the LED for light emission effect on the front side of the front frame 302 is connected, and the harness cradle 399 for receiving the harness arranged on the back side are mounted. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the effect control board 345 and the power supply module board 346 are mounted on the back side of the image display means 393. As shown in FIG. 72, on the back side of the second board mounting base 392, the main control board case 513 accommodating the main control board 354 and the frame side joint portion 369 are electrically attached and detached when the game board 313 is attached and detached. A board-side joint portion 370 is provided.

The mounting frame 391 has a rectangular tubular shape that is short in the front-rear direction, and is detachably mounted on the back side of the game board 313. The first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are incorporated in the mounting frame 391 as shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, and the mounting frame 391 is attached to and detached from the game board 313 to the game board 313. On the other hand, it can be attached and detached from the back side integrally with the mounting frame 391.

In the game area 323, as shown in FIG. 70, a central display frame 388 is arranged substantially in the center thereof, and left flow path 401 and right flow path 402 are formed on both left and right sides of the central display frame 388. The starting winning means 403 is arranged substantially in the center of the lower side of the central display frame 388, and the variable winning means 404 and the ordinary winning means 405 are arranged on the left and right sides of the starting winning means 403. On the front side of the central display frame 388, various display means including the normal symbol display means 406, the normal hold quantity display means 407, the first special symbol display means 408, and the second special symbol display means 409 are arranged at appropriate positions. ing.

The guide rail 387 is arranged on the front side of the game board 313 so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the game area 323, and the game ball launched from the launching means 327 is directed to the upper side of the game area 323 via the guide path 411. It is designed to guide you. A large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 323, and the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 323 via the guide rail 387 is placed on the left flow path 401 and the right by the central display frame 388 or the like. It is distributed to any of the flow path 402 and flows down while colliding with the game nail.

As shown in FIG. 70 and the like, the game board 313 has a plurality of mounting holes 413 to 415 for mounting the central display frame 388, the starting winning means 403, the variable winning means 404, the ordinary winning means 405, etc., the out port 416, etc. Is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 413 is for mounting the central display frame 388, and is provided at a substantially central portion in the game area 323. Further, the mounting hole 414 is for mounting the starting winning means 403 and the mounting hole 415 is for mounting the normal winning means 405, respectively, and is provided below the mounting hole 413. The out port 416 is arranged at the bottom of the game area 323.

As shown in FIGS. 76 to 80 and the like, the central display frame 388 covers the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 from the front side and forms a display window 418 corresponding to the image display means 393 inside. The central display frame 388 includes a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided into two in the circumferential direction so as to surround the display window 418, and the outer peripheral portion of the display window 418 is located in the mounting hole 413. As described above, it is detachably attached to the front side of the game board 313 with screws or the like. The central display frame 388 includes a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided into two in the circumferential direction. However, if necessary, the entire display frame 388 may be divided into three or more, and the front and rear display frames may be divided into three or more. It may be divided into a plurality of directions.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 76 to 80, the first display frame 419 is arranged along the front surface of the game board 313 on the outside of the mounting hole 413, and has a plate shape or other shape through which the game ball can pass. The front mounting portion 421 and the decorative front frame portion provided on the front side of the front mounting portion 421 in the shape of a front view gate from the top side to the left and right sides and projecting forward on the inner peripheral side of the front mounting portion 421. The window frame portion 423 that is bent rearward from the inner circumference of the front frame portion 422 and is arranged in the mounting hole 413 and surrounds the display window 418 from the outer periphery, and the rear of the window frame portion 423 on both the left and right sides of the display window 418. It is provided with left and right decorative members 424 arranged in the vertical direction, and is detachably attached to the front surface of the game board 313.

The decorative member 424 has a plate shape or other shape, and is arranged so as to project toward the display window 418 from the inner circumference of the window frame portion 423 as shown in FIGS. 73, 76, and 77. Of the left and right decorative members 424, one of the decorative members 424 is fixed to the front frame portion 422 or the like via the mounting portion 424a, and the other decorative member 424 is fixed to the window frame portion 423 or the like via the mounting portion 424a. It is fixed.

The front mounting portion 421, the front frame portion 422, and the window frame portion 423 constitute a front member 426 that divides the game area 323 on the outer peripheral side of the central display frame 388, and the decorative member 424 is an image on the rear side of the front member 426. It constitutes a rear member 427 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the display means 393. Various display means such as the normal symbol display means 406, the normal hold quantity display means 407, the first special symbol display means 408, and the second special symbol display means 409 are arranged at appropriate positions on the front side of the first display frame 419. ing.

The second display frame 420 includes a stage 429 for dropping the game ball from the front side of the game board 313 to the start winning means 403, and a warp port 430 for guiding the game ball flowing down the left flow path 401 side to the stage 429. Is provided.

The second display frame 420 is arranged between the left and right lower ends of the window frame portion 423 of the first display frame 419, and has a plate shape or the like that abuts on the front surface of the game board 313 on the lower side of the mounting hole 413. It is provided with a front mounting member 432, a stage 429 arranged on the upper side of the front mounting member 432, and an entry prevention member 431 arranged from the upper side to the rear side of the stage 429, and both left and right ends are left and right of the first display frame 419. It is detachably connected to both lower ends of the window with screws or the like.

The front mounting member 432 is integrally provided with a reinforcing peripheral wall portion 433 arranged on the inner circumference of the mounting hole 413 in substantially the entire length in the left-right direction on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 76 to 80, the front mounting member 432 has a warp port 430 that opens to the left flow path 401 side and a guide passage 434 that guides the game ball from the warp port 430 to the stage 429 side. And are formed. The guide passage 434 is communicated with the guide passage 435 formed in the intrusion prevention member 431 on the rear side, and the game ball that has entered the warp port 430 while flowing down the left flow path 401 is passed from the guide passage 434 through the guide passage 435. It is designed to guide and guide to one end side of the stage 429.

The warp port 430 is provided on the front side of the front mounting member 432. The front mounting member 432 is provided with an opening portion 437 on the front side of the warp opening 430, and a passage wall 438 for the guide passage 434 protruding forward in a U shape is integrally provided on the lower side of the warp opening 430. ing. The rear side of the guide passage 434 is communicated with the guide passage 435 via the connection hole 439. The guide passage 435 is formed between the front mounting member 432 and the passage wall 440 provided on the entry prevention member 431 in a U-shaped cross section.

By providing the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 having such a structure on the front mounting member 432, it is possible to integrally mold the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 into the front mounting member 432 by the front and rear split molds. Therefore, the number of parts of the second display frame 420 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the warp port member including the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 is detachably provided on the front mounting member 432 from the front side. it can.

The rear sides of both the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 are configured to be open, and the open side excluding the connection hole 439 with the guide passage 435 is the game board 313, the stage 429, the entry prevention member 431, etc. It may be closed with the member of. In short, the front mounting member 432 including the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 may be integrally molded by the front and rear halves.

The stage 429 has a substantially arcuate shape in front view in which both the left and right sides are raised, and has a central drop portion 450 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction and a left and right drop portions 451 arranged on both the left and right sides of the center drop portion 450. Then, after the game ball guided from the warp port 430 freely rolls in the left-right direction, it falls to the front side of the game board 313 from either the central drop portion 450 or the left-right drop portion 451. The central drop portion 450 is substantially directly above the start winning means 403, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will win the start winning means 403 when the game ball falls from the central drop portion 450.

In addition to the guide passage 435, the entry prevention member 431 is provided with a rear entry prevention plate 443 provided substantially parallel to the game board 313 so as to cover the stage 429 from the rear side, and is bent from the upper end of the rear entry prevention plate 443 to the front side. Then, an upper entry prevention plate 444 that covers the stage 429 from above is integrally provided, and the game balls that are flowing down the flow paths 401 and 402 by these entry prevention plates 443 and 444, or the game balls that bounce off on the stage 429. It is designed to prevent entry to the rear side. The entry prevention member 431 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the display image displayed on the image display means 393 via the entry prevention member 431 can be visually recognized from the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, 81 to 83, and the like, the mounting frame 391 is formed in substantially parallel to the game board 313, and a rear wall portion 446 in which a rectangular opening 455 is formed substantially in the center thereof. After that, the peripheral wall portion 447 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the wall portion 446 to the back surface of the game board 313, and bending outward from the front edge side of the peripheral wall portion 447 along the game board 313 with a fixing screw or the like. It is integrally provided with a fixing portion 448 fixed to the game board 313. The upper, lower, left and right wall portions of the peripheral wall portion 447 are arranged close to the upper wall portion 318, the side wall portion 319 and the bottom wall portion 320 of the surrounding wall 317 on the outer side thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 73, 75, and 81, the image display means 393 is vertically detachably mounted along the game board 313 on the back surface side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391. A mounting portion 453, a bulging portion 454 having a U-shaped cross section in a plan view, which is vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453 and bulges rearward from the image display means 393, and the bulging portion 454. A harness cradle 399 arranged on the lower side behind the display means mounting portion 453 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 72, 73, 75, 81, etc., a plurality of openings 456 are formed in the left and right bulges 454 in the vertical direction, and the rear side of the openings 456 is formed on the outer side in the horizontal direction. It is a handle part 457. A plurality of handle portions 457 are provided in each of the bulging portions 454 in the vertical direction, and by hooking a finger on any of the handle portions 457 on the left and right sides thereof, the game board 313 can be easily transported even when each component is attached. You can do it. In particular, since the mounting frame 391 has a plurality of handle portions 457 in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides, the handle portion is in the optimum position in terms of weight balance in consideration of the mounting status of each component on the game board 313. It is possible to use 457.

As shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 73, 81, and 82, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the opening 455 and is provided on the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 on the front surface side. A receiving portion 460 that receives the image from the front side, a bulging portion 454 that is provided on both the left and right sides of the receiving portion 460 and guides the left and right sides of the image display means 393 in the insertion / removal direction, and is provided below the receiving portion 460. A protruding wall 461 that abuts the image display means 393 on the insertion end side is provided, and the upper side is an insertion / removal portion 462 for the image display means 393.

The height of the protrusion 461 to the rear is about half of that of the bulge 454, and is bent upward from both left and right ends of the receiving portion 460 to reach the lower side of the bulge 454. The upper end side of the image display means 393 is detachably fixed to the upper receiving portion 460 by a plurality of fixing means 463 in the left-right direction, and the lower end side of the image display means 393 is a plurality of left-right directions to the protruding wall 461. It is detachably fixed by the fixing means 464.

The insertion / removal portion 462 of the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the upper end side of the mounting frame 391 as shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 81, and 82, and the game board 313 is attached to the front frame 302. In the state of being mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, the frame side members such as the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317 of the front frame 302 and the ball tank 347 are close to the upper side of the insertion / removal portion 462, and the upper wall thereof. It is covered from above by a frame-side member such as a portion 318 and a ball tank 347. Therefore, when the game board 313 is attached, the image display means 393 cannot be removed from the insertion / removal portion 462.

As shown in FIG. 73, the bulging portion 454 has a U-shaped cross section in a plan view with the front side open, and is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453. A guide rail 465 for guiding the image display means 393 on both the left and right sides is configured by the receiving portions 460 on both the left and right sides.

The internal space of the bulging portion 454 has a function as an accommodating portion for accommodating a part or all of the internal mechanism (game parts) in the mounting frame 391. Of the left and right bulging portions 454, the bulging portion 454 on the ball payout means 350 side is arranged so as to be close to the rear mounting base 360 and overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the bulge on the opposite side to the ball payout means 350. The portion 454 is provided with a side substrate mounting base 467 that projects to the back side of the image display means 393. The side board mounting base 467 has a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer side in the left-right direction is detachably fixed to the back side of the bulging portion 454, and the lower end side is detachably fixed to the back side of the harness cradle 399 by a fixing tool such as a screw. There is.

The left and right side portions of the side board mounting base 467 are fixed to the bulging portion 454 of the mounting frame 391 by a plurality of upper and lower fixtures 473, and the lower end portion is fixed to the harness pedestal 399 by a plurality of left and right fixtures 474. The harness cradle 399 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing tool 475 such as a screw. Screws and the like are used for the fixtures 473 to 475.

The side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 constitute a protruding member (fixing member) that protrudes to the back side of the display means mounting portion 453, and the left and right side portions of the display means mounting portion 453 and the left and right side portions. It overlaps the lower part from the back side, and constitutes a back side guiding means that guides the image displaying means 393 by pressing it from the back side when the image displaying means 393 is inserted or removed. In addition to the back side guiding means, the side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 constitute limiting means (back side pressing means) for restricting the movement of the image display means 393 to the rear side. Although the side board mounting base 467 and the harness cradle 399 are close to each other through a slight gap between the side board mounting base 467 and the image display means 393, even if they are slidably contacted with the image display means 393. Good.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 and 82, the LED connection board 353 is detachably mounted on the side board mounting base 467 without using screws or the like. An LED (not shown) for producing light emission on the front side of the front frame 302 is connected to the LED connection board 353. The side board mounting base 467 includes a peripheral wall portion 469 that surrounds the LED connection board 353, a board contact portion 470 that the LED connection board 353 contacts from the back side, and a board engagement that engages with the left and right one end edges of the LED connection board 353. It has a portion 471 and a substrate engaging claw 472 that engages with the left and right other end edges of the LED connecting substrate 353, whereby the LED connecting substrate 353 is detachably fixed.

A plurality of substrate contact portions 470 are provided in the circumferential direction on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 469 corresponding to the outer peripheral portion of the LED connection substrate 353. A plurality of substrate engaging portions 471 are provided in the vertical direction on the inside of one of the left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469 corresponding to the middle between the substrate contact portions 470. The substrate engaging claws 472 are elastically deformable with respect to the LED connection substrate 353 in the engaging and disengaging directions, and a plurality of the substrate engaging claws 472 are provided in the vertical direction on the left and right other sides of the peripheral wall portion 469.

When mounting the LED connection board 353 on the side board mounting base 467, first, one end side of the LED connection board 353 is inserted between the board contact portion 470 and the board engagement portion 471. Next, when the LED connection board 353 is pressed toward the side board mounting base 467 side with the board contact portion 470 and the board engagement portion 471 side as fulcrums, the board engagement claw 472 elastically deforms outward and the LED connection board 353. Is housed in the peripheral wall portion 469, and the outer peripheral portion thereof abuts on each substrate contact portion 470. Then, when the LED connection board 353 passes through the board engagement claw 472, the board engagement claw 472 is restored by an elastic force and engages with the other side edge of the LED connection board 353.

Therefore, with this configuration, the LED connection board 353 can be easily attached to and detached from the side board mounting base 467, and the side board mounting base 467 can be removed and easily reused as a synthetic resin material. There are advantages that can be done. Further, screws for fixing the LED connection board 353 are not required, and the amount of screws used can be reduced as much as possible.

The mounting structure of the LED connection board 353 with respect to the side board mounting base 467 can also be similarly adopted when mounting the mounted member with respect to another mounting base.

The image display means 393 is configured by accommodating a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a storage case 482, and is configured by FIG. 65, FIG. 67, FIG. 68, FIG. 73, FIG. 85, FIG. 86. As shown in the above, the insertion / detachment portion 462 is inserted vertically into the display means mounting portion 453, and the upper and lower ends of the storage case 482 are fixed by the fixing means 464,464. The storage case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and the image display panel 481 is detachably housed from the open side on the front side. The image display panel 481 is held by a storage case 482 and a holding frame 483 arranged so as to correspond to the front outer circumference of the image display panel 481. The holding frame 483 is fixed to the peripheral wall portion 484 of the storage case 482.

A plurality of fixing means 464 and 464 are provided on both the upper and lower sides of the image display means 393 in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 67, the upper fixing means 463 has a mounting portion 485 that projects upward from the housing case 482 and a mounting hole provided in the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the mounting portion 485. It is provided with 486 and a fixing tool 487 such as a screw that is inserted from the mounting portion 485 into the mounting hole 486.

As shown in FIG. 68, the lower fixing means 464 is provided on the mounting portion 488 protruding downward from the storage case 482 and the protruding wall 461 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the mounting portion 488. It is provided with a mounting hole 489 and a fixing tool 490 such as a screw that is inserted from the mounting portion 488 into the mounting hole 489. The protruding wall 461 is provided with a positioning portion 491 for positioning the left and right positions of the image display means 393 with the mounting portion 488.

The positioning portion 491 is formed in a notch shape on the protruding wall 461 so that the mounting portion 488 is inserted and removed in the vertical direction, and a mounting hole 489 is provided in the positioning portion 491. The mounting portion 488 and the positioning portion 491 constitute a positioning means for the image display means 393. The harness cradle 399 is provided with an opening-shaped or notched-shaped operating portion 492 facing the fixing means 464, and a tool or the like for the fixing tool 490 is inserted from the operating portion 492 to insert the fixing tool 490. It is designed to perform operations such as turning.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the storage case 482 is integrally formed with the peripheral wall portion 484 and the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 484, and the upper rear wall portion 493 and the lower rear wall portion 493 abutting against the back surface of the image display panel 481. It is equipped with a wall portion 494. The storage case 482 has a large depth in the front-rear direction on the upper rear wall portion 493 side, and ribs and other reinforcing portions 493a are provided on the front side or both front and rear sides, and slightly behind the lower rear wall portion 494. It is protruding. An effect control board 345 and a power supply module board 346 are mounted on the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 493. The lower rear wall portion 494 is close to the back surface of the image display panel 481, and the harness cradle 399 is provided close to the back side of the lower rear wall portion 494.

The effect control board 345 has a function of controlling various effect images displayed on the image display means 393, a function of controlling the effect image, and a function of controlling various other movable effect means 394 to 397. , It is housed in the effect control board case 495. As shown in FIG. 85A, the effect control board case 495 is configured by connecting the front case 495a and the rear case 495b so as to be openable and closable in the front-rear direction. The rear case 495b is provided with an opening 498 corresponding to the connector 497 on the back surface of the effect control board 345, and a harness (not shown) is connected to the connector 497 on the opening 498 side.

The effect control board case 495 is detachably attached to the back side of the storage case 482 by the fixed engaging portion 499, the contact portion 500, the fastener 501, and the engaging claw 502 with respect to the storage case 482 of the image display means 393. ing. The fixed engaging portion 499 and the contact portion 500 project rearward from the accommodating case 482 at intervals of 495 minutes from the effect control board case, and the effect control board case 495 can be freely engaged and disengaged from the fixed engaging portion 499. The contact portion 500 engages with the fixed engaging portion 499, and sandwiches the effect control board case 495 in the left-right direction.

The fastener 501 is rotatably supported on the contact portion 500 by the pivot 505, and is operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the effect control board case 495 to the accommodation case 482. The fastener 501 can be positioned at the fastening position and the releasing position on the contact portion 500. The engaging claw 502 projects from the accommodating case 482 to the back side and is arranged on the upper side of the contact portion 500, and is engaged with the effect control board case 495 in a disengaged manner.

As shown in FIG. 89A, the abutting portion 500, the fastener 501, and the engaging claw 502 do not interfere with the side substrate mounting base 467 when the image display means 393 is inserted into and detached from the display means mounting portion 453. Have been placed. On the other hand, the fixed engaging portion 499 is located on the edge side of the accommodation case 482 in the left-right direction, and when the image display means 393 is to be inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 with the left and right sides wrong, FIG. As shown in the above, the fixed engaging portion 499 interferes with the upper end of the side board mounting base 467 to prevent the image display means 393 from being inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 in that state. ..

Therefore, the fixed engaging portion (first member) 499 and the side board mounting base (second member) 467 constitute an erroneous mounting preventing means 516 for preventing erroneous mounting of the image display means 393 on the display means mounting portion 453. Has been done.

The fixed engaging portion (first member) 499 constitutes an attachment for detachably attaching the effect control board case 495 to the accommodation case 482, and the attachment target is the effect control board case. Parts other than 495 may be used. Further, the first member may be a protrusion provided in a protruding shape for other purposes, and is not limited to the attachment.

As shown in FIG. 85B, the power supply module board 346 is housed in the power supply module board case 506, and the engaging means 503, 504 is housed on the upper side of the effect control board 345 and on the back side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the house case 482. It is detachably attached via such means.

When the image display means 393 is mounted on the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313, the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side as shown in FIG. 89 (a). And attach it. In FIG. 89, the game board 313 and the image display means 393 are in an upright posture for the convenience of drawing creation. However, when the image display means 393 is attached when assembling the game board 313 side, for example, the front surface is on the lower side. The work is performed with the game board 313 tilted horizontally.

When mounting the image display means 393, the image display means 393 is inserted from the insertion / removal portion 462 side along the guide rail 465 of the display means mounting portion 453 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 89 (a). Then, the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 until the insertion end side of the storage case 482 abuts on the protruding wall 461.

When the mounting portion 485 on the insertion end side of the storage case 482 enters the positioning portion 491 of the protruding wall 461, the positioning function of the mounting portion 485 and the positioning portion 491 enables the image display means 393 in the display means mounting portion 453. Can be positioned at an appropriate position in the left-right direction. Next, the image display means 393 may be fixed to the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 by the fixing means 436 and 464 on both the upper and lower sides.

If the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the display means mounting portion 453 is in the open state in this way, the image display means 393 can be attached / detached substantially in parallel with the game board 313 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, so that the periphery of the display means mounting portion 453. Although there are other components such as the side board mounting base 467 and the harness cradle 399 so as to overlap the image display means 393, there is an advantage that the image display means 393 can be easily attached and detached without removing them. is there. Therefore, other parts can be arranged so as to overlap the back side of the image display means 393.

Further, when the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453, the left and right one end sides of the image display means 393 enter the lower side of the side board mounting base 467, and then the lower side of the image display means 393 is a harness. Since it enters the lower side of the pedestal 399, the side board mounting base 467 and the harness pedestal 399 can be used as a kind of guide member. Therefore, even when the image display means 393 is inserted / removed while the game board 313 is upright, there is no risk that the image display means 393 may fall out rearward, and the image display means 393 can be easily and safely inserted / removed. It can be carried out.

When assembling, etc., if the left and right sides of the image display means 393 are mistaken and an attempt is made to insert the image display means 393 in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the effect control board case 495 is fixed. The fixed engaging portion 499 interferes with the side board mounting base 467 on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453, and the image display means 393 cannot be inserted into the display means mounting portion 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous insertion, erroneous mounting, and the like of the image display means 393.

Further, the fixed engaging portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 constitute the erroneous mounting prevention means 516, and the fixed engaging portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 are also used as the erroneous mounting preventing means 516. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the dedicated erroneous mounting preventing means 516 is provided.

Even when the fixed engaging portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 are also used to prevent erroneous mounting, members other than the fixed engaging portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 may be used. Further, it is also possible to provide a dedicated means and member for preventing erroneous mounting without using the other member in common.

When the effect control board 345 is mounted, one end side of the effect control board case 495 is engaged with the fixed engaging portion 499, and then the effect control board case 495 is brought into contact with the back surface of the accommodating case 482 to be fixed. It is sandwiched between the joint portion 499 and the contact portion 500. Further, when the effect control board case 495 is brought into contact with the back surface of the accommodation case 482, the engagement claw 502 engages with the effect control board case 495. Therefore, even when the game board 313 is upright, the effect control board case 495 does not fall off. Finally, the fastener 501 is rotated around the pivot 505 toward the effect control board case 495 side, and the effect control board case 495 is tightened and fixed to the back surface of the accommodation case 482 by the fastener 501.

On the rear side of the protruding wall 461, a harness cradle 399 arranged behind the lower side of the display means mounting portion 453 is provided so as to be close to the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393. ing. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the harness cradle 399 has three sides fixed to the protruding wall 461 on the lower side and on both the left and right sides by fixing tools 475 such as screws.

As shown in FIG. 72, a plurality of hanging portions 507 for the harness 476 are provided on the back surface of the harness cradle 399 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and the harness 467 is provided by using the hanging portions 507 at appropriate positions. Is supposed to stop. The hanging portion 507 stops the harness 476 wired along the back surface of the harness pedestal 399, is arranged substantially parallel to the harness pedestal 399 in the vertical or horizontal direction, and is elastically deformable at one end in the longitudinal direction. The side is connected to the harness cradle 399. The hanging portion 507 is formed in a claw shape or a hook shape.

When wiring the harness 476, the harness 476 is wired in the left-right direction and other predetermined directions along the back surface of the harness cradle 399, while the harness 476 is hooked on a part or all of the hanging portion 507 as needed. .. The hanging portion 507 is formed in the shape of a claw or a hook having appropriate elasticity, and the harness 476 is hard to come off.

By providing the harness pedestal 399 on the lower rear side of the display means mounting portion 453 and arranging the harness 476 on the back side of the harness pedestal 399 in this way, the image display means 393 is inserted and removed from the display means mounting portion 453. At that time, it is possible to prevent the image display means 393 and the harness 476 from being confused. Further, by arranging the harness cradle 399 close to the back surface of the image display means 393, the harness cradle 399 can also be used as a guide for the image display means 393.

As shown in FIG. 72, the second board mounting base 392 is mounted on the back surface of the game board 313 so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391 including the harness cradle 399. The second board mounting base 392 has a rear wall portion 508 located on the back side of the harness cradle 399, side wall portions 509 fixed to the game board 313 on both left and right sides of the lower portion of the mounting frame 391, and a ball discharge port 510. It has a bottom wall portion 511 formed and fixed to the game board 313 under the mounting frame 391.

The second board mounting base 392 is provided with an opening 512 corresponding to the back side of the harness wired on the back side of the harness cradle 399 by the wall portion 508, and the opening 512 is mainly closed from the back side. A main control board case 513 that houses the control board 354 is detachably attached to the back side of the rear wall portion 508.

As shown in FIG. 83, the main control board case 513 is configured by connecting the front case 513a and the rear case 513b so as to be openable and closable in the front-rear direction. The main control board case 513 is arranged in a horizontally long shape close to the lower side of the effect control board case 495, and is detachably mounted on the second board mounting base 392 by the engaging means 514, 515 on both the left and right sides. ing.

The frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side joint portion 370 are configured in a substantially L-shape in front view as shown in FIGS. 66, 69, 71, and 72, and the frame-side joint portion 369 is a front frame 302. The board-side joint portion 370 is arranged in the lower part on the side far from the hinges 303 and 307 of the game board 313 facing forward and backward in the front-rear direction in the lower part on the side farther from the hinges 303 and 307 of the game board 313.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, the frame-side joint portion 369 has a joint support portion 519 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall portion 319 and a joint that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall reinforcing member 368. The joint reinforcing portion 520 that reinforces the support portion 519 from the back side, the frame side mounting plate 521 arranged on the front side of the joint support portion 519, and the first to third frame side connectors that are forwardly mounted on the frame side mounting plate 521. It is equipped with 525 to 527.

The frame-side mounting plate 521 has a first frame-side mounting portion 522 arranged in the vertical direction and a second and third frame-side mounting portions 523 and 524 arranged in the left-right direction, and the first frame thereof. The first frame-side connector 525 is mounted on the side mounting portion 522, and the second and third frame-side connectors 526 and 527 are mounted on the second and third frame-side mounting portions 523 and 524, respectively. The first to third frame-side connectors 525-527 are supported so as to be floatable via attachments 528 on both ends.

As shown in FIGS. 66, 71, and 72, the board-side joint portion 370 is arranged at the lower corner portion of the rear wall portion 508 of the second board mounting base 392 facing the frame-side joint portion 369, and thereafter. It has a vertical first board side mounting portion 530 and a left and right second and third board side mounting portions 531 and 532 formed on the wall portion 508, and the first board is attached to the first board side mounting portion 530. The side connectors 533 are arranged so that the second and third board side connectors 534 and 535 are arranged rearward on the second and third board side mounting portions 531, 532, respectively.

The first to third frame side mounting portions 522-524 and the first to third frame side connectors 525-527 are mounted on the first to third board sides with the side closer to the rotation center O of the game board 313 located on the front side. The portions 530 to 532 and the connectors 533 to 535 on the first to third board sides are inclined diagonally with respect to the line segment in the left-right direction so that the side close to the rotation center O of the game board 313 is located on the front side. Are arranged. Then, the first to third frame side connectors 525-527 and the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 rotate when the game board 313 is rotated with the engaging portion 315 side as the rotation center O. The pin insertion / removal portions are sequentially connected in the tangential direction around the rotation center O from the side closer to the moving center O.

The first to third board side mounting portions 530 to 532 are arranged on a line segment passing through the substantially rotation center O, and the first to third board side mounting portions 530 to 532 are arranged on the first to third board. The first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 are mounted via the side relay boards 536 to 538. Therefore, the pin insertion / removal portions of the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 are substantially parallel to the first to third board side mounting portions 530 to 532, and the front side of the first to third board side mounting portions 530 to 532. It is located close to. The first to third board side relay boards 536 to 538 are provided with first to third relay connectors 539 to 541 for connecting a harness 476 to each board on the game board 313 side.

The first to third frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 are configured corresponding to the first to third board-side connectors 533 to 535 of the board-side joint portion 370. The second and third frame-side connectors 526 and 527 and the second and third board-side connectors 534 and 535 are located on the side closer to the second frame-side connector 526 and the second board-side connector 534 on the side far from the rotation center O. It is arranged above the third frame side connector 527 and the third board side connector 535. The first to third frame side connectors 525-527 and the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 may be arranged so that the pin insertion / removal portions are inserted / removed substantially at the same time, and are far from the rotation center O. It may be arranged so that the pin insertion / removal portion is sequentially inserted / removed from the side.

If the frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side joint portion 370 having such a configuration are provided, the game board 313 is rotated around the rotation center O when the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting portion 311. By doing so, the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 and the panel-side connectors 533 to 535 of the panel-side joint portion 370 are connected in the tangential direction, so that the panel-side connectors 533 to 535 are connected to the frame-side connector 525. It is possible to connect to ~ 527 without difficulty.

That is, one end side of the game board 313 is inserted between the contact portion of the game board mounting portion 311 and the 314 and the engaging portion 315, and the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed from the front side in the direction of the arrow to play the game. By rotating the board 313 around the rotation center O, the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side connectors 533 to 535 of the board-side joint portion 370 are connected in the tangential direction. The panel-side connectors 533 to 535 can be easily connected to the frame-side connectors 525 to 527.

When the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 65, the one end side of the game board 313 is brought into contact with the game board mounting portion 311 from the front side of the game board mounting portion 311. It is inserted between the portion 314 and the engaging portion 315, and then the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305. Then, the game board 313 rotates around the rotation center O in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A in FIG. 65, so that the game board 313 can be pushed into the game board mounting portion 311.

Then, when the game board 313 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A, the board-side connectors 533 to 535 of the board-side joint portion 370 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 are shown in FIG. 87 (a). As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the corresponding board-side connectors 533 to 535 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 are sequentially connected in the tangential direction from the side closer to the rotation center O through the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the panel-side connectors 533 to 535 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 can be connected without difficulty.

Further, by arranging the plurality of frame-side joint portions 369 and the board-side joint portion 370 in an L-shape, for example, on the board-side joint portion 370 side, the two sides of the corner portion of the second board mounting base 392 can be formed. It is possible to arrange the board side joint portion 370 by effectively utilizing it. Therefore, despite the fact that there are a plurality of frame-side connectors 525-527 and board-side connectors 533-535, the frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side joint portion 370 can be efficiently utilized by effectively utilizing the space having few two sides. Can be placed in.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the first and second movable effect means 394 and 395 are arranged above and below the front side of the image display means 393 in the mounting frame 391, and the front side of the image display means 393. The third and fourth movable effect means 396,397 are arranged on the left and right of the above.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the first movable effect means 394 includes a first movable effect body 546 and a first drive means 547 that drives the first movable effect body 546 in the vertical direction. By driving the first driving means 547, the image display means 393 can be moved in the vertical direction between the upper position on the upper front side and the lower position on the lower front side while maintaining a substantially horizontal state. The first driving means 547 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the first movable effect body 546.

The first movable effect body 546 includes a support 548 arranged in a horizontally long shape on the front upper portion of the image display means 393 and a decorative body 549 mounted on the front side of the support 548, and the left and right sides of the support 548 are provided. Both ends are supported by a pair of first driving means 547 arranged on the left and right sides of the image display means 393 so as to be movable in the vertical direction via the first driving connecting body 550.

The first driving means 547 is supported by the mounting frame 391 via a vertically elongated support member 551. The first drive means 547 is arranged in the vertical direction along the outer edge of the image display means 393 toward both upper and lower ends thereof, and has an elongated columnar elevating guide body 552 that guides the first drive connecting body 550 in the vertical direction. , A drive pulley 555 arranged near the lower end of the elevating guide body 552, a driven pulley 554 arranged near the upper end side of the elevating guide body 552, and a drive source 555 such as a stepping motor for rotationally driving the drive pulley 553. It is provided with an endless timing belt 556 that is wound around a drive pulley 553 and a driven pulley 554 and to which a first drive connecting body 550 is fixed at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction thereof.

An end portion of the first movable effect body 546 is rotatably connected to the first drive connecting body 550 by a pivot axis 557 in the front-rear direction. An elongated hole 558 through which the pivot 557 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction is formed on one end side of the first movable effect body 546. Therefore, the first movable effect body 546 can be inclined obliquely within the range in which the pivot 557 slides in the elongated hole 558.

The decorative body 549 employs a three-dimensional decoration with an airplane motif, and has a fuselage portion 559 and wing portions 560 extending from the fuselage portion 559 to the left and right sides. The decorative body 549 is arranged so that the tip end side of the body portion 559 projects into the display window 418 of the central display frame 388. The tip side of the wing portion 560 is arranged in front of the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388.

The wing portion 560, which is a part of the decorative body 549, constitutes a front side portion arranged on the front side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and other parts except the fuselage portion 559 and the like are on the rear side of the decorative member 424. It constitutes the rear side to be arranged. Therefore, by arranging the decorative body 549 on both the front and rear sides of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388 in this way, it is possible to sufficiently secure the arrangement area of the first movable effect means 394.

Further, the distance between the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388 is different between the upper and lower sides, and the decorative body 549 can pass through the left and right decorative members 424 in the front-rear direction at a position where the distance is widened. .. For example, in this embodiment, since the distance between the left and right decorative members 424 is large on the lower side, when the first movable effect means 394 is assembled to the mounting frame 391, the first is up to the lower side of the decorative member 424. The movable effect body 546 is moved so that the wing portion 560 of the decorative body 549 is positioned in front of the decorative member 424.

Inside the left and right side walls of the mounting frame 391, an LED substrate 542 is provided so as to illuminate the first movable effect body 546 of the first movable effect means 394, especially the decorative body 549. The LED substrate 542 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 543 in the vertical direction corresponding to the moving range of the first movable effect body 546, and the LED 543 is emitted to illuminate the decorative body 549 at the time of a predetermined movable effect.

The decorative body 549 may be a motif other than an airplane, and when moving in the left-right direction, the decorative body 549 may be assembled in a state where the decorative body 549 is moved inward from the decorative member 424. Further, the decorative body 549 may be movable between the front side of the decorative member 424 and a position deviated from the front side of the decorative member 424, and may move linearly in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, etc., as well as rotate or swing. You may try to do it. Further, it may be detached from the front side of the decorative member 424 by elastic deformation. Further, at least a part of the first movable effect means 394 may be arranged on the front side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and the other main part may be arranged on the back side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the second movable effect means 395 supports the second movable effect body 562 and the support member 563 fixed to the mounting frame 391, and supports the second movable effect body 562. A second driving means 564 that drives in the vertical direction is provided, and the second movable effect body 562 is driven by the second driving means 564 while maintaining a substantially horizontal state, and the lower position on the lower front side of the image display means 393. It can be moved to and from the upper position on the front side of the upper and lower middle parts. The second driving means 564 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the second movable effect body 562.

The second driving means 564 is arranged on the rear side of the first driving means 547 and on the front side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, and is arranged vertically on the lower side thereof along the side edge of the image display means 393. An elongated columnar elevating guide body 566 that guides the second drive connecting body 565 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 567 arranged near the upper end side of the elevating guide body 566, and a vicinity of the lower end side of the elevating guide body 566. A driven pulley 568 arranged in the above, a drive source 569 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the drive pulley 567, and a second drive connector wound around the drive pulley 567 and the driven pulley 568 and at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction thereof. It is provided with an endless timing belt 570 to which 565 is fixed.

The drive source 569 is fixed to the back side of the support member 563, and the rear end side is arranged in the bulging portion 454 of the mounting frame 391. Of course, in this case, the drive source 569, which is a part of the second drive means 564, is arranged in the bulging portion 454, but at least a part of the second movable effect means 395, for example, the second movable effect means 395. At least a part of the support mechanism and / or the second driving means 564 may be incorporated in the bulge 454.

By incorporating the game component, which is an internal mechanism arranged inside the mounting frame 391, into the bulging portion 454, the first movable effect means 394 and the second movable effect means 395 are placed on the front side of the image display means 393. It is not necessary to secure a large distance between the game board 313 and the image display means 393, and the image display means 393 can be placed close to the game board 313 side.

An end portion of the second movable effect body 562 is rotatably connected to the second drive connecting body 565 by a pivot axis 571 in the front-rear direction. A long hole 572 through which the pivot 571 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction is formed on one end side of the first movable effect body 546. Therefore, the second movable effect body 562 can be inclined obliquely within the range in which the pivot 571 slides in the elongated hole 572.

The first movable effect body 546 and the second movable effect body 562 are arranged vertically, but the movement path of the first movable effect body 546 and the movement path of the second movable effect body 562 are arranged so as to be offset in the front-rear direction. ing. Therefore, the first movable effect body 546 and the second movable effect body 562 can arbitrarily move in the vertical direction without interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 are arranged symmetrically corresponding to the left and right sides of the image display means 393, and the vertically elongated movable effect means. A body 574 and a driving means 575 for driving the movable effect body 574 in the left-right direction are provided, and the driving means 575 provides an outer external position in the left-right direction and an inner inner position in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 393. It is possible to move between. The drive means 575 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the movable effect body 574.

The movable effect body 574 is arbitrarily decorated (not shown) on the front side, and is arranged vertically on the front side along the left and right edges of the image display means 393. The drive means 575 is provided with a support portion 576 fixed inside the peripheral wall portion 447 of the mounting frame 391 and slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the support portion 576, and a movable effect body 574 is fixed to the front side. It is composed of an electromagnetic sliding means including a sliding portion 577. The movable effect body 574 can be moved between the outer external position in the left-right direction and the inner inner position in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 393 by the driving means 575.

The movable effect body 574 of the third movable effect means 396 and the fourth movable effect means 397 are separated from each other on the left and right sides, and do not interfere with each other even when moved to the internal position. Further, the movement path of each movable effect body 574 of the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 lies between the movement path of the first movable effect body 546 and the movement path of the second movable effect body 562, and moves. Occasionally, the movable effect bodies 574 of the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 do not interfere with each other.

The first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are used for the same movable effect as in the first embodiment, and all or a part of the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are appropriately moved. It is also possible to narrowly limit or widen the image display area 579 of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393.

For example, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 88A, the display screen 578 is limited by the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 to play a game in a narrow image display area 579, which is advantageous for reach and other players. In the case of a specific gaming state or a gaming state that is a precursor thereof, as shown in FIG. 88B, the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are retracted to the outside of the display screen 578 to display the display screen 578. It is also possible to expand the entire area to play a game in a wide image display area 579.

As a method of limiting the image display area 579, one or both of the upper and lower first and second movable effect means 394 and 395 are moved to the center side of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 to move the upper and lower sides of the image display area 579. The left and right width of the image display area 579 by moving one or both of the first method of limiting the width and the left and right third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 to the center side of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393. There is a second way to limit. There is also a method of limiting the vertical width and the horizontal width of the image display area 579 by combining the first method and the second method. Enlarging or reducing the vertical width and / or the horizontal width of the display area may be intermittently repeated a plurality of times by utilizing all or a part of the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397.

90 to 107 show a fourth embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, the image display means 393 can be inserted and removed in the lateral direction with respect to the display means mounting portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313. The insertion / removal type is illustrated.

The game board 313 is provided with a mounting frame 391 on the back side as shown in FIGS. 90 to 92. On the back side of the mounting frame 391, there are a liquid crystal type image display means 393 corresponding to the central display frame 388 on the front side of the game board 313, and an LED (not shown) for producing light emission on the front side of the front frame 302. The connected LED connection board 353, the harness pedestal 399 for receiving the harness arranged on the back surface side, and the relay board 352 for relaying each harness are mounted.

On the back side of the image display means 393, an effect control board case 495 accommodating the effect control board 345 and a power supply module board case 506 accommodating the power supply module board 346 are mounted, and under the effect control board case 495. A harness cradle 399 is provided on the side.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 98, the mounting frame 391 has a rear wall portion 446 formed substantially parallel to the game board 313 and a rectangular opening 455 formed substantially in the center thereof, and a rear wall portion 446. A peripheral wall portion 447 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the game board 313 to the back surface of the game board 313 is provided, and the front end portion of the peripheral wall portion 447 is fixed to the back side of the game board 313 by a fixing tool 586 such as a screw or a nail. ..

As shown in FIG. 93, on the back surface side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, the image display means 393 can be inserted and removed in the left-right direction along the game board 313, and the display means mounting portion 453 and the display means mounting. On the left and right end sides of the portion 453, a side substrate mounting base 467 that protrudes rearward from the image display means 393 and is arranged in the vertical direction and to which the LED connection substrate 353 is detachably mounted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 99, the image display means 393 is configured by accommodating a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a storage case 482. Then, the image display means 393 is connected to the display means mounting portion 453 in the left-right direction (horizontally) from the insertion / detachment portion 462 provided in an open shape on the side opposite to the side board mounting base 467 of the display means mounting portion 453. It can be inserted and removed in the direction), and is fixed at a predetermined mounting position by fixing means 584,585 at both left and right ends.

The storage case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIGS. 94 to 99, the image display panel 481 is detachably housed from the open side on the front side, and is inserted into the peripheral wall portion 484 from both the left and right sides to form an image. The image display panel 481 is detachably held by a fixture 586 such as a screw that comes into contact with the side surface of the display panel 481. The storage case 482 has an upper rear wall portion 493 and a lower rear wall portion 494, and the upper rear wall portion 493 is reinforced in a predetermined direction such as a vertical direction and a horizontal direction in order to secure the strength of the storage case 482. A rib 587 and a reinforcing ridge portion 588 having a U-shaped cross section are provided.

As shown in FIG. 99, between the front end surfaces of the reinforcing ribs 587 and the reinforcing ridges 588 on the upper and lower rear wall portions 494 and 494 sides of the housing case 482 and the back surface of the image display panel 481, front and rear A slight gap s is provided in the direction. Therefore, when the image display means 393 is handled as a single unit, even if one or both of the upper and lower rear wall portions 494 and 494 of the storage case 482 may be pressed toward the image display panel 481, it is reinforced. The upper and lower rear wall portions 494 and 494 of the housing case 482 are only slightly deformed toward the image display panel 481 within the range of the gap s between the rib 587, the reinforcing ridge portion 588, etc. and the image display panel 481. The image display panel 481 is not immediately deformed or damaged due to the deformation of the upper and lower rear wall portions 494 and 494 of the storage case 482.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, a plurality of fixing means 584, 585 are provided in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the image display means 393. Then, as shown in FIG. 98, the fixing means 584, 585 are provided in the mounting portions 589,590 protruding in the left-right direction from the storage case 482 and in the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the mounting portions 589,590. It is provided with a mounting hole 591, 592 provided and a fixing tool 594, 594 such as a screw inserted from the mounting portion 589,590 into the mounting hole 591, 592.

The attachment hole 591 of the fixing means 584 on the distal end side of the image display means 393 is provided in the notch 596 of the protruding wall 595 projecting rearward from the rear wall portion 446. Further, the notch portion 596 is formed corresponding to the attachment portion 589, and the attachment portion 589 can be inserted and removed in the lateral direction in the notch portion 596. Therefore, the notch portion 596 has a function as a positioning portion, and constitutes a positioning means for positioning the accommodation case 482 with the mounting portion 589 on the accommodation case 482 side.

An inclined guide portion 598 is provided on the tip side of the attachment portion 589, and a guide portion 599 is provided on the protruding wall 595 corresponding to the notch portion 596, and the guide portions 598 and 599 attach the guide portion 599. The portion 589 is guided to the notch portion 596 of the protruding wall 595. The guide portions 598 and 599 are composed of inclined portions, but may be an arc surface or the like.

On the back side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the accommodating case 482, as in the third embodiment, an effect control board case 495 accommodating the effect control board 345 and a power supply module board case 506 accommodating the power supply module board 346. Are detachably arranged. The effect control board case 495 is horizontally long in the left-right direction, and the power supply module board case 506 is arranged on the upper side thereof.

As shown in FIG. 90, the effect control board case 495 has an upper rear wall with a fixed engaging portion 499, an abutting portion 500, a fastener 501, and an engaging claw 502 with respect to the accommodating case 482 of the image display means 393. It is detachably attached to the back side of the portion 493. The fixed engaging portion 499 and the contact portion 500 project rearward from the accommodating case 482 at intervals of 495 minutes from the effect control board case 495, and the fixed engaging portion 499 has an engaging protrusion of the effect control board case 495. The 503 is engaged with each other in a disengaged manner, and the contact portion 500 sandwiches the effect control board case 495 with the fixed engaging portion 499 in the left-right direction.

The fastener 501 is rotatably supported on the abutting portion 500 by the pivot 505, and is operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the effect control board case 495 to the upper rear wall portion 493. The engaging claw 502 projects from the accommodating case 482 to the back side and is arranged on the upper side of the contact portion 500, and is engaged with the effect control board case 495 in a disengaged manner.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 92 and 100 to 103, a harness cradle 399 is provided on the lower side of the effect control board case 495 on the back surface side of the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482. The harness cradle 399 is composed of the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482 itself, and various harnesses 600 such as a flat harness connecting the effect control board 345 and the movable effect means (not shown) are directed in a predetermined direction. It is arranged in, and is stopped by a stopper 601.

On the back surface side of the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482 constituting the harness cradle 399, mounting portions 602 are provided in a concave shape at a plurality of locations, and a large number of mounting holes 603 are provided in each mounting portion 602 in the vertical and horizontal directions. It is provided.

The mounting portion 602 has a vertical portion 602a that is long in the vertical direction and a horizontal portion 602b that is long in the horizontal direction, and a pair (double) for the stopper 601 is attached to the vertical and horizontal portions 602a and 602b of the mounting portion 602. A large number of mounting holes 603 are provided, and by mounting the stopper 601 using any of the mounting holes 603, the mounting position of the stopper 601 can be arbitrarily changed in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Is.

As shown in FIG. 103, the stopper (stop portion) 601 includes a base portion 604, a pressing portion 605 integrally formed at one end of the base portion 604, and the other end side of the pressing portion 605 as the other end side of the base portion 604. The harness 600 is provided between the base portion 604 and the pressing portion 605, and the other end of the pressing portion 605 is engaged with the other end of the base portion 604. It is locked by the stopping means 606. The locking means 606 has a locking portion 607 on the base portion 604 side and a locked portion 608 on the pressing portion 605 side, and the locking portion 607 and the locked portion 608 are engaged and disengaged. There is.

The base 604 is approximately as thick as the recessing depth of the mounting 602, is provided with two (plural) mounting protrusions 609 that can be inserted into the mounting holes 603, and the mounting protrusions 609 are attached to the mounting holes 603. It is designed so that the stopper 601 can be detachably attached by inserting it. The stopper (stop portion) 601 may be provided integrally with the harness cradle 399.

One end of the harness 600 is connected to the effect control board 345. Further, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the other end of the harness 600 is guided from the side surface of the storage case 482 to the inside of the mounting frame 391 via the side surface of the mounting frame 391, and inside the mounting frame 391. It is connected to the movable effect means 394 to 397. The middle of the harness 600 is pressed by the pressing member 638 along the side surface of the peripheral wall portion 447 of the mounting frame 391. The pressing member 638 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing tool 637 such as a screw.

By providing a large number of mounting holes 603 in the mounting portion 602 of the storage case 482 in this way, it is possible to arrange the fasteners 601 at necessary locations according to the wiring position, wiring direction, etc. of the harness 600. It is possible to change the wiring of the harness 600 and to take any other measures. Further, the mounting portion 572 of the storage case 482 has a concave shape, and by arranging the stopper 601 in the mounting portion 572, the amount of protrusion of the stopper 601 to the rear of the base portion 604 can be reduced. As a result, the harness 600 can be arranged along the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 98 and 106, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the opening 455 and receives the image display means 393 from the front side, and the upper and lower sides of the receiving portion 460. 610 is provided with guide ridges 610 that guide the upper and lower sides of the image display means 393 in the horizontal insertion / removal direction, and the other end side opposite to the side board mounting base 467 arranged on the left and right one end sides is inserted / removed. It is part 462. The upper guide ridge 610 is formed in a rib shape, and the lower guide ridge 610 is formed in a U-shaped cross section. However, the guide ridge 610 may have substantially the same structure in both the upper and lower sides.

A pair of upper and lower guide rails 611 for guiding the image display means 393 in the left-right direction are configured on both the upper and lower sides of the opening 455 by the receiving portion 460 and the guide ridge 610. The guide rail 611 is composed of a receiving portion 460 and has a front rail portion 613 that guides the sliding portion including the tip sliding portion 612 of the accommodating case 482, and the accommodating case 482 that protrudes from the outside to the back side of the front rail portion 613. It has an outer rail portion 614 that guides both upper and lower sides from the outside. The tip sliding portion 612 is provided at both upper and lower ends of the storage case 482 on the insertion end side, and protrudes from the peripheral wall portion 484 of the storage case 482 toward the tip side.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the insertion / removal portion 462 is arranged on the back side of the other end of the display means mounting portion 453. On the other end side of the display means mounting portion 453, the insertion / removal portion 462 tilts the image display means 393 obliquely from the rear side with respect to the guide rail 611, and in that state, the tip sliding portion 612 is tilted at the guide rail 611. It suffices if it can be brought into contact with the front rail portion 613 of. Therefore, the insertion / removal portion 462 is provided in a predetermined range on the other end side of the display means mounting portion 453.

The front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611 is provided with an insertion portion 615, which is cut out and missing, corresponding to the front side of the side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353, and provides an image display means 393. When the insertion / removal portion 462 is inclined in an oblique direction with respect to the guide rail 611, the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615 and intersects the front rail portion 613. It is configured as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 96 and 104, the upper guide rail 611 comes into contact with the tip sliding portion 612 when the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615. A fulcrum portion 617 is provided as a fulcrum when the rear end side of the image display means 393 is rotated to the front rail portion 613 in a state where the tip sliding portion 612 is in contact with the regulating portion 616 and regulated. ing.

The tip sliding portion 612 and the regulating portion 616 are relative so that the tip sliding portion 612 rises when the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 so that the rear end side approaches the front rail portion 613. It has a guide unit 618 and a guide unit 619 for guiding the user.

The edge of the side board mounting base 467 on the insertion / removal portion 462 side is the insertion end of the image display means 393 when the image display means 393 in the inclined posture is moved to the mounting position side along the guide rail 611. The contact portion 620 is in contact with the side or the vicinity of the insertion end side.

The lower guide rail 611 has a fulcrum portion 617, but a regulation portion 616 is not provided. However, the lower guide rail 611 may be configured in the same manner as the upper guide rail 611. Therefore, the regulation unit 616 may be located on at least one of the upper and lower guide rails 611.

The mounting portion 572 of the accommodating case 482 protrudes from the tip sliding portion 612, but the tip sliding portion 612 corresponds to the front rail portion 613, whereas the mounting portion 572 corresponds to the opening 455. Therefore, even when the tip sliding portion 612 comes into contact with the regulating portion 616, the mounting portion 572 does not interfere with other members or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 90, 92, 96, and 105, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided with pushing means (movement assisting means) 623 on both the upper and lower sides corresponding to the rear end side of the image display means 393. ing. The pushing means 623 rotates the rear end side of the image display means 393 toward the front rail portion 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A around the fulcrum portion 617 of FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 is along the front rail portion 613. When the image display means 393 is pushed, the rear end of the image display means 393 is pushed into a predetermined mounting position along the front rail portion 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A (to assist the movement of the image display means 393 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A). The pressed portion 624 provided at the rear end of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 and the pressed portion 624 formed in an inclined shape on the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 come into contact with each other. It has a pressing guide portion 625 that presses and guides the accommodating case 482 to the mounting position.

The pushing means 623 is provided on both the upper and lower sides of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the front rail portion 613, and presses both the upper and lower ends of the storage case 482. The rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 is provided with a reinforcing portion 626 that bends in a U-shaped cross section corresponding to the pressing guide portion 625. The reinforcing portion 626 may be provided over the entire length in the vertical direction along the opening edge of the opening 455.

The pressed portion 624 is provided in a square shape on the accommodation case 482 side, and the pressing guide portion 625 is fixed to the rear wall portion 446 side of the mounting frame 391 in an inclined manner, but it may be configured in reverse. It is also possible to configure both the pressed portion 624 and the pressing guide portion 625 in an inclined shape or a curved shape.

Further, the pushing means 623 is an end portion opposite to the moving direction of the image display means 393 to the mounting position of the display means mounting portion 453, that is, an end portion opposite to the side substrate mounting base 467 with respect to the opening 455. In addition to the upper and lower sides, one or more may be arranged in the vertical direction, such as being provided in the middle portion or the central portion in the vertical direction. Further, the pressing guide portion 625 can also be configured by a rotating body or the like that rotates around the vertical axis.

As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the front rail portion 613 is provided with a riding portion 627 on the pushing means 623 side of the insertion portion 615. The storage case 482 of the image display means 393 is provided with a storage recess 628 into which the riding portion 627 is inserted when the image display means 393 is in a predetermined mounting position.

The ride-up portion 627 has a front surface of the accommodating case 482 when the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 in the direction indicated by 617A in FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 is along the front rail portion 613. The tip sliding portion 612 side of the accommodating case 482 is lifted in the direction indicated by the arrow 627A in FIG. 104 around the riding portion 627 to be removed from the regulating portion 616.

The accommodating recess 628 is formed in a concave shape on the front surfaces of the accommodating case 482 on both the upper and lower ends, and the riding portion 627 is inserted when the image display means 393 is located at a predetermined mounting position. The riding portion 627 is formed with an inclined pressing guide portion 625 side so that the tip sliding portion 612 of the housing case 482 can be easily slid. The lower guide rail 611 is provided with a notch 639 in the front rail 613, but the notch 639 may not be provided.

When mounting the image display means 393 on the display means mounting portion 453, for example, the game board 313 is tilted so that the front surface of the game board 313 is on the lower side and the mounting frame 391 is on the upper side, and in that state, FIG. 107 (a). )-(C).

First, on the insertion / removal portion 462 side, the image display means 393 is arranged in an inclined state in which the image display means 393 is inclined in an oblique direction with respect to the front rail portion 613 of the pair of guide rails 611 as shown in FIG. 107 (a), and the tip side thereof. The tip sliding portion 612 of the above is brought into contact with the guide rail 611. Next, the tip sliding portion 612 is slid along the front rail portion 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A, and moved to the lower mounting position of the side board mounting base 467 as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Let me.

At this time, if the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620 of the side substrate mounting base 467, the image display means 393 is tilted around the tip sliding portion 612 along the guide rail 611 as necessary to obtain an image. The tip end side of the display means 393 is inserted into the lower side of the side board mounting base 467.

While the image display means 393 is moving to the mounting position in an inclined state, the tip sliding portion 612 enters the lower side of the side substrate mounting base 467 and corresponds to the insertion portion 615. As shown, the tip end side of the image display means 393 including the tip sliding portion 612 enters the insertion portion 615, and the tip of the tip sliding portion 612 comes into contact with the regulating portion 616.

Therefore, although there is a side board mounting base 467 on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453 so as to be close to the back side of the image display means 393 in the mounted state, the tip side of the image display means 393 is mounted on the side board. It can be largely inserted under the base 467.

When the image display means 393 has a large inclination angle, the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620 when it approaches the side substrate mounting base 467. Therefore, when the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620, the image display means 393 is tilted so that the anti-insertion end side of the image display means 393 approaches the guide rail 611. As a result, the image display means 393 can be inserted into the insertion portion 615 at a predetermined angle.

Next, when the anti-insertion end side of the image display means 393 is pressed toward the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A along the front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611. Put it in a state. At this time, the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 is guided by the regulation portion 616 as it rotates around the fulcrum portion 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, and is deviated from the regulation portion 616.

Then, when the anti-insertion end side of the image display means 393 approaches the front rail portion 613, the pressed portion 624 on the anti-insertion end side of the image display means 393 is on the mounting frame 391 side, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 105. It abuts on the pressing guide portion 625 and guides the pressed portion 624 in the pushing direction along the inclination of the pressing guide portion 625 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A. As a result, the image display means 393 can be pushed along the guide rail 611 to a predetermined mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A in FIG.

Therefore, the image display means 393 is placed in an inclined manner between the upper and lower guide rails 611, and the rear end side of the image display means 393 is on the guide rail 611 while sliding the tip sliding portion 612 along the guide rail 611. By tilting the image display means 393 between the guide rails 611 so as to be mounted on the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 can be easily and surely guided to a predetermined mounting position along the guide rail 611.

When the image display means 393 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, the storage case of the image display means 393 before the pushing means 623 pushes the image display means 393 on the guide rail 611 into the mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A. The front surface of 482 abuts on the riding portion 627. Therefore, the tip side of the image display means 393 is slightly lifted, and in that state, the image display means 393 slides to the mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A.

Further, the mounting portion 589 and the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 have guide portions 598 and 599, and the mounting portion 589 is guided to the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 via the guide portions 598 and 599. .. Therefore, although the mounting portion 589 is projected on the tip end side of the image display means 393, the mounting portion 589 can be easily inserted into the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595.

When the image display means 393 moves to a predetermined mounting position, the riding portion 627 corresponds to the storage recess 628, so that the front surface of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 comes into contact with the receiving portion 460 including the front rail portion 613. After that, if the image display means 393 is fixed to the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 by a plurality of fixing means 584,585 on the left and right sides, the image display means 393 can be attached as shown in FIG. 98.

When the image display means 393 is removed from the display means mounting portion 453, the procedure is reversed. First, after releasing the fixing of the image display means 393 by the fixing means 584, 585, the effect control board case 495 mounted on the back side of the image display means 393 and other appropriate places are hung with fingers to detach the image display means 393. Move in the direction. Then, the pressed portion 624 of the image display means 393 slides along the inclined surface of the pressing guide portion 625, and the rear end side of the image display means 393 rises from the front rail portion 613. Therefore, the rear end side of the image display means 393 Can be grasped with fingers. Therefore, the image display means 393 can be easily taken out from the display means mounting portion 453.

When mounting the image display means 393, the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 is slid in a state of being in contact with the front rail portion 613, and the tip side thereof is a side substrate for the LED connection board 353. It can also be inserted under the mounting base 467. Therefore, in that case, the insertion portion 615, the regulation portion 616, the fulcrum portion 617, and the like of the guide rail 611 can be omitted.

The side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353 is arranged in the vertical direction with a gap between the side board mounting base 467 and the front rail portion 613 of the display means mounting portion 453 so that the image display means 393 can be accommodated. As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, the upper support base 629 and the lower support base 630 arranged on both sides of the opening 455 of the display means mounting portion 453 are detachably fixed from the back side.

The upper support base 629 bends toward the opening 455 side from a plurality of bases 631, 632 protruding rearward from the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 on the upper side of the opening 455 and from the rear end of the base 631, 632. It has a mounting portion 633. Of the plurality of bases 631, 632, one of the bases 631 is arranged in the left-right direction on the upper side of the opening 455, and the other base 632 is arranged in the up-down direction at the end of the opening 455. An opening 634 is formed in. A regulation portion 616 is formed corresponding to the opening 634, and a tip sliding portion 612 on the upper side of the storage case 482 projects.

The lower support base 630 has a plurality of base portions 635 that project rearward from the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 on the lower side of the opening 455, and a mounting portion that bends upward from the rear end of the base portion 635 toward the opening 455 side. It has 636 and is configured in an L shape. The side board mounting base 467 is detachably mounted on the mounting portions 633 and 636 of the upper and lower support bases 629 and 630 from the back side by fixing tools 640 and 641 such as screws. The LED connection board 353 is detachably mounted on the back side of the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment.

When the side board mounting base 467 is provided corresponding to the opening 455 for the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391 in this way, it can be integrally provided with the mounting frame 391. However, support bases 629 and 630 provided with base portions 631,632 and mounting portions 633 and 636 that bend from the rear end to the opening 455 side are provided vertically, and the side substrate mounting bases are provided on the support bases 629 and 630. By mounting the 467, the support bases 629 and 630 and the side board mounting base 467 can be rigidly configured, so that the durability of the mounting frame 391 including the display means mounting portion 453 can be improved.

Although the LED connection board 353 is attached to the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment, a relay board other than the LED connection board 353 or another board may be used. Further, the side board mounting base 467 may be integrally provided on the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the image display means 393 is first tilted obliquely with respect to the guide rail 611 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, and then the tip sliding portion 612 is left and right along the guide rail 611 in that state. While sliding in the direction, the rear end side of the image display means 393 is tilted toward the guide rail 611 with the tip sliding portion 612 as a fulcrum, and the image display means 393 is slid in the left-right direction to be attached. However, it may be attached by sliding it in the vertical direction. The other configurations are the same as those in the third embodiment.

Although the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the third and fourth embodiments, and various modifications are made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible.

Further, in the case of a game machine provided with a game board 313 detachably mounted on the support frames 301 and 302 and an image display means 393 mounted on the display means mounting portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313, an image display is performed. The means 393 may be removable from the display means mounting portion 453 from one of the insertion / removal portions 462 side in the vertical direction (for example, the upper insertion / removal portion 462 side shown in the third embodiment). It may be removable from one side in the left-right direction (for example, left or right which is one side in the left-right direction shown in the fourth embodiment). In that case, in the former, the frame-side member on the support frame 302 side arranged on the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the image display means 393 is a ball tank 347, a ball guide rail 348, an external information extraction means 349, etc. A ball payout means 350 or the like can be considered. Of course, other frame-side members may be used.

In the case of a game machine in which the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313 is provided with the display means mounting portion 453 and the display means mounting portion 453 is detachably provided with the image display means 393, in the third embodiment, the display means is mounted. A bulging portion that bulges rearward from the mounting frame 391 to guide the image displaying means 393 in the attachment / detachment direction in both the direction intersecting the attachment / detachment direction (vertical direction or left / right direction) of the image display means 393 with respect to the portion 453. A 454 is provided and the game parts in the mounting frame 391 are arranged in the bulging portion 454, and the bulging portion 454 intersects the attachment / detachment direction (vertical direction or horizontal direction) of the image display means 393. It may be provided on one side.

Further, as an internal mechanism in the mounting frame 391, there are movable effect means 394 to 397 in the mounting frame 391 on the front side of the image display means 393, and a part of the mechanical portion of the movable effect means 394 to 397 is bulged. It is conceivable to arrange it in 454, but other ones may be used. The bulging portion 454 may be the entire length or longer of the guide rail 611, or may be a part thereof. The movable effect means 394 to 397 include a movable effect body 546, 562, 574 arranged in front of the image display means 393, a support mechanism for movably supporting the movable effect body 546, 562, 574, and a movable effect body. It may be any one provided with the driving means 547,564,575 for driving 546,562,574, and may be other than those illustrated in the third embodiment. In that case, at least a part of the support mechanism and / or the driving means 547,564,575 may be arranged in the bulging portion 454.

The erroneous mounting prevention means 516 for preventing erroneous mounting of the image display means 393 on the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the first member 499 provided on the image display means 393 side and erroneously mounted on the display means mounting portion 453 side. It suffices to include a second member 467 that sometimes interferes with the first member 499, and as illustrated in the third embodiment, an engaging portion (fixing) for fixing the effect control board case 495. In addition to the combination of the tool) and the side board mounting base 467, various things can be used. Further, the erroneous mounting preventing means 516 may be dedicated to it, or may also serve as some kind of constituent member.

When the image display means 393 is detachably attached to the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, a pressing member that presses the image display means 393 from the back side on the insertion end side of the image display means 393. However, in addition to the dedicated member, the pressing member may also serve as another fixing member fixed to the mounting frame 391. In that case, the mounting frame 391 may be provided with a projecting member that projects to the back side of the image display means 393, and the projecting member may also be used as the back side pressing member. In the embodiment, the side board mounting base 467 is illustrated as the protruding member, and the board is arranged on the back side of the side board mounting base 467, but other than the side board mounting base 467 may be used.

When the image display means 393 and the movable effect means 394 are used in combination, at least a part of the movable effect means 394 may be in front of the image display means 393. Further, the center case 388 mounted from the front side substantially in the center of the game board 313 is arranged on the front side of the game board 313 and forms a game area 323 on which the game ball flows down on the outer peripheral side, and a front side member 426 and the front side member 426. It may be integrally provided with the rear member 427 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 on the rear side, or may be provided separately.

By arranging at least a part of the movable effect means 394 on the front side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the arrangement area of the movable effect means 394 can be expanded. In that case, the movable effect means 394 has a rear side portion arranged on the rear side of the rear side member 427 of the center case 388, and a front side overlapping the rear side portion from the rear side portion through the inside of the rear side member 427 of the center case 388. It is desirable to have a structure including a part.

Generally, the center case 388 is removable from the front side of the game board 313, whereas the movable effect means 394 is removable from the back side of the game board 313, so that the front side portion of the movable effect means 394 is detachable. Needs to be movable relative to the rear member 427 so that it disengages inward from the rear member 427. In that case, as long as the front side portion can move relative to the rear side member 427, any motion form such as rocking motion or linear motion may be adopted, and the front side member 426 and the posterior side may be adopted. Either one of the members 427 may move with respect to the other, or both may move. Further, the front side portion of the movable effect means 394 may be one side or both sides in the left-right direction of the image display means 393, or may be one side or both sides in the vertical direction. The shape and structure of the front side portions of the movable effect means 394 to 397 do not matter.

When the image display means 393 is inserted / removed from the insertion / removal portion 462 side with respect to a predetermined mounting position of the display means mounting portion 453, one end side of the guide rail 611 is used as the insertion / removal portion 462, and the guide rail is provided from the insertion / removal portion 462. The image display means 393 may be moved in the insertion / removal direction along 611. However, in this case, it is necessary to configure the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the display means mounting portion 453 in an open shape, and the moving distance of the image display means 393 at the time of insertion / removal becomes long.

In comparison with this, the image display means 393 is tilted diagonally with respect to the guide rail 611, and the tip end side thereof is brought into contact with the guide rail 611, and then the image display means 393 is moved from the tilted posture to the guide rail 611 side. When the image display means 393 is moved to a predetermined mounting position along the guide rail 611 while tilting, it is not necessary to open the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the guide rail 611, and the image display means 393 The travel distance can also be shortened. The image display means 393 is inserted and removed along the guide rail 611, and the insertion / removal direction may be the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, or the diagonal direction when viewed from the rear.

When the image display means 393 is inserted and removed in an inclined posture with respect to the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 is moved to the guide rail 611 side after the insertion side of the image display means 393 in the inclined posture is held by the holding portion. Although it is desirable to tilt the holding portion, the holding portion may be brought into contact with the back side of the image display means 393 in an inclined posture, or the tip side thereof may come into contact with the image display means 393 when it reaches a predetermined mounting position. .. Further, when the tip end side of the image display means 393 is inserted into the insertion portion 615 of the guide rail 611, the regulation portion 616 that the tip end side of the image display means 393 comes into contact with is also one of the holding portions. When the image display means 393 reaches a predetermined mounting position, its tip side comes into contact with the holding portion, the insertion portion 615 of the guide rail 611 is unnecessary.

The display means mounting unit 453 guides the image display means 393 to the mounting position and guides the image display means 393 to the guide rail 611 when the image display means 393 is moved from the inclined posture to the guide rail 611 side. If the pushing means 623 for pushing the image display means 623 along the guide rail 611 is provided, the image display means 393 can be easily and surely moved to the mounting position along the guide rail 611. It is desirable that the pushing means 623 is provided on the rear end side of the image display means 393 on the side opposite to the moving direction of the image displaying means 393 to the mounting position, but it may be provided in the middle of the moving direction of the image displaying means 393. It is possible.

Further, when the pushing means 623 moves the image displaying means 393 from the tilted posture to the guide rail 611 side, the pushing means 623 presses the pressed portion 624 on the image displaying means 393 side by the tilted pressing guide portion 625 to display an image. It is desirable to configure the means 393 so as to guide it to the mounting position, but the pressed portion 624 on the image display means 393 side is configured to be inclined, and the pressing guide portion 625 has a rod shape that abuts on the pressed portion 624. , Spherical, and other shapes are also possible. Further, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 300, and can be similarly implemented in other game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine.

FIGS. 108 to 158 illustrate a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 108 to 113, the pachinko machine 300 includes an outer frame 301 and a front frame 302 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 301, and the front door 306 opens and closes on the front side of the front frame 302. It is arranged freely. The game machine main body is composed of the outer frame 301 and the front frame 302.

The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via the first hinge 303 so as to be openable and detachable, and the front door 306 is pivotally attached to the front frame 302 via the second hinge 307 so as to be openable and detachable. The front frame 302 and the front door 306 can be locked to the outer frame 301 and the front frame 302 in a closed state by the locking means 304 on the opposite side of the hinges 303 and 307.

The outer frame 301 has a pair of left and right vertical frame members 341, 342, an upper horizontal frame member 343 that connects the upper ends of the vertical frame members 341, 342 to the left and right, and a lower end of the vertical frame members 341, 342 to the left and right. The lower horizontal frame member 344 to be connected and the decorative member 310 arranged forward on the front side of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and connecting the left and right vertical frame members 341 and 342 form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 114, the lower horizontal frame member 344 is provided substantially horizontally in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, and substantially the entire lower side thereof touches the floor surface F or the like to support the outer frame 301 in an upright state. It is a first support portion 645 for self-reliance. The decorative member 310 is a hollow synthetic resin, and has a rear member 310a arranged between the left and right vertical frame members 341 and 342 on the lower horizontal frame member 344 and a front member 310a arranged on the front side of the rear member 310a. It includes a member 310b. The rear member 310a and the front member 310b are connected to each other in the front-rear direction by fixing tools 310c such as screws at a plurality of positions in the left-right direction.

The lower portion of the rear member 310a projects toward the front side of the lower horizontal frame member 344. The front member 310b corresponds to the rear member 310a, and the front surface side thereof is provided with an uneven shape and other decorations. As shown in FIG. 114, the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310 is located slightly above the lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344, and a second support portion protruding downward near the front end on the lower surface 310d side. 646 is provided in substantially the entire length in the left-right direction.

The lower surface of the second support portion 646 is substantially the same height as the first support portion 645 of the lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344 or slightly higher than the first support portion 645, and the outer frame 301 is a flat floor surface. When placed on F or the like, it is grounded together with the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 to support the outer frame 301 or the entire pachinko machine 300 in a substantially vertical upright state.

Therefore, if the center of gravity of the outer frame 301 or the pachinko machine 300 as a whole is between the rear end of the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the front end of the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310, the outer frame 301 Alternatively, the entire pachinko machine 300 can be stably erected in a substantially vertical state, and the outer frame 301 or the pachinko machine is compared with the case where only the lower first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 is grounded. The entire machine 300 can be made to stand upright with good stability.

When the pachinko machine 300 is installed on the island facility 796a, as shown in FIG. 109, the outer frame 301 is placed and fixed on the receiving frame 796b, so that the lower side of the lower horizontal frame member 344 is fixed. Is generally flattened so that substantially the entire lower surface side of the lower horizontal frame member 344 is the first support portion 645. However, the first support portion 645 does not need to be provided on substantially the entire lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344, and may be provided continuously on the rear end side in the left-right direction, or may be provided on the intermediate portion and the left and right end portions. Etc., a plurality of them may be provided intermittently in the left-right direction or the front-back direction.

Further, although the second support portion 646 is provided on the lower surface of the front member 310b in the left-right direction, it may be provided on the lower surface of both the rear member 310a and the front member 310b. Further, a plurality of second support portions 646 may be provided intermittently in the left-right direction, such as being provided at the intermediate portion and the left and right end portions.

The second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 can also be provided as shown in FIGS. 115 (a) or 115 (b). In the decorative member 310 of FIG. 115 (a), front projecting portions 647 projecting from the lower side to the front side are provided at substantially the entire length in the left-right direction or at both left and right end portions, and the lower surface of the decorative member 310 including the front projecting portions 647. The entire part of the above is the second support portion 646.

Also in this case, the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310 including the front protrusion 647 is set to be substantially the same height as the lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344, or slightly higher or lower, so that the lower horizontal frame member 344 is also provided. Since the first support portion 645 of the above and the second support portion 646 of the lower surface 310d on the decorative member 310 side including the front protrusion 647 are grounded, the outer frame 301 or the entire pachinko machine 300 can be made to stand on its own with good stability. ..

The decorative member 310 in FIG. 115 (b) is provided with a second support portion 646 so as to project downward from the front protruding portion 647 of the decorative member 310. When the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310 is higher than the first support portion 645 on the lower side of the lower horizontal frame member 344, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), the lower surface of the decorative member 310 is below the front protruding portion 647. By providing the second support portion 646 so as to project to the outer frame 301 or the pachinko machine, both the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 are grounded. The entire 300 can be stably made independent.

The front frame 302 is provided with a game board mounting portion 311 on the upper side and a lower mounting portion 312 on the lower side thereof, and the game board 313 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting portion 311. The launching means 327, the lower speaker 325a, and the like are attached to the 312.

As shown in FIG. 108, a guide rail 387 for guiding the game ball launched by the launching means 327 (see FIG. 110) to the upper side of the game area 323 is mounted on the game board 313 in an annular shape, and the game In the central portion of the area 323, a liquid crystal type image display means 393 and a center case 388 corresponding to the front side of the image display means 393 are arranged on both front and rear sides of the game board 313. In the game area 323, various game parts such as a normal symbol starting means 654, a special symbol starting means 655, a variable winning means 404, and a normal winning means 405 are arranged around the center case 388.

The center case 388 is provided with a display window 656 corresponding to the display screen of the image display means 393 such as a liquid crystal display, and also has a normal symbol display means 657, a special symbol display means 658, and a normal symbol on the front surface on the outer peripheral side of the display window 656. The reserved number display means 659 and the like are provided. The image display means 393 constitutes an effect symbol display means 660, a special reserved number display means 661, an operation guidance display means 662, and the like.

The ordinary symbol display means 657 is for displaying the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and is composed of two light emitting bodies (for example, LEDs) corresponding to two types of ordinary symbols, for example, "○" and "×". The two light emitting bodies blink alternately for a predetermined time on condition that the starting means 654 detects the game ball, and the hit determination random value acquired at the time of detecting the game ball by the normal symbol starting means 654 is predetermined. If it matches the hit judgment value, the light emitting body on the "○" side corresponding to the hit mode emits light, and in other cases, the light emitting body on the "x" side corresponding to the off mode emits light. , Each blinking is finished.

When the ordinary symbol starting means 654 detects a game ball during the variable display of the ordinary symbol display means 657 or the ordinary profit state described later, the ordinary hold quantity display means 659 is a hit determination random value acquired at the time of the detection. Is stored up to a predetermined upper limit hold number (for example, 4), so the number of stored collision detection random values (hereinafter referred to as the normal hold number) is displayed by the number of light emitting bodies of the same number as the upper limit hold number. Then, the player is notified of the number of normally reserved numbers at that time.

The special symbol starting means 655 is for starting the symbol variation by the special symbol displaying means 658, and includes upper and lower starting winning means 655a and lower starting winning means 655b at the top and bottom. The upper start winning means 655a is a non-opening / closing type. The lower start winning means 655b is an open / close type that can switch between a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter (or is difficult to enter) and an open state in which the game ball can enter (or easily enter), and is a normal symbol display means. When the stop symbol after the change of 657 becomes a hit mode and a normal profit state occurs, the state is opened from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

The special symbol display means 658 is composed of one or more, for example, a display means such as a 7-segment type capable of variablely displaying one special symbol, and the upper start winning means 655a or the lower of the special symbol start means 655. On the condition that the game ball wins the starting winning means 655b, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and the jackpot determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting winning means 655a, 655b is set as the predetermined jackpot determination value. If they match, the special symbol stops in a predetermined jackpot mode (specific mode), and in other cases, it stops in a missed mode.

In the special reserved number display means 661, when the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 655 during the variable display of the special symbol or the special profit state, the jackpot determination random value and the like acquired at the time of winning are predetermined respectively. Since the upper limit number of holds (for example, 4 each) is stored as the limit, the number of stored jackpot determination random values (hereinafter referred to as the number of special holds) is displayed, and the number of special holds at that time is notified to the player. It has become like.

The effect symbol display means 660 variablely displays the effect symbols in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display means 658, and one or a plurality of (for example, three in the left-right direction) effect symbols 663a to 663c. Is configured to be variable and displayable on the display screen of the image display means 393 together with various effect images. Then, when the game ball wins in any of the starting winning means 655a and 655b of the special symbol starting means 655, the effect symbol display means 660 directs the special symbol according to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns at the same time as the start of the variation of the special symbol. The effects symbols 663a to 663c are stopped in a predetermined order such as left, right, and middle so as to start the fluctuation of the symbols 663a to 663c and finally stop at the same time as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. When the special symbol stops in the big hit mode, the effect symbols 663a to 663c also stop in the jackpot effect mode, and when the special symbol stops in the off mode, the effect symbols 663a to 663c also stop in the off effect mode.

The variable winning means 404 is an opening / closing type provided with an opening / closing plate 404a that can switch between an open state in which the game ball can win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win, and the special symbol after the change of the special symbol display means 658 is When the jackpot mode occurs and a special profit state occurs, the opening / closing plate 404a opens to the front side according to a predetermined opening pattern, and the game ball that has fallen on the opening / closing plate 404a is made to win a prize inside.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 113, the front door 306 includes a door base 322 made of synthetic resin formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the front frame 302, and the door base 322 has a game area 323. The visible viewing window 665, the upper speakers 666a, 666b and the lower speakers 667a, 667b arranged on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the viewing window 665, and the pair of left and right first pairs arranged on the left and right sides from the upper side of the viewing window 665. A side unit 668a and a second side unit 668b, and a front overhang unit (front lower unit) 669 that projects forward under the viewing window 665 are provided. The rear side of the lower speakers 667a and 667b is covered with protective covers 670a and 670b for preventing the insertion of an illegal member such as a piano wire from the front side of the lower speakers 667a and 667b.

The viewing window 665 is provided on the door base 322 corresponding to the game area 323, and is closed by a glass unit 340 detachably attached to the back side of the door base 322 as shown in FIGS. 109, 112, and 113. It is missing. The glass unit 340 includes two front and rear glass plates 671a capable of seeing through the game area 323 and a holding frame 671b for holding the outside of the two front and rear glass plates 671a, and the receiving frame via the engaging means 672. It is placed on 673, and the upper side is detachably fixed to the back side of the door base 322 by a pair of left and right fixing means 674. The glass plate 671a constitutes a visual recognition plate, and is generally colorless and transparent. However, if the game area 323 can be seen through, it does not have to be colorless and transparent, and is colored and transparent. A synthetic resin plate or the like may be used.

As shown in FIGS. 108, 109, 111, 112, 116, and 117, the front overhang unit 669 has a substantially triangular shape with a central portion protruding forward, and the front overhang unit 669 has a front overhang unit 669. Is provided with an operation effect means 678 for operation effect, an upper plate (launch ball storage unit) 328 for storing game balls for launch, and a lower plate (surplus ball storage unit) 329 for storing surplus balls. Further, a firing handle 330 for firing operation is provided on the side opposite to the upper plate 328 and the lower plate 329 with respect to the operation effect means 678.

The front door 306 is an upper side glass door provided with a viewing window 665, a glass unit 340, etc., and a lower side opening / closing door provided with an upper plate 328, a lower plate 329, an operation effect means 678, a firing handle 330, and the like. It is also possible to divide the door into two parts so that the glass door and the opening / closing door can be opened and closed separately.

As shown in FIG. 113, the door base 322 includes an upper base portion 681 arranged in the left-right direction on the upper side of the window hole 324 and vertical base portions 682a and 682b arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the viewing window 665. A lower base portion 683 arranged in the left-right direction is provided below the viewing window 665, and the lower base portion 683 is formed in a vertically wide shape corresponding to the front side of the lower mounting portion 312 of the front frame 302. There is.

On the back side of the door base 322, horizontal reinforcing members 684 in the left-right direction are provided on the upper end side of the upper base portion 681, and vertical reinforcing members 685a, 685b in the vertical direction are provided outside the left and right vertical base portions 682a, 682b. A lower reinforcing member 686 is attached to each of the 683s. The lower reinforcing member 686 has a wide shape corresponding to substantially the entire lower base portion 683, and the lower end sides of the vertical reinforcing members 685a and 685b are polymerized back and forth at both left and right ends and connected by screws or the like to the upper end side. A receiving frame 673 that bends rearward is provided. The reinforcing members 648, 685a, 685b, and 686 are made of sheet metal.

The inner peripheral side of the joint between the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322 and the left and right vertical base portions 682a and 682b, and the joint portion between the lower base portion 683 and the left and right vertical base portions 682a and 682b correspond to the window holes 324. The wide shape is formed in an arc shape, and the upper speakers 666a and 666b and the lower speakers 667a and 667b are mounted forward on each of the joint portions via the speaker mounting portions.

As shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 114, 118 to 120, the locking means 304 includes a front frame locking mechanism (not shown) that locks the front frame 302 in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 301, and a front. A front door locking mechanism (not shown) that locks the door 306 in a closed state with respect to the front frame 302, a cylinder-type release operating means 688 provided on the front door 306 side that can be released by key operation, and an release operation. It is provided with an interlocking mechanism 689 that interlocks the means 688 with the front frame locking mechanism and the front door locking mechanism.

In the front frame locking mechanism, when the front frame 302 is closed around the first hinge 303 toward the outer frame 301, a pair of upper and lower front frame engaging claws (not shown) on the front frame 302 side are on the outer frame 301 side. It is designed to be locked by engaging with a pair of upper and lower engaging portions (not shown). In the front door locking mechanism, when the front door 306 is closed around the second hinge 307 toward the front frame 302, a pair of upper and lower front door engaging claws (not shown) on the front frame 302 side are on the front door 306 side. It is designed to be locked by engaging with a pair of upper and lower engaging portions (not shown). The front frame locking mechanism and the front door locking mechanism can be interlocked with the release operating means 688 via the interlocking mechanism 689.

The interlocking mechanism 689 has an interlocking member 691 that is slidably supported vertically by a support plate 690 that bends backward from the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686, and is moved forward by one of the vertical movements of the interlocking member 691. The frame locking mechanism is released by the other operation, and the front door locking mechanism is released by the other operation. The interlocking member 691 is slidably supported in the vertical direction by a support plate 690 via a pair of upper and lower guide pins 692 and the like.

The release operating means 688 includes a cylinder portion 693 for inserting a key that penetrates the front door 306 in the front-rear direction, and a rotating claw 695 that is detachably fixed to the tip end side of the operation shaft 694 of the cylinder portion 693 with a screw or the like. The rotating claw 695 slides the interlocking member 691 in the vertical direction when the key inserted into the cylinder portion 693 is used to rotate the operating shaft 694 in the forward and reverse directions.

The rear end mounting portion 696 of the cylinder portion 693 is directly or indirectly fixed to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686, and the rear end of the cylinder portion 693 is fixed to the operation shaft 694 in the front-rear direction. A moving claw 695 is provided.

In the locking means 304, when the front frame 302 is closed around the first hinge 303, the front frame locking mechanism locks the front frame 302 in the closed state, and when the front door 306 is closed around the second hinge 307, the front is front. The door locking mechanism locks the front door 306 in the closed state. Then, when unlocking the front frame 302 and / or the front door 306, a key is inserted into the cylinder portion 693 and rotated in the forward or reverse direction around the operation shaft 694, via the rotating claw 695. The interlocking member 691 is operated upward or downward. Then, the interlocking member 691 operates upward or downward, and the corresponding front frame locking mechanism or front door locking mechanism releases the locked state, so that the front frame 302 and / or the front door 306 are hinged 303, 307. It can be opened around.

On the back side of the door base 322 of the front door 306, a sheet metal fraud prevention member 697 is provided on the outside of the release operating means 688 in the left-right direction. That is, on the back side of the door base 322 of the front door 306, a contact wall 698 that contacts the front end of the front frame 302 on the outer end side, and a contact wall 698 that projects rearward from the inside of the contact wall 698 and the inner circumference of the front frame 302. The fraud prevention edge 699 located at is integrally formed. However, the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686 has a protruding portion 685c that projects outward in order to secure a space for arranging the mounting portion 696 of the cylinder portion 693 of the release operating means 688, the rotating claw 695, and the like. It is formed. Therefore, the door base 322 is provided with a cutout portion 699a in which the fraud prevention edge portion 699 is cut out at a portion corresponding to the protrusion portion 685c.

Therefore, the fraud prevention member 697 is provided so as to close the notch 699a. The fraud prevention member 697 is arranged on an extension thereof along the fraud prevention edge 699, and a mounting portion 697a that bends inward from the front end side is fixed to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686 with screws or the like. There is. Therefore, it is not possible to insert an illegal member between the front frame 302 and the front door 306 and illegally operate the release operation means 688 to illegally open the front frame 302 or the front door 306.

The fraud prevention member 697 is formed with a notch 697b on the side close to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686 so as not to interfere with the mounting portion 696 of the cylinder portion 693 and the rotating claw 695. The notch portion 697b has a height approximately equal to that of the front end side of the contact wall 698, and the contact wall 698 prevents an unauthorized member from being inserted between the front frame 302 and the front door 306. The fraud prevention member 697 protrudes from the front end of the door to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 116, 121 to 125, a pair of left and right speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b projecting forward from the door base 322 are integrally formed on the upper portion of the door base 322. The speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b are substantially square in front view with openings 703 and 704 formed on both front and rear sides, and the upper speakers 666a and 666b are detachably inserted from the rear opening 704 side. Is housed.

The speaker mounting protrusion 702a is provided with receiving portions 705b and 705c for the side units 668a and 668b. That is, the speaker mounting protrusions 702a on the hinges 303 and 307 sides are provided with receiving portions 705b and 705c for the side unit 668a and 668b on the left and right sides of the flat portion 705a, and are provided on the receiving portions 705b and 705c. The upper surfaces of the side units 668a and 668b are substantially flush with the flat portion 705a. Further, a receiving portion 705d for the second side unit 668b is provided on the upper side of the speaker mounting protrusion 702b on the opposite side of the hinges 303 and 307.

As shown in FIG. 125, the upper speakers 666a and 666b are provided with a magnet 707, a coil bobbin 708, a voice coil 709, a diaphragm 710, a center cap 711, etc. in the speaker frame 706, and a front cover 712 is provided on the front side of the speaker frame 706. It is installed. The front cover 712 is fitted into the opening 704 on the front side of the speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b.

Each of the upper speakers 666a and 666b has a light guide body 715 arranged in the internal space 713 on the inner peripheral side of the magnet 707 and the like, and an LED substrate on which the LED 716 is mounted close to the rear end side of the light guide body 715. When the LED 716 of the LED substrate 717 emits light, the light is emitted from the light guide body 715 to the front side through the center cap 711 and the front cover 712.

The light guide body 715 and the center cap 711 are made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover 712 is formed with a large number of small holes 712a so that sound and light are emitted to the front side. The light guide body 715 is inserted into the through hole 706b of the rear wall portion 706a of the speaker frame 706 and is detachably supported. Further, on the back side of the rear wall portion 706a, the LED substrate 717 is detachably fixed with screws or the like so that the LED 716 faces the light guide body 715 in the front-rear direction. The front cover 712 may be colorless and transparent, colored transparent, or opaque. When the front cover 712 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, a concave-convex diffused reflection portion is formed on the back surface side thereof so that the front cover 712 itself emits light by the light from the LED 716. Good.

By assembling the light emitting means such as the light guide body 715 and the LED substrate 717 to the upper speakers 666a and 666b in this way, the light from the LED 716 of the LED substrate 717 is transmitted from the light guide body 715 through the center cap 711 and the front cover 712 to the front side. Can be irradiated. Therefore, the upper speakers 666a and 666b can be used for light emission effect in addition to the generation of sound effect, and an unprecedented effect can be expected.

As shown in FIG. 116, the first side unit 668a is a common component commonly used in a plurality of types of pachinko machines 300, whereas the second side unit 668b is shown in FIGS. 116 and 126 to 126. As shown in FIG. 128, it is provided with a design or the like peculiar to a specific model of the pachinko machine 300, such as having an upper protruding portion 730 described later.

For example, when manufacturing a plurality of types of pachinko machines 300, the first side unit 668a is commonly used, and the second side unit 668b having a unique configuration is combined to visually recognize the front door 306. It constitutes the peripheral portion of the window 665. With this configuration, while using the first side unit 668a in common, it is possible to easily manufacture different models of pachinko machines 300 by changing the design of the second side unit 668b and other configurations. Can be done.

Depending on the model of the pachinko machine 300, the design of the first side unit 668a and other configurations can be changed. In that case, the door base 322 side is common to a plurality of models. Therefore, in both the first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b, electronic components commonly required for each model, such as the upper speakers 666a and 666b for generating sound effects and the lower speakers 667a and 667b, are used. Is mounted on the door base 322 side, and electronic components specific to a specific model are incorporated in the first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b, or the second side unit 668b.

The first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b have substantially the same front side parts below the upper speakers 666a and 666b, and are arranged in front of the door base 322 and have a large number of LEDs 720 mounted on the front side. The LED 720 of the LED substrate 721 includes an LED substrate 721, a light emitting decorative cover 722 having a diffused reflection portion 722a formed inside and covering the LED substrate 721 from the front side, and an internal lens 723 arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 721. The light emitting decorative cover 722 is made to emit light by the light from.

As shown in FIGS. 111 and 126 to 128, the LED substrate 721 is divided into a plurality of upper and lower parts, and both are connected by a connector 724 or the like. The light emitting decorative cover 722 is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, and is provided with an uneven diffused reflection portion 722a on the inner surface on the back side.

The upper side 724a of the light emitting decorative cover 722 protrudes forward from the lower side 724b, and the upper side 724a overlaps the receiving portions 705b and 705c of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a. The distance between the LED substrate 721 and the light emitting decorative cover 722 is large on the upper side and smaller on the lower side.

As shown in FIGS. 129 to 132, a through hole 725 is formed in the internal lens 723 corresponding to each LED 720 on the upper side 724a in which the distance between the LED substrate 721 and the light emitting decorative cover 722 is large. A conical or spherical concave lens portion 726 is formed on the front side or the back surface side corresponding to each LED 720 on the lower side 724b where the distance between the LED substrate 721 and the light emitting decorative cover 722 is small.

Therefore, when each LED 720 of the LED board 721 emits light, the light from the LED 720 directly irradiates the diffused reflection portion 722a of the light emitting decorative cover 722 through the through hole 725 at the upper side 724a of the light emitting decorative cover 722. Since the distance between the 721 and the light emitting decorative cover 722 is large, the light from the LED 720 irradiates the diffused reflection portion 722a while being appropriately diffused.

On the other hand, on the lower side 724b where the distance between the LED substrate 721 and the light emitting decorative cover 722 is small, the light from the LED 720 is diffused by the concave lens portion 726 and irradiates the diffused reflection portion 722a of the light emitting decorative cover 722. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the light emission unevenness between the upper side 724a and the lower side 724b on the light emitting decorative cover 722 side as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 131 (b), the concave lens portion 726 has a conical recess 726a formed on the front surface of the internal lens 723 and a spherical protrusion formed on the back surface of the internal lens 723 corresponding to the conical recess 726a. It is composed of a part 726b. The concave lens portion 726 may have a light diffusing function, and the specific cross-sectional shape does not matter.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 116, an upper protruding portion 730 projecting forward is provided between the left and right upper speakers 666a and 666b on the upper portion of the second side unit 668b. That is, as shown in FIGS. 112, 116, 126 to 128, the second side unit 668b has a substantially L-shape in front view that extends from the upper speaker 666a side to the lower speaker 667b via the upper speaker 666b. A unit frame 731 made of synthetic resin, a unit reinforcing plate 732 made of sheet metal for reinforcing the unit frame 731 from the back side, and an upper protruding portion 730 protruding from the upper side to the front side of the unit frame 731 are provided. The first and second positioning means 733 and 734 on both ends of the two-side unit 668b, the first and third locking means 735 and 737 dispersedly arranged, and the screw type first and distributedly arranged screw type first and second. It is detachably attached from the back side of the door base 322 by the first to third fixing means 738 to 740.

The second side unit 668b is provided with an LED 720, a light emitting decorative cover 722, an internal lens 723, and the like on the front side of the vertical base portion 682a of the door base 322. However, since the second side unit 668b has a unit frame 731 and a unit reinforcing plate 732, an LED 720, a light emitting decorative cover 722, an internal lens 723, and the like are provided on the front side of the unit frame 731.

An upper protruding portion 730 projecting forward is provided between the left and right upper speakers 666a and 666b on the upper portion of the second side unit 668b. The space between the upper speaker 666b and the lower speaker 667b of the second side unit 668b has substantially the same configuration as the front side of the first side unit 668a, and the LED 716 is mounted on the front surface thereof. A substrate 717 is arranged, and the light emitting decorative cover 722 is made to emit light by the light from the LED 716.

As shown in FIGS. 116, 123, and 124, the second side unit 668b is provided with an opening 741 corresponding to the speaker mounting protrusion 702b for the upper speaker 666b, and is provided on the side opposite to the opening 741. The end portion is polymerized from the upper side on the speaker mounting protrusion 702b side for the upper speaker 666b. The speaker mounting protrusion 702b can be freely taken in and out of the opening 741, and the upper side wall 741a of the opening 741 can be placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 705d of the speaker mounting protrusion 702b.

The speaker mounting protrusion 702a has a receiving portion 705c for the second side unit 668b, and the end of the second side unit 668b on the speaker mounting protrusion 702a side has a receiving portion 705c as shown in FIG. 122. An overlapping portion 742 that overlaps the portion 705c from above is provided.

If such a configuration is adopted, when the second side unit 668b is mounted on the front side of the door base 322, the speaker mounting protrusion 702b is used as a guide for the opening 741, and the speaker mounting protrusion 702a is used as an overlapping portion. It is possible to work while using each of them for guiding the 742, and the second side unit 668b can be easily arranged at a predetermined mounting position on the door base 322 side.

Further, after the opening 741 and the overlapping portion 742 of the second side unit 668b correspond to the left and right speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b, the second side unit 668b is doord via the speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b. It is possible to perform alignment and the like while depositing it on the base 322 side and supporting substantially the entire load on the second side unit 668b side by the speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b. Therefore, it is not necessary to constantly support the load of the second side unit 668b, and the burden on the worker at the time of mounting can be reduced.

The upper protruding portion 730 has a thin flat shape in the vertical direction, the upper surface thereof is substantially flush with the upper surface of the front door 306, and the left and right central sides project forward in an arc shape or a triangular shape. At the ends of the upper protruding portion 730 on the hinges 303 and 307 sides, a bent portion 732a (see FIG. 121) that bends in an L shape is provided on the front side of the unit reinforcing plate 732 so as not to interfere with the speaker mounting protrusion 702a. ing.

On the front side of the upper protrusion 730, as shown in FIGS. 108, 109, 132 to 134, a light emitting display plate 744 having a blower port 743 formed substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and a light emitting display plate 744 from the blower port 743. Wind guiding means 745 for guiding the wind to the player during the game are provided in the front and rear, and light emitting display plates 744 and light emitting display units 744a are arranged on both left and right sides of the light emitting display plate 744 and the wind guiding means 745. The wind guiding means 745 has a louver structure having a plurality of horizontal rails 745a in the vertical direction and a plurality of vertical rails 745b in the horizontal direction.

The wind guiding means 745 guides the wind to an angle and a range in which any player can experience the blowing from the upper center regardless of the height of the player. The wind guiding means 745 may be configured so that the blowing direction can be adjusted up and down, left and right.

In the upper protruding portion 730, a blowing means 746 that blows air to the blowing port 743 and an LED substrate 748 that has an LED 747 mounted on the front surface and is arranged in the vicinity of the rear corresponding to each light emitting display plate 744 are provided. Has been done. The blower means 746 is a sirocco fan or the like in which the impeller 746b is incorporated in the blower case 746a, and is incorporated in the mounting case 794. The outside air is sucked from the lower suction port 746c and blown from the discharge port 746d. It is designed to be sent to the air outlet 743 via the road 750.

The blower 746 has an impeller 746b that can rotate around the center of the vertical axis and is configured to be flat in the vertical direction. The blower means 746 is adapted to continuously or intermittently operate for a predetermined time to blow air to the player side when the player operates the effect button 813 described later or the like in a predetermined game state. ..

The mounting case 794, the light emitting display plate 744, and the wind guiding means 745 on the front side of the LED substrate 748 have light transmission, and the light emitting display board 744 emits light by the light from the LED 747.

In the upper protruding portion 730, an LED substrate 754 having an LED 753 on the front surface is arranged on the rear side of the light emitting display portion 744a. Each member on the front side of the LED substrate 754 has light transmission property, and the light emitting display unit 744a emits light by the light from the LED 753.

As shown in FIGS. 116 and 122, the first positioning means 733 is arranged on the upper tip side of the second side unit 668b, and the second positioning means 734 is arranged on the lower end side of the second side unit 668b. Has been done. The first positioning means 733 includes a positioning recess 733a formed in the receiving portion 705c of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a and a positioning protrusion 733b formed in the overlapping portion 742 of the end portion of the second side unit 668b. The positioning protrusion 733b and the positioning recess 733a are used to position the upper tip side of the second side unit 668b in the front-rear and left-right directions.

The positioning recess 733a and the positioning protrusion 733b are formed in an L-shape in a plan view on the inner portion of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a. The first positioning means 733 may be provided with a positioning recess 733a in the overlapping portion 742 and a positioning protrusion 733b in the receiving portion 705c. Further, the first positioning means 733 may have another structure.

As shown in FIGS. 135A and 135B, the second positioning means 734 is bent and formed on the lower end side of the unit reinforcing plate 732 and the positioning hole portion 734a formed in the door base 322 or the vertical reinforcing member 685b thereof. The positioning protrusion 734b is provided, and the positioning hole 734a and the positioning protrusion 734b are used to position the lower end side of the side portion of the second side unit 668b in the left-right direction with respect to the door base 322.

As shown by the alternate long and short dash line, there is a vertical margin required for engaging and disengaging each locking means 735-737 between the positioning hole portion 734a and the positioning protrusion portion 734b. The second positioning means 734 may be provided with a positioning hole portion 734a in the unit reinforcing plate 732 and a positioning protrusion 734b in the door base 322. Further, the second positioning means 734 may have another structure.

Therefore, when mounting the second side unit 668b, the second side unit 668b is provided by the plurality of first to third locking means 735-737 and the first to third fixing means 738 to 740 arranged in the intermediate portion. Is fixed to the door base 322, but by providing the first and second positioning means 733 and 734 on both end sides of the second side unit 668b, the left and right positions on both ends of the second side unit 668b can be ensured. Can be regulated. Therefore, there is an advantage that the position shift on the lower end side of the second side unit 668b due to mischief of the player or the like can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are arranged at three locations of the upper tip side, the upper end side of the side portion, and the middle portion of the side portion of the second side unit 668b. The second locking means is provided with locking claws 735a to 737a integrally provided downward on the unit reinforcing plate 732 and hole-shaped locking portions 735b to 737b provided on the vertical reinforcing member 685b. The 736 is provided with clamping means 752.

The protrusion length of each of the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735-737 is maximum for the third locking means 737, and the first locking means 735 and the second locking means 736 It is getting shorter in order. That is, the engaging lengths 735c to 737c between the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735-737 and the locking portions 735b to 737b are such that the engaging length 737c> the engaging length 735c>. The engagement length is 736c.

The engaging lengths 735c to 737c of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are set to the engaging length 737c> the engaging length 735c> the engaging length 736c, and the first to third engaging means are engaged. When the locking claws 735a to 737a of the stopping means 735-737 are engaged with the locking portions 735b to 737b to lock the second side unit 668b to the door base 322, the third locking means 737, the first The first to third locking means 735 to 737 can be sequentially engaged in the order of the locking means 735 and the second locking means 736. Therefore, the locking claws 735a to 737a can be easily engaged with the locking portions 735b to 737b as compared with the case where the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are simultaneously engaged.

The maximum engagement length of any one of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 may be 735c to 737c, and the other two engagement lengths may be substantially the same. For example, the engagement length 737c of the third locking means 737 is maximized, and the engagement lengths 735c and 736c of the first and second locking means 735 and 736 are set to substantially the same length shorter than the engagement length 737c. It is also possible to do. In this case, when mounting the second side unit 668b, each locking means 735-737 moves from the lower third locking means 737 to the upper first and second locking means 735,736. It will be engaged in sequence.

As shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b), the second locking means 736 is compared with other locking means 735 and 737 by arranging a plurality of locking claws 736a and locking portions 736b on the left and right. The clamp means 752 is provided so as to tighten the locking claw 736a after engaging with the locking portion 736b toward the locking portion 736b.

The clamp means 752 has a plan view U-shaped bracket 752a fixed to the vertical reinforcing member 685b under the locking portion 736b, and a plan view inverted U shape pivotally supported around the support shaft 752b by the bracket 752a. Clamp lever 752c and a U-shaped clamp tool 752e that is connected to the middle of the clamp lever 752c by a connecting shaft 752d and engages with the engaging portion 736d on the upper side of the locking claw 736a from above. The clamp lever 752c is provided with an operating portion 752f on the free end side thereof.

When mounting the second side unit 668b, after engaging the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735-737 with the locking portions 735b to 737b, the clamp tool 752e of the clamping means 752 is attached. It is engaged with the engaging portion 736d of the locking claw 736a. Then, the clamp lever 752c is rotated downward around the support shaft 752b, and the connecting shaft 752d is on the vertical reinforcing member 685b side from the line connecting the engagement position of the clamp tool 752e with the locking claw 736a and the support shaft 752b. When the vertical reinforcing member 685b is brought into contact with the vertical reinforcing member 685b, the locking claw 736a of the second locking means 736 is tightened toward the engaging portion 736b in the engaging direction. Therefore, the locking claw 736a of the second locking means 736 is stronger than the other first and third locking means 735 and 737.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent mechanical vibration of the second side unit 668b as compared with the case where the second locking means 736 is only engaged with the engaging portion 736d of the locking claw 736a from above. It is possible to reliably prevent loosening and the like due to vibration of the screw-type first to third fixing means 738 to 740.

As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the first to third fixing means 738 to 740 are arranged at three locations, the upper tip side and the upper and lower end sides of the second side unit 668b. The first to third fixing means 738 to 740 are fixing screws having screw holes 738a to 740a formed in the unit reinforcing plate 732 and operating portions 738b to 740b inserted into the door base 322 from the lateral reinforcing member 684 side. 738c to 740c are provided, and by screwing the fixing screws 738c to 740c into the screw holes 738a to 740a, the unit reinforcing plate 732 is tightened and fixed to the door base 322 side from the back side.

A screw insertion portion 702c is formed in the front-rear direction on the upper protruding portion 730 side of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a on the hinges 303 and 307 side, and a fixing screw 738c is inserted into the screw insertion portion 702c from the unit reinforcing plate 732 side. Has been done. The fixing screw 738c is screwed into the screw hole 738a formed at the tip of the bent portion 732a of the unit reinforcing plate 732 on the rear side of the screw insertion portion 702c.

The first to third fixing screws 738c to 740c are inserted across the horizontal reinforcing member 684 or the vertical reinforcing member 685b and the support members 738d to 740d fixed to the horizontal reinforcing member 684 or the vertical reinforcing member 685b. In addition, retaining members 738e to 740e such as snap rings are provided between the horizontal reinforcing member 684 or the vertical reinforcing member 685b and the support members 738d to 740d. The outer circumference of the fixing screws 738c to 740c on the tip end side is chamfered so as to be easily inserted into the screw holes 738a to 740a and not to be injured by catching fingers or the like.

On the front frame 302 side, as shown in FIG. 140, stepped portions 302a corresponding to the operating portions 739b and 740b of the fixing screws 739c and 740c are inside the outer peripheral wall 302b. When the fixing screws 739c and 740c are tightened, the stepped portion 302a has the fixing screws 739c and 740c even when the front door 306 is closed to the front frame 302 side as shown in FIG. 140 (a). The front door 306 can be closed to the front frame 302 side without interfering with the operation units 739b and 740b.

However, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the front door 306 is to be closed to the front frame 302 side without tightening the fixing screws 739c and 740c, the step portion 302a has the fixing screws 739c, It interferes with the operation units 739b and 740b of the 740c, and a gap is formed between the front frame 302 and the front door 306 so that the door cannot be closed.

Therefore, when the second side unit 668b is mounted, it is possible to prevent an error such as closing the front door 306 toward the front frame 302 side without tightening the fixing screws 739c and 740c of the second and third fixing means 739 and 740. can do. The unit reinforcing plate 732 is integrally formed by punching a sheet metal material into a substantially L-shape in front view, but it may be divided into a plurality of pieces.

The harness (not shown) connected to the blower means 746, LEDs 747, 753, etc. of the second side unit 668b is connected to the inner relay board 755 in the upper protrusion 730, as shown in FIG. 128. A board-side connector 757 is mounted on the inner relay board 755 corresponding to the opening 756 of the unit frame 731 or the unit reinforcing plate 732. As shown in FIG. 141, the unit-side harness 758 detachably connected to the board-side connector 757 extends from the opening 756 to the rear side of the front door 306 via the opening 759 of the door base 322 in a state where a plurality of the harnesses 758 are detachably connected to each other. It has been pulled out.

On the rear side of the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322, an upper relay board 760 that is long in the left-right direction is provided adjacent to the opening 759 at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction. The upper relay board 760 is arranged in a housing recess 761 formed in a narrow portion of the upper base portion 681. Two board-side connectors 762 and 763 are mounted on the upper relay board 760 so as to be rearward, and the connector 758a of the unit-side harness 758 is detachably connected to one of the board-side connectors 762.

The connector 764a of the unit relay harness 764 is detachably connected to the other board-side connector 763. A plurality of relay harnesses 764 for the unit are also put together, and the end portion on the opposite side to the hinges 303 and 307 via the vicinity of the upper side of the upper speaker 666b along the rear upper end of the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322. After being pulled out in the left-right direction, it is pulled out from the opening 766 on the end side to the front side of the door base 322.

As shown in FIG. 111, the unit relay harness 764 on the front side of the door base 322 extends to the vicinity of the upper side of the lower speaker 667b along the edge of the vertical base portion 682b opposite to the hinges 303 and 307 of the door base 322. It is arranged in the vertical direction and is connected to the lower relay board (not shown) on the lower base portion 683 side via the inside of the speaker cover 765b of the lower speaker 667b. The speaker covers 765a and 765b are arranged around the front side of the lower speakers 667a and 667b.

By arranging the relay harness 764 for the unit in the vertical direction on the front side of the door base 322 in this way, a part of the locking means 304 is placed on the back side of the vertical base portion 682b opposite to the hinges 303 and 307 of the door base 322. A vertical reinforcing member 685b that also serves as the above can be arranged. Since the second side unit 668b is detachably arranged on the front side of the unit relay harness 764, maintenance and inspection of the unit relay harness 764 can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 111 and 117, the unit relay harness 764 arranged in the vertical direction on the front side of the vertical base portion 682b of the door base 322 is covered with a protective cover 767 substantially entirely in the vertical direction. The protective cover 767 has an L-shaped cross section, is arranged along the outer peripheral wall 767a of the vertical base portion 682b, and is detachably fixed to the door base 322 by a fixing tool such as a screw.

As shown in FIG. 141, two board-side connectors 769a and 769b are provided at the upper end of the LED board 721 in the first side unit 668a so as to correspond to the opening 768 of the door base 322. The harnesses 770a and 770b detachably connected to the respective board-side connectors 769a and 769b are connected to the LED boards 717a and 717b on the upper speakers 666a and 666b side via the rear side of the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322. There is. The two board-side connectors 769a and 769b are connected to the lower relay board or the like from the lower end side via the wiring pattern of the LED board 721.

On the rear side of the vertical base portion 682a on the hinge 303, 307 side of the door base 322, a speaker relay board 772 is provided in the vicinity of the upper speaker 666a, and the speaker side harnesses 773a, 773b from the upper speakers 666a, 666b, respectively. , The speaker relay harness 774 on the speaker drive source side is connected via the speaker relay board 772.

The speaker relay board 772 is provided with three board-side connectors 775a, 775b, 767, and the two board-side connectors 775a, 775b are provided with speaker-side harnesses 773a, 773b from the upper speakers 666a, 666b, respectively. A speaker relay harness 774 is detachably connected to one board-side connector 776. As shown in FIG. 141, the speaker relay harness 774 is arranged in the vertical direction along the vertical reinforcing member 685a attached to the vertical base portion 682a on the hinge 303, 307 side of the door base 322, and is rearranged by the protective cover 777. Protected from the side.

The speaker relay harness 774 and the protective cover 777 are arranged in the vertical direction between the vicinity of the upper speaker 666a and the vicinity of the lower end of the lower base portion 683. The protective cover 777 has an L-shaped or U-shaped cross section that covers the relay harness 774 for the speaker, is arranged in the vertical direction along the vertical reinforcing member 685a, and is attached to and detached from the back side of the door base 322 by a fixture such as a screw. It is fixed freely.

By providing the speaker relay harness 774 on the back side of the vertical base portion 682a on the hinges 303 and 307 sides of the door base 322 in this way, the speaker relay is relayed regardless of the first side unit 668a on the front side of the vertical base portion 682a. Maintenance and inspection of the harness 774 can be easily performed.

On the rear side of the protective cover 777, as shown in FIG. 142, an insertion blocking portion 777a for preventing the insertion of an illegal member into the inside from between the front door 306 and the front frame 302 has a rib shape protruding rearward. It is provided in. That is, on the hinges 303 and 307 sides of the front frame 302, as shown in FIG. 142, the outer ridge portion 778c and the inner ridge portion 778d are provided on the front wall portion 778b of the main body frame portion 778a in the vertical direction. A sheet metal reinforcing member 778e is provided along the outside of the outer protrusion 778c from the back side of the front wall portion 778b. The reinforcing member 778e has an inner bent portion 778f that bends inward from the front end.

The vertical reinforcing members 685a on the hinges 303 and 307 sides of the door base 322 have a rear bending portion 685a1 that bends rearward along the inner peripheral wall portion 779a of the door base 322 and a rear end of the rear bending portion 685a1. An outer bent portion 685a2 that bends outward is provided over a substantially total length in the vertical direction.

Then, between the front door 306 and the front frame 302, when the front door 306 is closed toward the front frame 302 around the hinges 303 and 307, the outer bent portion 685a2 and the inner peripheral wall portion 779a of the front door 306 are formed. The inner bent portion 778f of the reinforcing member 778e is inserted between them to form a bent maze 780 that prevents the insertion of the illegal member. An outer peripheral wall portion 779c is provided on the outside of the inner peripheral wall portion 779a via an inclined wall portion 779b at the rear end, and the rear end of the light emitting decorative cover 722 is in contact with the front end of the outer peripheral wall portion 779c.

The rear wall portion 777b of the protective cover 777 is equivalent to the outer bent portion 685a2 of the vertical reinforcing member 685a, or protrudes rearward from the outer bent portion 685a2, and then the insertion blocking portion 777a projecting rearward from the wall portion 777b The speakers are arranged in the vertical direction in the entire range from the vicinity of the upper speakers 666a and 666b to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower base portion 683. The insertion blocking portion 777a is ribbed so as to approach the inside of the inner protrusion portion 778d of the front frame 302 when the front door 306 is closed toward the front frame 302. The attachment portion 777c of the protective cover 777 is attached to the door base 322 by a fixing tool such as a screw.

By providing the rib-shaped insertion blocking portion 777a protruding rearward from the rear wall portion 777b of the protective cover 777 inside the vertical reinforcing member 685a in this way, the illegal member is temporarily inserted through the bending maze 780. Even if such a situation occurs, the insertion blocking portion 777a and the inner protrusion portion 778d can prevent further entry of unauthorized members. Further, since the insertion blocking portion 777a is provided on the protective cover 777, it is possible to easily carry out the insertion without the need to significantly change the structure on the front door 306 side.

As shown in FIGS. 113, 121, 124, etc., the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322 includes a part or all of the upper speakers 666a, 666b, harnesses 746,770a, 770b, 773a, 773b, and the relay board 772. A pair of left and right upper back covers 781a and 781b for covering the back side from the back side are detachably provided. The upper back cover 781a on the hinges 303 and 307 sides is provided with a notch 781a1 corresponding to the first fixing means 738 so that the operating portion 738b of the fixing screw 738c of the first fixing means 738 can be operated from the back side. There is. The upper back cover 781b opposite to the hinges 303 and 307 is provided between the substrate side connector 763 of the upper relay board 760 and the clamp means 752 so that the clamp means 752 can be operated.

By providing the upper back covers 781a and 781b in this way, the door base 322 of the front door 306 is compared with the case where the upper speakers 666a, 666b, the harness 746,770a, 770b, 773a, 773b and the relay board 772 are exposed. The appearance of the upper part of the back side of the door can be improved.

On the other hand, the upper relay board 760 side to which the opening 759 formed in the substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the upper base portion 681, that is, the upper base portion 681, and the connector 758a of the unit side harness 758 drawn out from the opening 759 are connected. The upper back covers 781a and 781b are not provided in the portion corresponding to the board-side connector 762. Therefore, the connector 758a of the unit-side harness 758 can be easily attached to and detached from the board-side connector 762 of the upper relay board 760. At the same time, the fixing screw 738c of the first fixing means 738 and the clamping means 752 can also be operated regardless of the upper back covers 781a and 781b. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the trouble of attaching and detaching the upper back covers 781a and 781b each time the second side unit 668b is attached and detached.

Although the upper back covers 781a and 781b are detachable separately on the left and right, it is also possible to connect and integrate the left and right upper back covers 781a and 781b. However, in this case, when the second side unit 668b is attached / detached, the unit side harness 758 is attached to the substrate side connector 762 of the upper relay board 760 in order to attach / detach the left and right integrated upper back covers 781a and 781b. It is necessary to put on and take off.

As shown in FIGS. 108, 109, 111, 112, 116, and 117, the front overhang unit 669 overhangs the front door 306 from the door base 322 to the front side in a substantially triangular shape in a plan view. Is provided. In the front overhanging unit 669, an operation effect means 678 is arranged in the vertical direction on the central front end side thereof, and the upper plate 328 and the lower plate 329 straddle the hinges 303 and 307 from the rear side of the operation effect means 678. Are arranged one above the other, and a small hole group 679 for outputting the sound of the firing handle 330 and the lower speaker 325a to the front side is provided on the opposite side of the upper plate 328 and the lower plate 329 with respect to the operation effect means 678.

As shown in FIG. 112, on the rear side of the lower part of the front door 306, the game balls in the upper plate 328 are moved one by one to the launch means 327 in synchronization with the launch operation of the game balls of the launch means 327. A ball feeding means 680 or the like for feeding is provided.

The outer shape of the front overhanging unit 669 is formed by the lower decorative cover 331 or the like, and the operation means arranging portion 785 for arranging the operation effect means 678 is located on the front side, and both the left and right sides of the operation means arranging portion 785. The left and right front upper edge portions 786a and 786b are arranged rearward from the operating means arranging portion 785, and the lower plate recess 787a is recessed rearward below the front upper edge portions 786a and 786b. And a recess for a handle 787b are provided.

The lower plate recess 787a is provided with a lower plate opening 329a that opens to the front side, and the rear side of the lower plate opening 329a is the lower plate 329. As shown in FIG. 143, the lower plate 329 extends from the vicinity of the hinges 303 and 307 to the rear side of the operation effect means 678 inside the front overhanging unit 669. On the rear wall side of the lower plate 329, an inflow port 329b into which the game ball from the upper plate 328 flows is formed forward. The inflow port 329b is displaced to the rear side of the operation effect means 678 from the lower plate opening 329a.

In the lower plate 329 having such a configuration, it is possible to store the surplus spheres in the back side portion of the operation effect means 678 as compared with the conventional one up to the vicinity of the left side of the operation effect means 678. Sufficient storage can be secured. Further, since the inflow port 329b of the upper plate 328 is displaced to the rear side of the operation effect means 678, the game ball flowing into the lower plate 329 from the inflow port 329b is efficiently moved from the innermost part of the lower plate 329. Can be stored in.

As shown in FIG. 117, the upper plate 328 is open to the upper surface side of the front overhanging unit 669 and extends from the vicinity of the hinges 303 and 307 to the back side of the operation effect means 678 side, and the operation effect means 678. The game ball is supplied to the ball feeding means 680 via the supply passage 328a on the rear side.

The handle recess 787b is provided with a holding cylinder portion 330a for holding the launch handle 330 so that it can be rotated, and the launch handle 330 projecting to the front side of the handle recess 787b can be rotated in the holding cylinder 330a. It is attached to. The launch handle 330 is arranged at a position higher than the lower surface of the front overhang unit 669.

As shown in FIG. 117, on the upper surface side of the front overhanging unit 669, a flat first operation panel portion 782 is provided between the operating means arranging portion 785, the upper plate 328, and the front upper edge portion 786a. A flat second operation panel portion 783 is provided between the 785 and the lower speaker 667b, respectively. A cross operation means 789, a volume adjusting means 790, and a light amount adjusting means 791 are arranged on the first operation panel unit 782.

The cross operation means 789 includes an upper operation key 789a, a lower operation key 789b, a left operation key 789c, and a right operation key 789d arranged on the switch board 792 on the lower side of the first operation panel portion 782. ..

In the cross operation means 789, if the player presses the operation effect means 678 during the menu operation enable period in the customer waiting state, the menu image is displayed on the image display means 393, so that the operation keys 789a, It is used to select and execute any of the selection items in the menu image by appropriately operating any of the lower operation key 789b, the left operation key 789c, and the right operation key 789d.

The volume adjusting means 790 is for adjusting the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b, and includes upper operation keys 790a and lower operation keys 790b arranged in the front and rear, during the volume adjustable period. Pressing the upper operation key 790a raises the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b, and pressing the lower operation key 790b lowers the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b. ..

The light amount adjusting means 791 is for adjusting the light amount of each LED 716, 720, 747, 753, and includes an upper operation key 791a and a lower operation key 791b arranged in the front and rear, and an upper operation key during the light amount adjustable period. When 791a is pressed, the light intensity of each LED 716,720, 747, 753 is increased, and when the lower operation key 791b is pressed, the light intensity of each LED 716, 720, 747, 753 is decreased.

The four operation keys 789a to 789d of the cross operating means 789, the two operating keys 790a and 790b of the volume adjusting means 790, and the two operating keys 791a and 791b of the light amount adjusting means 791 are wiring patterns on the switch board 792. It is configured to be connected in parallel by 1 byte to the receiving side of each signal via the harness from the connector on the lower surface side of the switch board 792.

The four operation keys 789a to 789d of the cross operation means 789, the two operation keys 790a and 790b of the volume adjusting means 790, and the two operation keys 791a and 791b of the light amount adjusting means 791 are individually signaled. May be sent. Further, the switch board 792 is fixed to a board case (not shown), and the board case is detachably fixed to the lower side of the first operation panel portion 782 with screws or the like.

The second operation panel unit 783 has a ball lending operation means 788a for issuing a ball lending command to the ball lending machine, and a return operation for issuing a return command for returning the valuable card inserted into the ball lending machine. Means 788b and ball pulling operation means 788c for pulling out the game ball of the lower plate 329 downward are arranged. The ball pulling operation means 788c opens the ball pulling hole of the upper plate 328 when the pressing operation is performed, and pulls out the game ball of the upper plate 328 to the lower plate 329.

In the front door 306, when the front door 306 is closed toward the front frame 302, the contact wall 698 on the outer periphery of the rear end abuts on the outer periphery of the front end of the front frame 302, as shown in FIG. The bottom wall 793 of the front overhanging unit 669 is composed of a lower portion of the lower decorative cover 331, and has a horizontal portion 793a continuous with the lower end surface of the front door 306 and an inclination inclined forward from the front end of the horizontal portion 793a. It includes a part 793b.

The lower part of the inclined portion 793b of the front overhanging unit 669 on the front end side is a front support portion 794 that touches the ground when the pachinko machine 300 is temporarily placed on the floor surface F in an upright state, and is on the front main body side of the outer frame 301. The pachinko machine 300 on the floor surface F can be raised in a forward tilted state in cooperation with the support portion 795.

The main body side support portion 795 corresponds to a substantially left-right width of the lower front end portion of the outer frame 301, and the front side support portion 794 is abbreviated in the left-right direction of the front overhang unit 669 in front of the main body side support portion 795 in a plan view. It is located in the center and is provided corresponding to substantially the lower side of the operation effect means 678.

When the pachinko machine 300 is temporarily placed on the floor surface F or the like in an upright state, generally, the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 of the outer frame 301 and the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 are placed on the floor surface. Ground on F or the like to make it stand upright. However, when the pachinko machine 300 is tilted forward with the front end side of the main body side support portion 795 as a fulcrum, as shown in FIG. 144, the front side support portion 794 of the lower front end side of the inclined portion 793b comes into contact with the ground. The main body side support portion 795 and the front side support portion 794 can cooperate to support the pachinko machine 300 in a forward leaning posture.

Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the pachinko machine 300 should be on the front side of the main body side support portion 795 and within the range of the plan view triangle of the line segment connecting the left and right ends of the main body side support portion 795 and the front side support portion 794. The maximum range can be secured sufficiently large. Therefore, the stability of the pachinko machine 300 is improved and the pachinko machine 300 is improved in the left-right direction as compared with the case where the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 are grounded and held in an upright state. , There is no such thing as an unstable fall in the front-back direction.

In the pachinko machine 300 in recent years, the back mechanism such as the image display means 393 and the substrate case mounted on the back side of the game board 313 tends to be large and heavy. However, even in such a case, since the front support portion 794 on the front end side of the inclined portion 793b is at a position sufficiently higher than the horizontal portion 793a, the pachinko machine 300 is in a forward leaning posture in which the pachinko machine 300 is sufficiently inclined to the front side. Therefore, the stability of the pachinko machine 300 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 144, the front support portion 794 is arranged on the lower plate 329 on the lower side of the front overhang unit 669 or on the lower side in the vicinity thereof when the pachinko machine 300 is erected in a forward tilted state. It is provided at a height at which other components such as the handle 330 do not come into contact with the ground or the floor surface F or the like.

The horizontal portion 793a is provided with an extraction port 675 for extracting the game ball of the lower plate 329 downward. The extraction port 675 communicates with the extraction portion of the lower plate 329, and is opened when the ball extraction operation means 676 on the front side of the lower plate 329 is operated in the extraction direction to open the game ball in the lower plate 329 to the island facility 796a. It is possible to pull out to the receiving box 796d on the receiving table 796c.

The horizontal portion 793a is approximately half the total amount of protrusion from the front door 306 to the front end of the operating means arranging portion 785, and is substantially flush with the lower surface of the front door 306. The inclined portion 793b is provided so as to be inclined forward from the front side of the horizontal portion 793a, and as shown in FIG. 109, the receiving box 796d can be easily taken in and out of the lower side of the front overhanging unit 669. It has become like.

That is, when the receiving box 796d is taken in and out of the cradle 796c, if there is no inclined portion 793b under the front overhanging unit 669, the gap between the front overhanging unit 669 and the pedestal 796c becomes narrow, and the front overhanging unit It becomes very complicated to put in and take out the receiving box 796d to the lower side of 669. However, by providing the inclined portion 793b that inclines forward upward on the front side of the bottom wall 793 of the front overhanging unit 669, the front lower side of the front overhanging unit 669 becomes open, so that the receiving box 796d on the pedestal 796c It has the advantage of facilitating loading and unloading and other handling.

The front support portion 794 of the front overhanging unit 669 may be higher on the front side than the horizontal portion 793a on the rear end side continuous with the lower end surface of the front door 306, and does not need to be the front end of the inclined portion 793b. For example, if the front lower portion of the front overhang unit 669 is a front support portion 794, the rear side of the front support portion 794 may be stepped or lowered while exhibiting another shape.

The upper plate 328 and the lower decorative cover 331 that form the upper surface side of the front overhanging unit 669 are entirely made of a synthetic resin material having a light-shielding property. The lower decorative cover 331 has an opening portion 797 formed around the operating means arranging portion 785 extending from the upper surface side to the front central portion, and a peripheral cover 798 covering the opening portion 797 from the upper side and the front side. It is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 108, 109, 111, 116, 117, 145 and the like, the peripheral cover 798 is a front cover portion (front perspective portion) arranged in front of the operation effect means 678 so as to be transparent. The 799 and the upper cover portion 800 provided on the rear side from the left and right sides of the operation effect means 678 are provided.

In the peripheral cover 798, as shown in FIGS. 109, 116, 117, 145 to 147, etc., the circular opening 801 in which the operation portion 738b of the operation effect means 678 projects upward is the front cover portion 799. The upper cover portion 800 is provided with an anti-reflection means 804 so as to prevent the light from the operation effect means 678 from being reflected on the glass plate 671a side of the glass unit 340. ..

The front cover portion 799 is made of a transparent synthetic resin having light transmission, and is formed in a substantially arcuate shape from the vicinity of the front side of the operation effect means 678 to the front lower side, and is formed in a substantially U shape in front view. A diffused reflection portion 799b is formed on the back side of the substantially U-shaped outer peripheral edge 799a. On the other hand, the front wall portion of the lower decorative cover 331 is provided with a recess 802 having a substantially U-shape in front view in which the front cover portion 799 is accommodated, and the diffused reflection portion 802b overlaps the step portion 802a on the rear inner peripheral side of the recess 802. ing. The front cover portion 799 is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, and is a perspective portion 799c that allows the operation effect means 678 to be seen through from the front side.

The upper cover portion 800 is made of an opaque synthetic resin having no light transmission, and has a peripheral wall portion 800a formed in a range from the rear side of the operation effect means 678 to the left and right upper sides of the front cover portion 799 via the left and right sides. A pair of left and right projecting portions 800b projecting from the front side of the peripheral wall portion 800a to the left and right sides are provided. The peripheral wall portion 800a rises from the vicinity of the front edge of the upper plate 328 along the operation portion 738b side of the operation effect means 678. The left and right projecting portions 800b are integrated or separate from the peripheral wall portion 800a, one of the projecting portions 800b is provided with a first operation panel portion 782, and the other projecting portion 800b is described later in the operation effect means 678. It is a covering portion that covers the rotation driving means 810 and the like. The lower part of the rear end of the upper cover portion 800 is contained in the front edge side recess of the upper plate 328.

The operation effect means 678 is composed of a push-type operation means capable of light emission effect and movable effect, and is arranged substantially vertically (approximately vertically) in the operation means arrangement portion 785 at the central front end portion of the lower decorative cover 331. , It is detachably fixed on a sheet metal cradle 803 that protrudes forward from the door base 322.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 155, the operation effect means 678 includes a fixed support frame 805 fixed on the pedestal 803, a fixed support member 824 whose both ends are fixed to the fixed support frame 805, and the fixed support. The first rotating body (inner rotating body) 807 rotatably supported around the center of the horizontal axis via the first rotating supporting means 806 on both the left and right sides of the member 824, and the first rotating supporting means 806 are substantially concentric. A second rotating body (outer rotating body) 809 rotatably supported around the center of the horizontal axis via the second rotating supporting means 808 on both the left and right sides, and one of the first rotating supporting means 806 and the second rotating supporting means 808. The rotation driving means 810 for driving the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 in opposite directions via the above, and the first rotation supporting means 806 are fixed to the fixed support frame 805 and fixed to the first rotation. Light emitting means 811 that emits light upward in the body 807, reflecting means 812 fixed upward on the fixed support frame 805 under the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809, and the first rotating body inside. Through the effect button (pressing operating body) 813 that visually covers the rotating state of the 807 and the second rotating body 809 and the light emitting state of the light emitting means 811 and is supported by the fixed support frame 805 so that the pressing operation can be performed, and the buffering means 814. It is provided with a vibration generating means 815 that is mounted on the fixed support frame 805 and vibrates the effect button 813, and a reflecting means 812 that reflects the light from the light emitting means 811 upward.

The operation unit 813a of the effect button 813 projects upward from the opening 801 of the peripheral cover 798, and is arranged so as to overlap the lower side of the game area 323 of the game board 313 in the front-rear direction. The first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 constitute a rotation effect means or a movable effect means. Further, only one of the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 may be used.

The fixed support frame 805 is configured by vertically connecting the upper support frame 816 and the lower support frame 817 made of sheet metal, and the lower support frame 817 is fixed on the pedestal 803 with screws or the like. The upper support frame 816 includes a pair of left and right vertical support portions 816a arranged to face each other on both the left and right sides of the effect button 813, and a connecting portion 816b for connecting the lower end side of the vertical support portion 816a to the left and right. ..

The lower support frame 817 has a connecting portion 817a that is coupled to the lower side of the connecting portion 816b of the upper support frame 816, and left and right that are bent downward from both the left and right sides of the connecting portion 817a and the lower ends are fixed on the pedestal 803. A pair of fixed leg portions 817b, a pair of front and rear lower support portions 817c that bend downward from both front and rear sides of the joint portion 817a to an intermediate height, and each lower support portion 817c that bends downward and onto the pedestal 803. It is provided with a contact leg portion 817d for contact.

The effect button 813 is a push button type made of colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin having light transmission, and has a body portion 813b formed in a substantially cylindrical shape in the vertical direction and upward toward the upper end side of the body portion 813b. The peripheral groove portion 813c formed in the above and the operation portion 813a protruding upward from the peripheral groove portion 813c and curved in a spherical shape are integrally provided, and the lower end of the body portion 813b is the elevating body 813d and the reinforcing plate 813e on the lower side thereof. It is detachably fixed to.

The effect button 813 has a standby position (elevation position) U in which the elevating body 813d abuts on the lower surface of the reflector 812a of the reflection means 812, and a cushioning means in which the reinforcing plate 813e is on the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817. It can move up and down between the pushing position D that is in contact with or close to 814, and is in the standby position by a plurality of urging means 822 interposed between the reinforcing plate 813e and the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817. It is supported by the U side.

The operation unit 813a is formed in a substantially spherical shape or a substantially dome shape so that the entire effect button 813 can secure sufficient strength. The central portion of the operation portion 813a on the top side is a pressing portion 813f, and a display portion 813g for displaying "PUSH" or the like is formed on the inner surface of the pressing portion 813f by embossing or the like.

This is due to the fact that when the pressing portion 813f of the operating portion 813a is pressed, the distortion generated in the peripheral portion of the display unit 813g due to the load applied to the operating portion 813a itself is minimized, and the shape is substantially spherical. This is to improve the durability of the operation unit 813a. The pressing portion 813f of the operating portion 813a may be substantially flat.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, 149, and 150, insertion blocking means 818 for preventing the insertion of an unauthorized member is provided on the outer peripheral side of the operation unit 813a of the effect button 813. The insertion blocking means 818 is arranged inside the peripheral groove portion 813c formed on the outer peripheral side of the operation portion 813a of the effect button 813 and the peripheral cover 798, and is arranged on the upper side of the peripheral groove portion 813c and is on the outer periphery of the operation portion 813a of the effect button 813. It is provided with an insertion blocking cover 818a that is fitted to the side.

The insertion blocking cover 818a is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and has a body portion 818b arranged on the outer periphery of the body portion 813b and a ring-shaped bending inward from the upper end side of the body portion 818b and an operation portion 813a. It has a blocking edge 818c that closes the peripheral groove portion 813c from the upper side on the outer peripheral side of the above. The body portion 818b is attached to the fixed support frame 805 side via the attachment portions 818d on both the left and right sides.

The inner circumference of the blocking edge 818c is arranged close to the lower outer circumference of the spherical operation portion 813a of the effect button 813. Then, in the insertion blocking means 818, when the effect button 813 is located at the standby position U, the outer peripheral portion of the peripheral groove portion 813c is close to or abuts on the lower surface of the blocking edge 818c, and the front portion of the body portion 818b is the peripheral groove portion 813c. It can be approached or contacted from below, and is configured in a maze shape as a whole.

Therefore, when the effect button 813 is located at the standby position U, an illegal member such as a piano wire is inserted through a slight gap between the operation unit 813a of the effect button 813 and the blocking edge 818c of the insertion blocking cover 818a. However, the maze between the peripheral groove portion 813c and the insertion prevention cover 818a prevents the illegal member from entering, and the illegal member is inserted into the operation effect means 678 through the insertion prevention means 818. Can't.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147 and 149, between the effect button 813 and the peripheral cover 798, a front insertion preventing means 820 and a rear insertion preventing means 821 for preventing the insertion of an unauthorized member are provided on the effect button 813. It is provided on both front and rear sides. The front insertion prevention means 820 includes a receiving groove portion 820a formed substantially horizontally in the circumferential direction on the front upper portion of the body portion 813b of the effect button 813, and an insertion blocking cover 818a that is fitted to the receiving groove portion 820a so as to be retractable from above. It is composed of a body portion 818b and is arranged in the left-right direction corresponding to the upper portion of the front cover portion 799.

The receiving groove portion 820a has a front standing portion 820b formed in a band shape in the left-right direction on the front side thereof, and the front standing portion 820b covers the lower end side of the body portion 818b of the insertion blocking cover 818a from the front side. ing. Therefore, the front insertion preventing means 820 constitutes a kind of decorative frame on the upper inner peripheral side of the front cover portion 799.

The rear insertion preventing means 821 is formed on the blocking groove portion 821a formed in a front downward arc shape from the rear upper side of the operating portion 813a to the left and right sides of the peripheral groove portion 813c, and the blocking groove portion 821a formed inside the peripheral cover 798 from above. It is composed of a blocking wall portion 821b that fits freely in and out. The blocking wall portion 821b projects downward from the inner circumference of the opening 801 of the peripheral cover 798.

By providing the front insertion preventing means 820 and the rear insertion preventing means 821 on both the front and rear sides of the effect button 813 in this way, when the effect button 813 is located at the standby position U, the peripheral cover 798 is also provided from the opening 801 side. Illegal members cannot be inserted.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 150, the body portion 813b of the effect button 813 has a notch portion 813h formed corresponding to the pair of left and right first rotation support means 806 and the second rotation support means 808, and each notch. A rib-shaped guided portion 813i in the vertical direction is provided so as to project outward from both the front and rear sides of the portion 813h in the left-right direction. The cut portion 813h is for preventing interference with the first rotation support means 806 and the second rotation support means 808 when the effect button 813 is operated. The guided portions 813i are located on both front and rear sides of the notch portion 813h, are slidably arranged vertically between the guide portions 823a on the support body 823 side on the fixed support frame 805 side, and operate the effect button 813 with the guide portion 823a. It is designed to guide you in the direction.

The support body 823 is fixed to the vertical support portions 816a on both the left and right sides of the fixed support frame 805. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 149, the support 823 is provided with a guided portion 823b projecting to the front side in the vertical direction in addition to the guide portion 823a.

Further, a substantially U-shaped inner see-through portion 813j is formed on the body portion 813b of the effect button 813 corresponding to the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, and diffused reflection is formed on the inner circumference or the outer circumference other than the inner see-through portion 813j. A portion 813k is provided. The diffused reflection portion 813k constitutes an inhibitory portion that inhibits fluoroscopy due to the diffused reflection, such as being formed in a streak shape in the vertical direction.

The effect button 813 is detachably fixed to a disk-shaped elevating body 813d at the lower end of the body 813b and a sheet metal reinforcing plate 813e that reinforces the elevating body 813d from below by fixing means such as screws. .. The reinforcing plate 813e has a U-shape in which a notch 813l corresponding to the connecting portion 817a of the lower support frame 817 is formed, and the fixing pin 822a projecting downward is fixed to the reinforcing plate 813e in the front-rear and left-right directions. Each of the fixing pins 822a is loosely inserted into the through hole 817e of the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817.

As shown in FIG. 153, the urging means 822 includes a coil spring 822b, and the coil spring 822b is fitted into the fixing pin 822a and interposed between the reinforcing plate 813e and the lower support portion 817c. On the lower support portion 817c, regulation portions 817f such as rubber are provided on the left and right positions between the front and rear fixing pins 822a, and when the effect button 813 is pushed to the pushing position D, the effect button is passed through the reinforcing plate 813e. It is supposed to receive 813.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 148, the light emitting means 811 is arranged inside the spherical first rotating body 807, and both ends are fixed to the fixed support frame 805 via the fixed support member 824. From the substrate support 811a, the LED substrate 811b mounted on the upper side of the substrate support 811a, a large number of LEDs (light emitters) 811c mounted upward on the upper surface of the LED substrate 811b, and the LED 811c. A diffuser plate 811d that diffuses light by diffused reflection and a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 811e mounted downward on the lower surface on the front side of the LED substrate 811b are provided, and the light is directed upward under predetermined light emission conditions by a light emission effect command from the outside. LED811c emits light upward and LED811e downward emits light downward to irradiate the inner peripheral surface of the first rotating body 807 with light.

The substrate support 811a is made of a synthetic resin having no light transmission, and tubular fixed support members 824 are integrally provided on both the left and right sides, and the tip end side of the fixed support member 824 is attached to the support 823 of the fixed support frame 805. It is detachably fixed with a fixing tool such as a screw.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 148 and 154, each fixed support member 824 has a tubular portion 824a in the left-right direction and a mounting portion 824b having a U-shaped cross section provided on the outer end side of the tubular portion 824a. Each mounting portion 824b is detachably fixed on the support 823 by a fixing tool 827d such as a screw. Since the attachment portion 827d has a U-shaped cross section and an open upper side, the fixture 827d can be attached and detached from the open side.

The LED substrate 811b and the diffusion plate 811d are laminated on the substrate support 811a and fixed to be detachably attached. The upward LED 811c is dispersedly arranged over substantially the entire LED substrate 811b, and the diffuser plate 811d is arranged on the upper side of the LED substrate 811b so as to face each other. The diffuser plate 811d has a gently spherical outer peripheral surface, and is provided with a diffused reflection portion 811f that diffuses the light from the upward LED 811c by diffused reflection. The diffused reflection portion 811f has a fine reflecting surface formed in a mosaic shape, and diffusely reflects the light from the LED 811c so that substantially the entire surface thereof emits light.

The downward LED 811e is arranged on the peripheral edge portion on the front side of the LED substrate 811b at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and irradiates the light downward through the through holes 811g formed in the substrate support 811a. .. The substrate support 811a is provided with a semicircular partition plate 811k protruding downward so as not to diffuse the light from the downward LED 811e to the rear side inside the first rotating body 807 at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction. ing.

A connector 811h connected to each of the LEDs 811c and 811e via a circuit pattern is provided on the lower side of the LED substrate 811b, and a harness 811i for the LEDs 811c and 811e from the outside is provided from inside one of the tubular fixed support members 824. It is connected to the connector 811h via the insertion hole 811j of the substrate support 811a.

In addition to the harness 811i for LEDs 811c and 811e being inserted through the fixed support member 824, a harness (not shown) for the second position detecting means 829, which will be described later, is inserted across the left and right fixed support members 824. ing.

The reflecting means 812 has a reflecting plate 812a detachably fixed on the connecting portion 816b of the upper support frame 816 on the upper side of the elevating body 813d, and a reflecting portion (mirror surface portion) provided in a mirror surface on the upper side of the reflecting plate 812a. ) 812b and the like. On the outer peripheral side of the reflecting means 812, a gap between the rotating bodies 807 and 809 and the reflecting means 812 is provided outside the reflecting portion 812b so that the outer peripheral side of the reflecting means 812 cannot be seen from the transparent portion 799c of the front cover portion 799. A surrounding wall 812c is provided to close the wall. The surrounding wall 812c is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is provided so as to extend upward from both the left and right sides of the reflective portion 812b to the rear side. The surrounding wall 812c is formed in a wavy shape in the circumferential direction. The reflective portion 812b may be coated in the form of a thin film, or may be attached in the form of a sheet.

The elevating body 813d has a notch 813m so as not to buffer the connecting portion 816b of the upper support frame 816, and the connecting portion 816b is located in the notch 813m so that the reflecting plate 812a of the reflecting means 812 It can abut on the lower side.

The first rotating body 807 has a substantially spherical shape, and as shown in FIGS. 145 to 148 and 151, the first rotating body 807 is configured by connecting the first hemisphere 807a and the second hemisphere 807b divided into two in the rotation direction. Has been done. The first and second hemispheres 807a and 807b are provided with mosaic-like diffused reflection portions 807c and 807d on substantially the entire inner peripheral surface, the first hemisphere 807a is colorless and transparent, and the second hemisphere 807b is red. It is configured to play different production modes such as coloring and transparency.

Therefore, if the first rotating body 807 rotates around the axis of the first rotation supporting means 806 in the left-right direction and the internal light emitting means 811 emits light, the light from the light emitting means 811 diffuses through the diffuser plate 811d. However, since the first hemisphere 807a and the second hemisphere 807b are diffusely reflected by the diffusely reflecting portions 807c and 807d on the inner circumference, the first rotating body 807 intermittently repeats colorless transparent light emission and red light emission as the rotation occurs. Can be done. The first rotating body 807 may be divided into a plurality of parts other than the two parts.

The first and second hemispheres 807a and 807b of the first rotating body 807 have attachment portions 807e and 807f on both sides in the left-right direction, and the attachment portions 807e and 807f are attached to the left and right first rotation support means 806. There is. The first rotation support means 806 is integrally provided with a pair of left and right first cylinder shafts 806a rotatably fitted around the outer periphery of the tubular portions 824a of the left and right fixed support members 824, and the first cylinder shaft 806a. It also has a first flange portion 806b.

The first flange portion 806b is in contact with the outer surfaces of the attachment portions 807e and 807f of the first and second hemispheres 807a and 807b, and the attachment portions 807e and 807fd are attached to the first collar portion 806b by a fixing tool such as a screw. Is detachably fixed. Of the pair of left and right first cylinder shafts 806a, the first cylinder shaft 806a on the rotation driving means 810 side is longer in the axial direction than the first cylinder shaft 806a on the opposite side, and the first on the outer end side thereof. The driven gear 819a is detachably fixed in the axial direction, and the first flange portion 806b is integrally provided on the other end side. The first tubular shaft 806a on the opposite side has a short length in the axial direction, and the first flange portion 806b is integrally provided on the outer end side thereof.

The second rotating body 809 is an annular shape, and as shown in FIGS. 145 to 148 and 151, the first semiring body 809a and the second semiring body 809b divided in the rotation direction are combined. It is configured and is rotatably supported around the axis of the first rotating body 807 by the second rotating supporting means 808. The first and second semirings 809a and 809b are provided in the intermediate portion between the half-split boss-shaped mounting portions 809c and 809d provided on the left and right ends and the mounting portions 809c and 809d, and are provided around the axial center. It has divided portions 809e and 809f that are divided in a plurality of directions. The second rotating body 809 has a light-shielding property and is decorated with metal plating or the like. Further, the second rotating body 809 may be divided into a plurality of parts other than the two parts.

In the first and second semiring bodies 809a and 809b of the second rotating body 809, the attachment portions 809c and 809d on both sides in the left-right direction are supported by the second rotation supporting means 808 on both the left and right sides. The second rotation support means 808 has a pair of left and right second cylinder shafts 808a and a second flange portion 808b integrally provided on the second cylinder shaft 808a. The second flange portion 808b is in contact with the attachment portions 809c and 809d of the first and second semiring bodies 809a and 809b from the outside, and the attachment portions 809c and 809d are attached to the second flange portion 808b by a fixing tool such as a screw. It is detachably fixed.

Of the pair of left and right second cylinder shafts 808a, the second cylinder shaft 808a on the rotation driving means 810 side is longer in the axial direction than the second cylinder shaft 808a on the opposite side. The second cylinder shaft 808a on the rotary drive means 810 side is provided with a second flange portion 808b on the inner end side thereof and a second driven gear 819b on the outer end side, respectively, and the first driven gear 819a and the first driven gear 819a are provided. It is rotatably fitted around the axis of the first rotation support means 806 with the collar portion 806b. A second flange portion 808b is integrally provided on the opposite side of the second tubular shaft 808a, and is rotatably fitted around the axial center on the tubular portion 824a of the fixed support member 824 on the outside of the first tubular shaft 806a. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 152, 154, and 155, the rotary drive means 810 connects the drive motor 810a, which is a drive source, and the first rotation support means 806 and the second rotation support means 808 by driving the drive motor 810a. A gear row 819 for rotating the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 in opposite directions is provided. The drive motor 810a is composed of a stepping motor and other motors, and is mounted on the outside of the lower mounting plate 826 of the support 823 fixed to the vertical support portion 816a of the upper support frame 816.

The drive shaft 810b of the drive motor 810a penetrates the inside of the mounting plate 826 and is interlocked with the gear row 819 arranged inside the support 823. The gear row 819 includes a drive gear 819c fixed to the drive shaft 810b, a first driven gear 819a on the first rotation support means 806 side that meshes with the drive gear 819c, an intermediate gear 819d that meshes with the drive gear 819c, and an intermediate gear. It is provided with a second driven gear 819b on the second rotation support means 808 side that meshes with the 819d. The intermediate gear 819d is rotatably fitted to the intermediate shaft 819e integrated with the support 823. The support 823 is provided with a protective cover 819f that surrounds the outer periphery of the gear row 819.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the support 823 on the rotation driving means 810 side is provided with a support recess 823c on which the mounting portion 824b of the fixed support member 824 is accommodated, and is arranged in the mounting portion 824b. The mounting portion 824b is detachably fixed in the support recess 823c via the reinforcing means 827.

The reinforcing means 827 reinforces the attachment portion 824b on the rotation drive means 810 side of the fixed support member 824, and the fixed support member 824 is being driven by the rotation drive means 810 via the gear row 819 to drive the rotating bodies 807 and 809. This is for allowing the mounting portion 824b to sufficiently withstand the external force even when an external force is applied to the mounting portion 824b side.

Therefore, by reinforcing the mounting portion 824b with the reinforcing means 827, distortion, deformation, etc. of the mounting portion 824b during rotation of the rotating bodies 807 and 809 by the rotation driving means 810 can be prevented, and the gear row 819 is disengaged and meshed. It is possible to prevent step-out and the like.

The reinforcing means 827 is provided with a sheet metal reinforcing member 827a bent along the inner surface shape of the mounting portion 824b, and front and rear of the mounting portion 824b having a U-shaped cross section and protruding from the upper end of the reinforcing member 827a to both front and rear sides. A pressing member 827b that presses both sides from above and a pressing member 827c arranged in the reinforcing member 827a are provided, and a fixing tool 827d such as a screw that penetrates the pressing member 827c and is screwed into the fixing portion 823d of the support 823. , The attachment portion 824b of the fixed support member 824 is pressed against the support recess 823c side of the support body 823 to reinforce it.

The reinforcing member 827a and the pressing member 827c are larger than the length in the left-right direction of the mounting portion 824b having a U-shaped cross section of the fixed support member 824, and the tip thereof is inserted into the tubular portion 824a of the fixed support member 824. There is. The pressing member 827c is chamfered with an insertion portion 827e for forming a harness insertion portion between the holding member 827c and the end side of the tubular portion 824a so as not to damage the harness 811i in the tubular portion 824a of the fixed support member 824. It is provided in a shape. The lengths of the reinforcing member 827a and the pressing member 827c may be substantially the same as or slightly longer than the length of the mounting portion 824b in the left-right direction. Of course, the lengths of the reinforcing member 827a and the pressing member 827c may be slightly shorter than the length of the mounting portion 824b.

Two first position detections that detect the position of the first rotating body 807 on both front and rear sides of the fixed support member 824 sandwiched between the support 823 on the rotation driving means 810 side and the first rotation supporting means 806. Means 828a and 828b are provided.

The first position detecting means 828a, 828b correspond to the non-contact type first detection switches 828c, 828d such as a photo sensor fixed to the support 823, and the first detection switches 828c, 828d. It is provided with the first detected portions 828e and 828f fixed to the two driven gears 819a and 819b, and at the time of the movable effect by the rotation of the first rotating body 807, every 1/2 rotation of the first rotating body 807 is performed. The rotation position is detected by the one-position means means 828a and 828b. The first rotating body 807 is normally stopped with the colorless and transparent first hemisphere 807a facing upward.

A second position detecting means 829 for detecting the position of the second rotating body 809 is provided between the support 823 on the opposite side of the rotation driving means 810 and the second rotation supporting means 808. The second position detection means 829 is fixed to a non-contact type second detection switch 829a such as a photo sensor fixed to the support 823 and a second rotation support means 808 corresponding to the second detection switch 829a. The second rotating body 829b is provided, and the second rotating body 809 is detected for each rotation at the time of the movable effect by the rotation of the second rotating body 809. The second rotating body 809 is stopped in a state where the first and second semiring bodies 809a and 809b are substantially horizontal and are located on both front and rear sides of the first hemisphere 807a.

By forming the left and right mounting portions 824b of the fixed support member 824 in a U-shaped cross section in this way, the fixture 827d is inserted into the mounting portion 824b from above, and the fixture 827d is operated from above with a tool or the like. Since it can be fixed while being fixed, the left and right end sides of the fixed support member 824 can be easily fixed to each support 823. Further, on the rotation driving means 810 side, by providing the reinforcing means 827 that reinforces the mounting portion 824b having a U-shaped cross section from the inside and fixes it to the support 823, the mounting portion is provided during the rotation of the rotating bodies 807 and 809. Even if an abnormal external force is applied to the 824b, it is possible to prevent the mounting portion 824b having a U-shaped cross section from buckling, distortion, deformation, or the like due to other factors.

Therefore, if buckling or the like occurs on the mounting portion 824b side of the fixed support member 824 on the rotation driving means 810 side, the tuning state of the rotating bodies 807 and 809 is deviated due to step-out or the like in which the meshing state of the gear row 819 is disturbed. However, even though the mounting portion 824b has a U-shaped cross section, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of such a problem.

A relay board mounting base 830a is provided straddling the mounting plate 826 of the support body 823 on the rotation driving means 810 side and the contact leg portion 817d of the lower support frame 817, and the relay board mounting base 830a is provided with the relay board 830b. Is installed. In addition to the connector for the external circuit, the relay board 830b has a connector for the drive motor 810a, a connector for the first position detecting means 828a and 828b, a connector for the LED, a connector for the second position detecting means 829, and vibration generation. A connector or the like for the means 815 is provided, and the drive motor 810a on the operation effect means 678 side, each position detection means 828a, 828b, 829, the LED, the vibration generating means 815, etc. are externally produced via the relay board 830b. It is connected to the control means.

The vibration generating means 815 is for vibrating the effect button 813 in the front-back and left-right directions, and is a vibration body made of synthetic resin attached to the lower side of the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817 via the buffer means 814. The 815a, the vibration motor 815b housed in the vibration body 815a, and the eccentric weight 815d fixed to the rotating shaft 815c of the vibration motor 815b are provided, and the vibration of the vibration body 815a is transmitted through the vibration transmission means 831 to the effect button 813. It is designed to be transmitted to. The vibration motor 815b is mounted on the vibrating body 815a from below via the mounting base 815e.

The vibrating body 815a is attached to the lower side of the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817 via a shock absorber 814c, so that the vibration of the vibrating body 815a is absorbed as much as possible and not transmitted to the lower support frame 817 side. A buffer means 814 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 157, the cushioning means 814 is arranged at both ends of the vibrating body 815a, and has a gripping edge 814b formed in the notch portion 814a of the vibrating body 815a and both upper and lower sides of the gripping edge 814b. A buffer body 814c such as rubber, a support pin 814d that protrudes downward from the lower support portion 817c and is inserted into the upper and lower buffer bodies 814c without contacting the gripping edge 814b, and a screw 814g or the like fixed to the lower end of the support pin 814d. A receiving plate 814e that receives the buffer 814c from below is provided, and the buffer 814c is interposed between the holding portion 814f of the support pin 814d and the receiving plate 814e.

The shock absorber 814c has a peripheral groove 814h in the middle in the vertical direction, and the gripping edge 814b is engaged with the peripheral groove 814h. The buffer body 814c may be divided into upper and lower parts, and the gripping edge 814b may be gripped by the upper and lower buffer bodies 814c.

Regardless of the structure of the shock absorber 814c, the vibration transmitted to the lower support frame 817 side of the vibrating body 815a can be absorbed by the shock absorber 814c by appropriately selecting the material of the shock absorber 814c. .. Therefore, in order to absorb the vibration as much as possible, it is desirable to soften the material of the buffer body 814c within a range that does not hinder the stability of the support of the vibrating body 815a.

As shown in FIG. 153, the vibration transmitting means 831 is formed on the front and rear, left and right fixing pins 822a, which are fixed so as to project downward from the reinforcing plate 813e, and on the vibrating body 815a side corresponding to each fixing pin 822a. The fixing pin 822a is provided with a transmission hole 831a through which a predetermined gap is inserted. The four transmission holes 831a of the vibrating body 815a have a long hole shape with a large gap in a specific direction with respect to the fixing pin 822a, and the gap between the fixing pin 822a and the transmission hole 831a is different. The conditions of the 822a and the corresponding transmission hole 831a are different, and the vibration of the vibrating body 815a in the horizontal plane direction is transmitted to the effect button 813 under different conditions for each fixing pin 822a.

An operation detecting means 833 for detecting the pressing operation of the effect button 813 is provided between the elevating body 813d and the lower support frame 817. The operation detection means 833 includes a non-contact detection switch 833b such as a photo sensor fixed to the lower support frame 817 via a mounting frame 833a, and a cover projecting downward from the elevating body 813d corresponding to the detection switch 833b. It is provided with a detection unit 833c, and detects the operation of the effect button 813 when the detected unit 833c approaches the detection switch 833b.

Positioning means 834 for positioning the operation effect means 678 at the mounting position is provided in the front-rear direction between the operation effect means 678 and the operation means arrangement portion 785. The positioning means 834 is arranged in the vicinity of the positioning hole 834a formed on the lower side of the bottom wall 793 of the pedestal 803 or the front overhang unit 669 and the front and rear fixed legs 817b of the lower support frame 817, and is inserted into the positioning hole 834a. It has a positioning protrusion 834b to be formed. The fixed leg portion 817b is detachably fixed to the cradle 803 from below by a fixing tool such as a screw.

The operation means arranging unit 785 covers and shields the operation effect means 678 from the rear side so that the internal mechanism behind the operation effect means 678 cannot be seen when the inside is viewed through the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799. A shielding plate 840 is provided, and when the operation effect means 678 is inserted into the operation means arrangement portion 785 from above, the front guide means 838 that guides the front side of the operation effect means 678 and the rear side of the operation effect means 678. The rear guidance means 839 for guiding the vehicle is provided on both the front and rear sides.

As shown in FIGS. 143, 146, and 156, the shielding plate 840 has an arc shape formed in an arc shape with a predetermined distance from the body portion 813b, and is formed after the effect button 813. It is arranged in the vertical direction between the cradle 803 and the vicinity of the front side of the upper plate 328 on the side, and is fixed to the front surface of the door base 322. The shielding plate 840 is provided corresponding to the upper portion from the elevating body 813d of the effect button 813, and corresponds to at least a range that can be seen through the perspective portion 799c when the inside is viewed through the perspective portion 799c of the front cover portion 799. You just have to.

Therefore, even when the body portion 813b of the effect button 813 is seen through from the perspective portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, the internal mechanism on the rear side cannot be seen, so that the appearance can be improved. Further, on the front side of the body portion 813b of the effect button 813, there is a substantially U-shaped inner perspective portion 813j corresponding to the perspective portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, but a portion other than the inner perspective portion 813j in the body portion 813b. Since the diffused reflection portion 813k is provided in the above, it is difficult to see through the shielding plate 840 due to the diffused reflection portion 813k.

As shown in FIG. 143, the front guide means 838 is provided on both the left and right sides of the front cover portion 799 on the front side of the operation means arrangement portion 785 in the vertical direction, and is provided with the guided portion 823b protruding forward from the support 823. It is provided inside the lower decorative cover 331 and includes a groove-shaped guide portion 838a that guides the guided portion 823b in the vertical direction. The front guiding means 838 has a sufficient margin so as not to hinder the positioning by the positioning means 834.

The rear guiding means 839 includes a shielding plate 840 on the rear side of the operating means arranging portion 785, a bent edge 839a that bends downward from the rear side of the elevating body 813d, and a pair of left and right that protrudes rearward from both the left and right sides of the bent edge 839a. The guide portion 839b of the ridge in the vertical direction is provided, and when the operation effect means 678 is inserted into the operation means arrangement portion 785, the bent edge 839a or the guide portion 839b is guided downward along the shielding plate 840. It has become.

When the operation effect means 678 is assembled to the operation means arrangement unit 785, the operation effect means 678 is inserted into the operation means arrangement unit 785 from above with the peripheral cover 798 removed and the upper side of the operation means arrangement unit 785 open. To do. At this time, the operation effect means 678 is set to a substantially vertical state or a forward tilted state in which the upper side is slightly tilted forward, and after the guide portion 838a and the guided portion 823b of the front guide means 838 are combined, the rear guide means 839 is bent. The edge 839a or the guide portion 839b is inserted while sliding along the shielding plate 840.

While positioning the operation effect means 678 to a predetermined mounting position of the positioning means 834, the fixed leg portion 817b of the operation effect means 678 is brought into contact with the pedestal 803. Then, when the fixed leg portion 817b comes into contact with the pedestal 803, a fixing tool such as a screw is inserted from the lower side of the pedestal 803 to fix the fixed leg portion 817b on the pedestal 803.

After fixing the operation effect means 678 on the cradle 803, the peripheral cover 798 may be attached. Further, the bottom wall 793 may be provided with an opening for operating the fixture so as to close the opening after the fixture is operated.

By providing a pair of left and right front guide means 838 on the front side of the operation effect means 678 and providing the rear guide means 839 on the rear side in this way, even if the operation effect means 678 becomes large, the operation effect means 678 can be easily provided. It can be easily inserted into the operating means arranging unit 785. In addition, the work of removing the operation effect means 678 from the operation means arrangement portion 785 can be easily performed.

The operation effect means 678 having such a configuration is provided for an operation effect or the like that is executed with a predetermined probability for each change period of the special symbol. For example, when the operation effect determining means determines the operation effect, the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 rotate in the opposite directions and stop at a predetermined operation effect position according to the operation effect pattern, so that the image display means 393 If the player operates the effect button 813 in the designated operation mode within the operation valid period in which the operation instruction image is displayed, the effect at the time of a predetermined operation is executed according to the stop result of the special symbol after the change.

There are three types of operation effect patterns, that is, the first operation effect, the second operation effect, and the third operation effect, and the operation effect uses the rotation stop patterns of the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809. It has become. The first operation effect is an operation effect executed when the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 in the effect button 813 are stopped at the first operation effect position, and the operation is effective during the first operation effect. When the player operates the effect button 813 in the specified operation mode (for example, pressing it once) within the period, the background color of the image display means 393 is changed to blue "blue background effect" and the effect button is changed to red "red". In addition to changing the background color of the image display means 393, the LEDs 100a and 100b are made to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern.

The second operation effect is an operation effect executed when the first hemisphere 807a of the first rotating body 807 in the effect button 813 is turned upward but stopped at the second effect operation position, and this second operation effect. When the player operates the effect button 813 in the specified operation mode (for example, once pressed) within the operation valid period of the inside, the LED in the first rotating body 807 is blinked by sequentially shifting the timing in the circumferential direction. It has become.

The third operation effect is an operation effect executed when the second hemisphere 807b of the first rotating body 807 in the effect button 813 is stopped at the third operation effect position facing upward, and during this third operation effect. When the player operates the effect button 813 in the designated operation mode (for example, once pressed) within the operation valid period of, the button vibration effect in which the vibration generating means 815 vibrates the effect button 813 is the result of the change of the special symbol and the effect. It is executed with a predetermined probability according to the type of profit state and the like.

The first operation effect, the second operation effect, and the third operation effect are set so that the expectation that the special symbol after the change becomes a specific mode (big hit) is high in that order. The effect mode at the time of the operation effect performed by using the operation effect means 678 is arbitrary, and is not limited to the first operation effect, the second operation effect, and the third operation effect. The operation of the effect button 813 is also "press once" to operate only once, "continuous hit" to operate the effect button 813 multiple times in succession, and "long press" to maintain the operation state of the effect button 813 for a predetermined time or longer. There is an operation mode such as.

The reflection preventing means 804 is for preventing the light from the light emitting operation effect means 678 from being reflected on the glass plate 671a, and is as shown in FIGS. 109, 117, 145, and 147. , Is arranged between the glass plate 671a and the effect button 813 of the operation effect means 678, and has an anti-reflection wall 804a configured by utilizing all or a part of the peripheral wall portion 800a, and has the operation effect means 678. It is provided so as to straddle the rear side from both the left and right sides of the.

In the case of the operation effect means 678 exemplified in this embodiment, since the diffused reflecting portions 807c and 807d of the first rotating body 807 diffusely reflect the light from the light emitting means 811 and emit light, the highest level of the first rotating body 807 is emitted. Will constitute the light emitting part of. Therefore, when it is assumed that the height of the eye I of the player sitting on the chair in front of the pachinko machine 300 is the position shown in FIG. 158, the reflection prevention means 804 sets the line of sight from the height of the eye I in the direction indicated by the Z arrow. Even when the operation effect means 678 side is viewed through the glass plate 671a, the player's field of view up to the first rotating body 807 is blocked between the glass plate 671a and the first rotating body 807, and the light emitting unit. The first rotating body 807 is kept out of the player's field of view.

The peripheral wall portion 800a of the upper cover portion 800 extends from both ends of the rear cover portion 800c to the front cover portion 799 side, and the rear cover portion 800c that is inclined to the front side corresponding to the rear side of the operation portion 813a of the effect button 813. The left and right cover portions 800d are provided, and the upper end side is formed in an inclined shape that is lowered from the rear side of the operation effect means 678 to both the left and right sides so that the height of the back cover portion 800c is higher than that of the left and right cover portions 800d. ..

Then, among the peripheral wall portions 800a including the back covering portion 800c and the left and right covering portions 800d, the required range corresponding to the rear side of the operation portion 813a of the effect button 813 reflects on the glass plate 671a of the first rotating body 807. The reflection prevention wall 804a is used to prevent reflection, and the reflection prevention wall 804a constitutes the reflection prevention means 804.

For example, the height relationship between the apex of the first rotating body 807 and the apex of the back covering portion 800c of the peripheral wall portion 800a is as shown in FIG. 158, the apex of the first rotating body 807 and the apex of the back covering portion 800c. At the intersection 671aa where the passing line segment X1 intersects the front surface of the glass plate 671a, when the line segment X1 and the line segment X2 point-symmetrical above and below the vertical line Y perpendicular to the front surface of the glass plate 671a are considered, that line segment The line of sight of the player is set to be located in the area X below the extension of the minute X2.

Therefore, even when the player during the game looks down at the operation effect means 678 through the glass plate 671a in the light emitting state of the first rotating body 807, the first rotating body 807 in the operation effect means 678 The light is blocked by the reflection preventing means 804 in the vicinity of the rear side, and it is possible to prevent the light of the first rotating body 807 from being reflected on the glass plate 671a.

Therefore, the player during the game can easily and surely grasp the display image displayed on the lower side of the display screen of the image display means 393 of the game board 313. Further, even if there is a variable winning means 404 or other important winning means in or near the reflection area in the lower part of the game area 323, the situation of the important winning means or the like should be easily and surely grasped. There is an advantage that can be done.

Further, the reflection prevention wall 804a is composed of a peripheral wall portion 800a on the outer peripheral side of the operation portion 813a of the operation effect means 678, and the upper end edge thereof is formed on both the left and right sides from the rear cover portion 800c on the rear side of the operation portion 813a of the operation effect means 678. By forming the left and right covering portions 800d so as to be inclined downward, the operability of the operating portion 813a is not impaired.

The reflection preventing means 804 may be only the back covering portion 800c as long as it can prevent the reflection of the operation effect means 678 on the glass unit 340 side. Further, the reflection preventing means 804 may be made of a synthetic resin having light transmittance, and a coating or other light-shielding portion may be provided on the surface thereof.

In this embodiment, the operation unit 813a of the operation effect means 678 projects upward from the upper surface side of the lower decorative cover 331, and the operation unit 813a is arranged at a position overlapping with the game area 323 in the front view. The reflection prevention wall 804a is arranged on the glass plate 671a side of the operation unit 813a at a position overlapping the game area 323 in the front view, and is inclined forward along the spherical operation unit 813a.

The reflection prevention wall 804a is higher than the light emitting portion of the first rotating body 807 that diffusely reflects the light of the light emitting means 811 and the light emitting means 811 on the game board 313 side of the operation unit 813a of the operation effect means 678. The upper end is located at the position. The reflection prevention wall 804a may be located at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means 811 or the like on the game board 313 side of the operating unit 813a of the operating effect means 678 and lower than the operating unit 813a. However, when the operation unit 813a emits light due to diffused reflection or the like, it is necessary to arrange the reflection prevention wall 804a at a position higher than the operation unit 813a.

Even if there is a wall portion for preventing reflection, important game parts such as the variable winning means 404 and the special symbol starting means 655 are located at the positions corresponding to the operation portion 813a in the front view of the game board 313. It is desirable not to place.

Further, in the embodiment, the operation effect means 678 having the LED type light emitting means 811 is illustrated as an object in which the reflection becomes a problem, but other than the operation effect means 678 may be used.

FIG. 159 illustrates a sixth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 159, the pachinko machine 300 includes an effect operating means 835 for effect operation, which is arranged at an upper center portion of the front overhang unit 669 so as to be inclined forward. The effect operating means 835 includes a light emitting operation member 836 that can be pressed in an inclined direction and an outer peripheral cover 837 that presses the outer circumference of the light emitting operating member 836 on the front overhanging unit 669, and is provided on the game board 313 side via the glass unit 340. It is arranged so as to overlap the lower side of the game area 323 and the front and back.

The light emitting operating member 836 has a flat operating portion 836a having light transmission formed at the upper end thereof, and a diffused reflecting portion 836b formed on the inner surface of the operating portion 836a. An LED substrate 836d provided with an LED 836c on the upper surface is provided on the lower side of the operation unit 836a, and when the LED 836c emits light, the light from the LED 836c is diffusely reflected by the diffused reflection unit 836b so that the operation unit 836a emits light. It has become.

The outer peripheral cover 837 has a peripheral wall portion 837a that surrounds the operating portion 836a, and the peripheral wall portion 837a has a low front wall portion 837b that is the front side of the operating portion 836a, and the operating portion 836a and the glass unit 340 are behind the operating portion 836a. The rear wall portion 837c side located between and is higher.

The reason why the front wall portion 837b of the peripheral wall portion 837a is low is to facilitate the operation from the front side of the operation portion 836a. Of the front wall portion 837b and the rear wall portion 837c, at least the rear wall portion 837c side arranged on the rear side of the operation portion 836a has a spherical shape toward the front side along the shape of the operation portion 836a of the light emitting operation member 836. It is inclined to.

The operation unit 836a of the light emitting operation member 836 overlaps the lower side of the game area 323 on the game board 313 side in the front-rear direction. Further, in the lower side of the game area 323 of the game board 313, in the part corresponding to the rear side of the operation unit 836a, an out ball port 842 for guiding the out ball to the back side of the game board 313 is arranged, and the like is compared. Insignificant game parts are arranged, and important game parts such as winning means are not arranged. As for the winning means, those having a small number of prize balls at the time of winning, such as the ordinary winning means 405, may be arranged.

Of the light from the operation unit 836a when the light from the LED 836c or the light from the LED 836c is diffusely reflected and emitted, the light from the LED 836c when the LED 836c emits light is reflected on the glass plate 671a on the wall portion 837c side. It constitutes an anti-reflection means 804 that prevents the reflection from being included.

The upper end of the reflection prevention means 804 is arranged at a position higher than the LED substrate 836d and lower than the operation unit 836a on the game board 313 side of the operation unit 836a. The upper end of the reflection prevention means 804 may be arranged on the game board 313 side of the operation unit 836a at a position higher than the LED substrate 836d and higher than the operation unit 836a.

As illustrated in this embodiment, the effect operating means 835 can also be arranged in a forward tilted state on the upper side of the front overhang unit 669. Even in this case, if the operation unit 836a on the upper end side of the light emitting operation member 836 emits light, the reflection on the glass plate 671a may be a problem depending on the diffusion direction and diffusion region of the light of the operation unit 836a. Therefore, it is necessary to provide anti-reflection means 804 as a countermeasure.

Although various structures can be considered as the reflection preventing means 804, the structure can be simplified and the cost can be reduced by using the outer peripheral cover 837 that presses the light emitting operation member 836. Further, it is desirable that the reflection prevention means 804 is arranged so that the upper end side thereof is close to the light emitting portion side in question, such as providing the rear wall portion 837c on the operation portion 836a side in a forward tilted state, thereby increasing the size. Can be prevented.

The light emitting means 811 may be something other than the LED 836c, such as a 7-segment type light emitting display means. Further, the operation unit 836a may be arranged lower than the lower side of the game area 323 so as not to overlap the game area 323 of the game board 313 in the front-rear direction. Further, the reflection preventing means 804 may be provided separately from the outer peripheral cover 837.

FIG. 160 illustrates a seventh embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 160, the pachinko machine 300 includes an effect operation means 835 for effect operation, which is arranged at an upper center portion of the front overhang unit 669 so as to be inclined forward. The effect operating means 835 includes a light emitting operation member 836 that can be pressed in the tilting direction, and an outer peripheral cover 837 that presses the outer circumference of the light emitting operating member 836 on the front overhang unit 669, and includes a game area 323 of the game board 313 and a game area 323 thereof. It is arranged below the glass unit 340 on the front side.

The light emitting operation member 836 is provided with a light emitting body 836e inside the operation unit 836a, and the reflection preventing means 804 for preventing the light from the light emitting body 836e from being reflected on the glass plate 671a of the glass unit 340 is a front projecting unit 669. It is provided on the upper surface side. The front overhanging unit 669 is provided with a protruding portion 669a that projects upward and blocks light from the light emitting body 836e to the lower side of the glass unit 340 between the light emitting operating member 836 and the glass unit 340. The reflection prevention means 804 is configured by the protrusion 669a.

In this way, it is also possible to use a part of the front overhanging unit 669 to provide the reflection preventing means 804 separately from the effect operating means 835. Therefore, whether the reflection preventing means 804 is provided as a part of the effect operating means 835 or the reflection preventing means 804 is provided separately from the effect operating means 835 depends on the structure of the front overhang unit 669, the effect operating means 835, and the like. It may be decided appropriately accordingly.

Although the fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the fifth to seventh embodiments, and various modifications are made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible. When the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 300, the gaming machine main body may be composed of an outer frame 301, or may be composed of an outer frame 301 and a front frame 302. Of course, it may be composed of other than these.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the anti-reflection measures of the pachinko machine 300 are illustrated, but the anti-reflection measures include not only the ball game machines such as the pachinko machine 300 but also various slot machines and the like. The same can be applied to a gaming machine.

For example, when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 300, the gaming area 323 is targeted at the front side of the gaming board 313 mounted on the gaming machine main body side such as the front frame, as illustrated in the fifth to seventh embodiments. , The reflection on the visual recognition plate 671a such as the glass plate arranged on the front side of the game board 313 becomes a problem. In the case of a rotary reel type slot machine, a liquid crystal display type slot machine, etc., the game area 323 corresponds to the front side of the rotary reel, the liquid crystal display screen, etc., and a visual recognition plate 671a such as a glass plate arranged in front of the rotary reel type slot machine. The reflection on the image becomes a problem.

Further, the object of preventing reflection on the visual recognition plate 671a is generally the light from the light emitting means 811 (light emitting unit) arranged at the lower front side of the visual recognition plate 671a, but the light is the light of the operation effect means 678. In addition to the light from the inside, the light on the surface side may be used. For example, when there is a glass or other mirror-like reflecting portion in the lower part of the front side of the visual recognition plate 671a, it is conceivable that the light from the external light source is reflected to the visual recognition plate 671a side by the reflecting portion. The reflection of light may be prevented.

Further, as the reflection preventing means 804 for preventing the light from the light emitting means 811 from being reflected on the visual field 671a, a blocking wall for blocking the light reaching the player's field of view between the light emitting means 811 and the visual field 671a. However, the reflection preventing means 804 may use a part of the members attached to the light emitting means 811, or another member may be used on the upper surface side of the front overhanging unit 669. May be good.

The reflection prevention means 804 completely blocks the light from the light emitting means 811 like a blocking wall, and even if a dimming means for dimming to a weak light that does not interfere with the player's game is adopted. Good. In this case, the light that has passed through the dimming means is reflected on the visual recognition plate 671a, but there is no particular problem because the light does not interfere with the game of the player. As the dimming means, those that diffuse the light from the light source, those that polarize the light from the light source, and the like can be considered. Therefore, the anti-reflection means 804 weakens the strong light that interferes with the player's game, but it is sufficient to allow the reflection of weak light that does not interfere with the player's game. Is.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, a case where the reflection of light from the light emitting means 811 below the operation unit 813a is prevented by the reflection prevention means 804 is illustrated. However, when the uppermost operating unit 813a emits light due to diffused reflection or the like, the light from the uppermost operating unit 813a is also subject to the reflection prevention measure. However, even when the uppermost operating unit 813a emits light from the light from the inside, it is not always necessary to prevent the reflection when the light is weak.

It is desirable that the upper side of the reflection prevention wall 804a is inclined toward the light emitting means 811 in order to block the light from the light emitting means 811. However, the reflection prevention wall 804a does not necessarily have to be inclined toward the light emitting means 811 side, and is inclined in the opposite direction. You may try to do it. When the operation unit 813a is spherical as in the fifth embodiment, it is desirable to have a shape that embraces the operation unit 813a from the viewpoint of its structure. Further, it is sufficient for the reflection prevention wall 804a to be within a narrow range of the rear portion of the operation unit 813a, but considering that the posture of the player moves to the left and right, both left and right sides from the rear portion of the operation unit 813a. It is desirable to arrange in the predetermined range of.

In a gaming machine provided with a protruding unit such as a front overhanging unit 669, when the front supporting portion 794 is provided in the lower front side of the protruding unit, the front supporting portion 794 cooperates with the main body supporting portion 795 on the game machine main body side to play a game. Anything that can stand up the machine body will do. In a projecting unit having a substantially triangular plan view with the front end side as the apex, such as the front overhanging unit 669, the front side support portion 794 has a narrow left-right width, but when the front end side of the protruding unit has a long left-right width, the protrusion thereof. The front support portion 794 may be provided at a substantially central portion on the front end side of the unit, or may be provided on both the left and right sides. Further, the front support portion 794 may be provided in a long strip shape in the left-right direction. The front support portion 794 may be provided in the middle of the protruding unit in the front-rear direction.

The front support portion 794 may be provided at substantially the same height as the main body side support portion 795. When the bottom wall 793 of the projecting unit is inclined forward, the inclined portion 793b may be provided on the front side of the horizontal portion 793a, or the bottom wall 793 may be inclined so as to be inclined from the rear end side.

161 to 177 exemplify the eighth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, the second side unit 850 of this embodiment has a vertically long right side protruding portion (left and right one side protruding portion) 851 arranged on the right side of the game area 323 and projecting to the front side. , A horizontally long upper protruding portion 852 arranged on the upper side of the game area 323 and projecting to the front side is provided in a substantially L-shape in front view.

As shown in FIGS. 164 to 174, the right protruding portion 851 is provided with the first to third light emitting display units 866, 868, 870 and the vibration type effect means 881, and the upper protruding portion 852 is provided with the first , The second light emitting display unit 867, 869 and the ventilation effect means 855 are provided.

The second side unit 850 is shaped by the front view side of the right side protrusion 851 and the upper side protrusion 852, and forms approximately half of the Ishigaki-type well opening with a narrow frontage and a wide interior. The modeling effect is such that you can play a game while looking into the dark well mouth.

The right-side protruding portion 851 and the upper protruding portion 852 are made of synthetic resin having substantially the entire outer peripheral side having a light-shielding property, and the light emitting display portions 866 to 870 dispersedly arranged on the outer peripheral surface thereof are necessary. It is designed to emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166 and 172 to 174, each protrusion 851 and 852 has a hollow shape including a front wall 835,854, an inner wall 856,857, and an outer wall 858,859. The outer walls 858 and 859 arranged on the opposite sides of the protruding portions 851 and 852 from the game area 323 have major portions excluding the connecting portion 8589 of both protruding portions 851 and 852. It is flat.

Further, the outer walls 858 and 859 of the connecting portions 8589 of both protruding portions 851 and 852 are formed in an arc shape on the front side. Further, inside the connecting portion 8589 of both protruding portions 851 and 852, a housing recess 860a for accommodating the upper speaker 666b mounted on the door base 322 side and an opening 860b for the upper speaker 666b are provided in the front and rear. There is.

On the other hand, the inner walls 856 and 857 arranged on the game area 323 side of each of the projecting portions 851 and 852 have the rear side located near the outer circumference of the game area 323 and the front side projecting inside the game area 323. The right-side protruding portion 851 has a front left-right width 851a larger than the rear left-right width 851b, and the upper protruding portion 852 has a front-side vertical width 852a larger than the rear-side vertical width 852b.

That is, the inner walls 856 and 857 of the protrusions 851 and 852 are arranged on the rear side along the outer peripheral edge of the game area 323 so as not to limit the game area 323, whereas the front side is the rear portion. Inclined portions 856a, 857a and / or bulging portions 856b, 857b that bulge inward from the side to the front wall 835,854 are provided, and the front side is located inside the rear side and the game area 323. It is arranged so as to protrude inward.

As described above, in the second side unit 850, since the width of the rear side of each of the protrusions 851 and 852 is small and the width of the front side is large, the protrusions 851 and 851 while securing a sufficient game area 323 are secured. It is possible to make the width of the front side of the 852 sufficiently thick, and there is a lot of variation by appropriately selecting the uneven shape of the inner wall 856,857 and the front wall 835,854 as compared with the conventional flat shape. It is possible to adopt a modeled object.

In particular, since each of the protruding portions 851,852 has inclined portions 856a, 857a and / or bulging bulging portions 856b, 857b that incline toward the front walls 835,854 on the inner walls 856,857 on the game area 323 side. As shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b), the player P during the game can easily visually recognize the modeled objects on the inner wall 856 side of the right side protrusion 851 and the inner wall 857 side of the upper protrusion 852.

Moreover, since the player P plays the game in a state of being surrounded by the right side protrusion 851 and the upper side protrusion 852, the inner wall of the modeled object is in harmony with the effect image displayed in the game area 323 of the game board 313. By providing the 856 and 857, it is possible to produce a molding effect with a rich sense of presence, and it is possible to easily improve the design and design as compared with the conventional case.

As shown in FIGS. 161 and 163, the second side unit 850 is provided with a substantially front view L-shaped reinforcing member 861 on the rear end side, and a right protruding portion 851 is provided on the front surface of the reinforcing member 861. and an upper projecting portion 852 is mounted, the fifth embodiment similarly to the positioning means 733 and 734, via the engaging means 735 to 73 7及beauty fixing means 738 to 740, the door base 322 of the front door 306 It is detachably fixed to the front side of the door. Further, the upper protruding portion 852 is structurally continuous with the upper side of the first side unit 668a.

Each of the protrusions 851 and 852 includes a vertically elongated or horizontally elongated front support 862, 863 and a rear support 864, 865 arranged at predetermined intervals in the front-rear direction, and the front support 862, 863 and the rear. The outer walls 858,859 arranged on the opposite side of the game area 323 with respect to the supports 864 and 865, and the inner walls 856 arranged on the game area 323 side with respect to the front supports 862, 863 and the rear supports 864 and 865. , 857, and a front wall 835,854 having a substantially U-shaped cross section, which is arranged on the front side of the front support 862,863 and whose rear side fits outside the outer walls 858,859 and the inner walls 856,857.

The outer walls 858,859, inner walls 856,857, and front walls 835,854 are detachably fixed to the front supports 862,863 and the rear supports 864,865 with screws or the like. Further, the front support 862, 863 and the rear support 864, 865 are provided with boss portions 862c, 863c, 864c, 865c that come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

Each of the protrusions 851 and 852 is provided with a plurality of first light emitting display units 866 and 867 on the front walls 835 and 854, and a plurality of second light emitting display units 868 and 869 on the inner walls 856 and 857, respectively, and the right side protrusions. A third light emitting display unit 870 is provided on the outer wall 858 of the 851. Inside each of the protrusions 851 and 852, the first to third LEDs 871 to 875 are mounted on both front and rear surfaces, and the LED boards 876 and 877 arranged on the front end side of each internal space and the rear side of the LED boards 876 and 877. The second light guide plate (second light guide means) 878, 879 arranged along the inner wall 856,857 corresponding to the second light emission display unit 868, 869, and the third light emission display unit behind the LED substrate 876. A third light guide plate (third light guide means) 880 arranged along the outer wall 858 corresponding to the 870 is provided.

The third LED 875 and the third light guide plate 880 are only the right side protrusion 851. Further, a vibration type effect means 881 is provided below the right side protrusion 851 so as to straddle both the inner and outer sides of the inner wall 856.

In this way, the LED boards 876,877 having the first LEDs 871,872 for the first light emitting display unit 866,867 on the front wall 8353,854 side on the front side are arranged on the front side, and on the rear side of the LED boards 876,877. The second LED 873, 874 for the second light emitting display unit 868, 869 on the inner wall 856,857 side and the third LED 875 for the third light emitting display unit 870 on the outer wall 858 side are provided, and the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 are provided. By guiding the light to the second and third light emitting display units 868, 869, 870 via the second and third light guide plates 878, 879, 880, all of the first to third LEDs 871 to 875 are LED substrates 876. Since it can be attached to the 877, the structure is simple, and it can be carried out easily and inexpensively.

The front surface of the front walls 835 and 854 is substantially flat, and the first light emitting display unit 866,867 is provided on the front surface thereof. The first light emitting display unit 866,867 has through holes 866a, 867a in the front-rear direction formed in the front walls 835,854 and light transmitting portions 866b, 867b fitted in the through holes 866a, 867a. The light transmitting portions 866b and 867b emit light by the light from the first LEDs 871 and 872.

The first light emitting display unit 866 of the right side protruding portion 851 includes a main display unit 866A for displaying the model name of the pachinko machine and a sub-display unit 866B for streak or crack-like decoration arranged around the main display unit 866A. There is. A plurality of main display units 866A are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the vertical direction for each character of the model name. Further, the sub display unit 866B is appropriately arranged in the peripheral portion of the main display unit 866A. The main display unit 866A may display the model name as one unit.

The inner walls 856,857 and outer walls 858,859 of the respective protrusions 851 and 852 have a modeling protrusion 856c that exhibits a decorative pattern such as a stone wall, as illustrated in FIGS. 165 and 166 as the inner wall 856 of the right side protrusion 851. It has a modeling recess 856d formed between the modeling protrusions 856c. The modeling protrusion 856c and the modeling recess 856d imitate the stone walls inside and outside the well, and the unevenness of the modeling protrusion 856c and the modeling recess 856d is larger on the inner wall 856,857 side than the outer walls 858 and 859. is there.

The inner walls 856,857 and outer walls 858,859 are provided with a plurality of streaky or crack-shaped second and third light emitting display units 868 to 870 in the modeling recess 856d. Since the vibration type effect means 881 is arranged below the inner wall 856, the second light emitting display unit 868 is dispersedly arranged on the upper side and the rear side thereof while avoiding the vibration type effect means 881.

The second and third light emitting display units 868 to 870 include through holes 868a to 870a formed through the inner walls 856 and 857 and the outer wall 858, and light transmitting portions 868b to 870 fitted into the through holes 868a to 870a. At least a part of each light transmitting portion 868b to 870 is streaked, cracked, etc. by the light guided from the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 through the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880. It is designed to emit light as appropriate according to the light emitting mode of.

The front supports 862 and 863 are made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and the front wall portions 862a and 863a arranged close to the rear side of the front wall portions 835 and 854, and the front wall portions 862a and 863a. Peripheral wall portions 862b and 863b projecting from the outer periphery to the rear side are integrally provided, and light transmitting portions 866b and 867b projecting to the front side are integrally provided on the front surface of the front wall portions 862a and 863a.

The light transmitting portion 866b of the main display portion 866A has a hollow shape having a recess formed on the rear side, and a diffused reflecting portion is provided on the front surface of the recess. A diffused reflection unit and a ridge wall surrounding the diffused reflection unit are provided corresponding to the light transmitting portion 866b of the sub-display unit 866B. The light transmitting portions of the main display unit 866A and the sub display unit 866B may be in a solid state or may be hollow with a recess on the back side.

The LED substrates 876 and 877 are in contact with the rear ends of the peripheral wall portions 862b and 863b and are detachably fixed to the front supports 862 and 863. On the front surface of the LED substrate 876,877, a plurality of first LEDs 871,872 are mounted corresponding to the first light emitting display units 866, 867 so as to irradiate the first light emitting display units 866,867 with light from behind. Has been done.

Further, on the back surface of the LED substrate 876, 877, a plurality of LED substrates 878,879 are spaced vertically at predetermined intervals along the edge thereof so as to face the light receiving portions 878a, 879a at the front end of the second light guide plate 878,879. The second LED 873, 874 of the above is attached. On the back surface of the LED substrate 876, a plurality of third LEDs 875 are mounted at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction along the edge thereof so as to face the light receiving portion 880a at the front end of the third light guide plate 880. ..

By mounting the first to third LEDs 871 to 875 on the LED boards 876 and 877 in this way, the number of LED boards 876 and 877 can be reduced. Further, by arranging the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 at the ends of the LED substrates 876 and 877, the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 are arranged so as to be close to the inner walls 856 and 857 and the outer walls 858 and 859. It is possible to structurally simplify the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880.

A partition body 882 is interposed between the LED substrate 876 and the front wall portion 862a of the front support 862. The partition body 882 includes a partition wall 882a that partitions each main display unit 866A of the first light emitting display unit 866 from the sub-display unit 866B and the like around the main display unit 866A, and the main display of light from the first LED 871 corresponding to the main display unit 866A. It is designed to prevent diffusion to other than the portion 866A. Therefore, in the first light emitting display unit 866, it is possible to make the main display unit 866A emit light brighter than the sub display unit 866B.

The partition body 882 is detachably fixed to either one of the LED substrate 876 and the front support 862 with screws or the like, and both front and rear ends of the partition wall 882a are in contact with or close to the LED substrate 876 and the front wall portion 862a. ing.

Since the front support 862 and the partition 882 are vertically elongated, the LED substrate 876 arranged vertically correspondingly is divided into two in the vertical direction, and the opposing ends thereof are connected via a connector or the like. Has been done. Then, the partition body 882 is mounted on the rear side of the front support 862, and the LED substrate 876 is mounted on the rear side of the front support 862 with the partition body 882 interposed therebetween. The LED substrate 876 may be integrated in the vertical direction, or may be divided into three or more in the vertical direction.

The second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 are made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and the inner and outer walls 856 to 859 are in contact with or close to the inner surface of the molding recess 856d of the inner and outer walls 856 to 859. It is formed into a curved shape along the overall curved shape of the above, and is detachably fixed to the inside of the inner and outer walls 856 to 859 with screws or the like. The second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 are provided with light receiving portions 878a to 880a facing the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 on the front end side, and the inner and outer walls 856 to 859 are provided with a second light receiving portion on one side surface. The second and third light transmitting units 868b to 870b for the third light emitting display unit 868 to 870 are provided on the other side surface on the opposite side, and the second and third light guide units 883 to 885 are provided on the front and back sides, respectively. Has been done. The second and third light guide units 883 to 885 have a shape including a bent portion according to the shape of the second and third light emitting display units 868 to 870, and the depth and width of the V groove differ depending on the position. There is.

The second and third light transmitting units 868b to 870b for the second and third light emitting display units 868 to 870 project integrally from the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 to the inner and outer walls 856 to 859. It is formed by articles. The second and third light guide units 883 to 885 display the light entering the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 from the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 via the light receiving units 878a to 880a. It is for guiding light to the second and third light transmitting portions 868b to 870b of the portions 868 to 870, and is a reflection groove (reflection portion) such as a V groove formed in the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880. ).

For example, as shown in FIG. 166, the second light guide plate 878 has a corresponding region 878aa in the vertical direction corresponding to the light receiving portion 878a on the front end side, and a food that protrudes from the corresponding region 878a on both the upper and lower sides or one of the upper and lower sides. A protruding area 878ab is provided, and a second light emitting display unit 868 is provided on the rear side of the second light guide plate 878 so as to protrude to both upper and lower sides or one of the upper and lower sides so as to straddle both areas 878aa and 878ab. Has been done.

Therefore, the second light guide plate 878 guides the light from the second LED 873 to the second light emitting display unit 868 of the corresponding region 878a corresponding to the light receiving portion 878a, as well as both sides in the vertical direction from the corresponding region 878aa. Or, it is configured to guide the second light emitting display unit 868 arranged in the protrusion region 878ab separated from one of them.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, the second light guide unit 883 has a right-angled portion 883b that is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis direction of the second LED 873 when viewed from the thickness direction of the second light guide plate 878. It is provided in a bent shape including an inclined or bent portion 883a that is inclined or bent in the three-dimensional directions of the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis.

For example, as shown in FIG. 176, when a parallel light beam is incident on the second light guide unit 883 from the second LED 873, the light in the direction indicated by 883b1 incident on the perpendicular portion 883b of the second light guide unit 883 is emitted. As shown in FIG. 177 (a), the right-angled portion 883b reflects the light in the direction indicated by the arrow 883b2 at a substantially right angle in the plate thickness direction. Therefore, the portion of the second emission display unit 868 corresponding to the right-angled portion 883b can be made to emit bright light.

At the same time, the light in the 883a1 direction incident on the inclined or bent portion 883a of the second light guide portion 883 is the inclined surface or bent of the inclined or bent portion 883a as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177 (b). It reflects in the three-dimensional direction of 883a2 on the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis depending on the surface. Therefore, while the second light guide plate 883 and the second light emitting display unit 868 corresponding to the plate thickness direction reflect light by diffuse reflection or the like to emit light, the light is emitted by 1 in the plate surface direction within the plate thickness of the second light guide plate 878. While reflecting light multiple times or multiple times to guide the light toward the plate surface, the specific portion of the second light emitting display unit 868 at the arrival position of the light can be partially emitted in a linear or other light emitting mode.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177 (b), when the light incident on the second light guide plate 878 in the direction indicated by the arrow 883a1 is reflected by the V-groove-shaped inclined or bent portion 883a, the inclined or bent portion thereof. Since the 883a is inclined or bent in the three-dimensional direction with respect to the optical axis, the light is reflected in the second light guide plate 878 in the 883a2 direction by the inclined or bent portion 883a.

Then, this light is sequentially guided to the second light guide unit 883 corresponding to the specific portion of the second light emitting display unit 868 while being reflected once or a plurality of times in the second light guide plate 878, and the specific portion is guided to the specific portion. The second light guide unit 883 corresponding to the above is reflected to a specific portion of the second light emitting display unit 868 to emit light at the specific portion. Therefore, of the second light emitting display unit 868, the portion irradiated with the light reflected in the three-dimensional direction by the inclined or bent portion 883a can be slightly emitted with a weak brightness.

In this way, the second and third light emitting display units 868 to 870 can change the light emitting state depending on the light emitting position. Therefore, as compared with the case where the second and third light emitting display units 868 to 870 emit light with substantially uniform brightness, it is possible to produce light emission suitable for the modeled object of the inner and outer walls 856 to 859 depending on the strength of the light emitting state. is there. Further, even when there is an obstacle such as the vibration type effect means 881, the light from the second LED 873 can be guided by bypassing the obstacle, so that there is an advantage that the structure can be simplified.

The plurality of second light guide units 883 around the vibration type effect means 881 guide the light to the second light emitting display unit 868 on the back side of the vibration type effect means 881. It is arranged in the circumferential direction along the plate surface direction of. Further, in addition to forming the second light guide unit 883 in a bent shape, the second light guide plate 878 is formed in a curved shape between the light receiving unit 878a and the second light emitting display unit 868 which is a light guide target, and the second light guide plate 878 is formed in a curved shape. The light guide may be guided while being reflected a plurality of times in the light guide plate 878 in the plate thickness direction. The same can be applied to the second and third light emitting display units 869 and 870.

As shown in FIGS. 167 to 171, the vibration type effect means 881 is arranged on the mounting base 888 mounted from the inside of the lower opening 860b of the inner wall 856 and the game area 323 side of the mounting base 888 and in the vertical direction. The effect body 890 is pivotally supported in the front-rear direction around the support shaft 889, the vibrating means 891 for the effect body 890 arranged inside the mounting base 888, and the light emitting display unit provided on the mounting base 888. It includes an 892, an LED substrate 894 having an LED 893 for a light emitting display unit 892 and arranged inside the mounting base 888, and a touch sensor 895 mounted inside the mounting base 888.

The effect body 890 is a model of the fingers, and is arranged with the fingers on the front side. The bracket 890b is pivotally attached to the bearing portion 888a of the mounting base 888 by the support shaft 888 on the back side of the mounting base 888, and is supported. It can vibrate in the left-right direction around the shaft 889. The effector 890 is provided with a conductor layer 890a on its surface, such as by being metal-plated. In addition, instead of the conductor layer 890a such as metal plating, a conductor such as metal may be provided on a part of the surface.

The vibrating means 891 includes a vibrating table 896, a vibrating motor 897 fixed to the vibrating table 896 via a fixture 897a, and an eccentric weight 899 fixed to the rotating shaft 898 in the front-rear direction of the vibrating motor 897. When the eccentric weight 899 rotates around the rotation shaft 898, the shaking table 896 vibrates back and forth.

The shaking table 896 is configured in a U shape so as to straddle the LED substrates 894 arranged in the vertical direction, and the front and rear legs 896a are integrally attached to the effect body 890 via a pair of vertical connecting shafts 900 in the vertical direction. It is connected. The vertical vibration of the shaking table 896 is regulated by the support shaft 889. The connecting shaft 900 is inserted into the through hole 901 of the mounting base 888.

An urging means 902 for urging the effect body 890 to the mounting base 888 side is provided between the mounting base 888 and the shaking base 896. The urging means 902 includes a fixed shaft 893b that protrudes from the mounting base 888 toward the shaking base 896 and is inserted into the through hole 893a of the leg portion 896b, and the mounting base 888 and the shaking base 896 that are fitted into the fixed shaft 893b. It is equipped with a spring 893c interposed between the and.

The light emitting display unit 892 is arranged so as to sandwich the finger portions of the effect body 890 from both the upper and lower sides, and is long in the front-rear direction. Each light emitting display unit 892 has a through hole 892a formed in a through hole in the mounting base 888 and a light transmitting portion 892b fitted in the through hole 892a, and emits light by the light of the LED 893 from the LED substrate 894. It has become like. The LED substrate 894 is vertically elongated in the vertical direction corresponding to each light emitting display unit 892, and both upper and lower ends are attached to the hollow support 903 via the buffer means 904.

The support 903 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and the light guide wall 903a fixed to the inside of the mounting base 888 and the peripheral wall portion 903b protruding from the light guide wall 903a toward the LED substrate 894 are integrated. Be prepared for. The light guide wall 903a is provided with a light transmitting portion 892b that projects integrally. A recess is provided behind the light transmitting portion 892b.

The buffer means 904 is for buffering the effect body 890 by the vibration means 891 so that the vibration is not transmitted to the LED substrate 894 side, and is a pair of rubbers or the like arranged on both sides of the LED substrate 894. 904a, a mounting boss 904c that protrudes from the bracket 904b on the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 903b and is inserted into the shock absorber 904a with the LED substrate 894 sandwiched therein, and a mounting tool that mounts the shock absorber 904a to the mounting boss 904c. It is equipped with a 904d. By providing the LED board 894 on the mounting base 888 via the buffer means 904 in this way, it is possible to prevent damage to the LED board 894 side due to the vibration of the vibrating means 891.

The touch sensor 895 is for detecting when the player touches the conductor layer 890a of the effect body 890 and operating the blower effect means 855 for a predetermined time, and is used by a capacitance type or the like. Has been done. The touch sensor 895 is fitted in an accommodating portion 895a integrally formed inside the mounting base 888, and is electrically connected to the conductor layer 890a of the effect body 890 via the harness 895b.

As shown in FIG. 174, the blower effect means 855 is provided inside the upper protrusion 852 on the side opposite to the upper speaker 666b, and the wind from the blower effect means 855 is directed to the inner wall 857. An air outlet 905 for blowing air to the side is provided. The blower effect means 855 includes a blower means 906 such as a sirocco fan, and is detachably fixed to a mounting portion 907 integrally formed with the second light guide plate 879. The second light guide plate 879 is provided with a blower passage 908 that communicates the wind discharge side of the blower means 906 with the blower port 905 side. The air outlet 905 is provided with a net 909 for preventing the insertion of an unauthorized member.

When the touch sensor 895 detects that the player touches the vibrating effect body 890, the control unit of the blower effect means 855 causes the blower effect means 855 to operate for a predetermined time by a signal from the touch sensor 895. It is configured. In addition, when the touch sensor 895 detects, the blowing effect means 855 may stop blowing.

FIG. 178 illustrates a ninth embodiment of the present invention. The right-side protruding portion 851 and the like of the second side unit 850 can also be configured as shown in FIG. 178. The second side unit 850 is provided with a first light emitting display unit 866 on the front wall 853 and a second light emitting display unit 868 on the inner wall 856, respectively. The LED substrate 876 is arranged inside the right-side protruding portion 851 so as to face the front wall 853 on the rear side of the second light emitting display portion 868.

A first LED 871 for the first light emitting display unit 866 and a second LED 873 for the second light emitting display unit 868 are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 894. A light guide tube 910 is provided between the LED substrate 894 and the first light emitting display unit 866 so that the light from the first LED 871 does not leak to other than the first light emitting display unit 866.

The second LED 873 is arranged at the end of the LED substrate 876, and a light guide plate 922 is provided inside the inner wall 856 corresponding to the second LED 873. The inner wall 856 and the light guide plate 922 are inclined so that the front side is on the game area 323 side, and the light transmission plate 922 is integrally provided with the light transmission unit 868b for the second light emitting display unit 868, and also with the light transmission unit 868b. A second light guide portion 883 such as a V groove is provided on the opposite side.

As described above, the LED substrate 894 can be arranged on the rear side inside the right protruding portion 851. In that case, since the first and second light emitting display units 866 and 868 are both on the front side of the LED substrate 894, the first and second LEDs 871 and 873 may be mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 894.

FIG. 179 illustrates a tenth embodiment of the present invention. The right-side protruding portion 851 and the like of the second side unit 850 can also be configured as shown in FIG. 179. The second side unit 850 is provided with a first light emitting display unit 866 on the front wall 853 and a second light emitting display unit 868 on the inner wall 856, respectively. The LED substrate 876 is arranged inside the inner wall 856 so as to face the second light emitting display unit 868 and substantially parallel to the inner wall 856 inside the right projecting portion 851, and the LED substrate 876 is arranged on the second light emitting display unit 868 side. 2LED873 is installed.

The first light emitting display unit 866 of the front wall 853 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 876. At the front end of the LED substrate 876, a first LED 871 is mounted on the side opposite to the game area 323, and a light guide plate 923 that guides the light from the first LED 871 to the first light emitting display unit 866 side is on the rear side of the front wall 853. It is arranged in parallel close to. The light guide plate 923 has a light guide portion 924 such as a V groove.

As described above, the LED substrate 894 can be arranged inside the inner wall 856 of the right-side protruding portion 851. The inner wall 856 and the LED substrate 876 may be provided in an inclined shape as in the ninth embodiment.

180 to 183 exemplify the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (d), the second side unit 850 has four types of models A to D, from a general-purpose model to a dedicated model, and the second of the two. The case where the side unit 850 is mounted on the front surface of the front door 306 to manufacture a specific type of pachinko machine 300 will be illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 181, the second side unit 850 has a unit board 911 such as an LED board 894, and the unit board 911 is an identification information storage unit that stores the identification information of the second side unit 850. 912 is provided. As shown in FIG. 183, the identification information storage unit 912 stores identification information that can individually identify the four types of models A to D. The identification information storage unit 912 is connected to the effect control board 914 via a relay board 913 or the like on the main body side of the pachinko machine 300.

In addition to executing control of the effect image of the normal game, the effect control board 914 stores the unique information of the second side unit 850 to be mounted on the front door 306 of the pachinko machine 300 of the model. A collation unit (determination unit) that determines the suitability of the second side unit 850 by collating the storage unit 915 with the unique information stored in the unique information storage unit 915 and the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit 912. ) 916, and when a collation result indicating that the second side unit 850 is different is obtained, an error display of the second side unit 850 is displayed on the display screen of the image display means 917 of the game board 313. It has become like.

If such a configuration is adopted, for example, in a game hall, when the second side unit 850 is mounted after being removed for inspection or the like, even if the second side unit 850 is erroneously mounted, that fact It is possible to prevent things such as being left unknowingly.

For example, if the power of the pachinko machine 300 is turned on after the second side unit 850 is mounted, the collating unit 916 reads out the identification information of the second side unit 850 actually mounted and stores it in the unique information storage unit 915. Collate with the unique information provided. Then, if the second side unit 850 is different from the original one, the image display means 917 displays an error of the second side unit 850. Therefore, even though the second side unit 850 is wrong, it is possible to prevent the game from being played without knowing the fact.

In displaying various images on the display screen of the image display means 917, as shown in FIG. 184, the layer 918 of the normal game image, the layer 919 of the normal error display, and the error display layer 920 of the second side unit 850 are displayed. The priority of each layer 918 to 920 is set so that the priority becomes higher in the order of. In this way, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a display error of the second side unit 850 at the earliest stage after the power is turned on.

Although the eighth to eleventh embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the eighth to eleventh embodiments, and various modifications are made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible. When a side unit 850 projecting from the side of the game area 323 to the front side is provided on the front surface of the game machine main body, it is sufficient for the side unit 850 if the width of the front side is larger than the width of the rear side. .. Therefore, in that case, the width of the front side is generally made larger than the width of the rear side due to the inclination or bulge toward the game area 323, but the inclination or bulge toward the side opposite to the game area 323. It is also possible to do so.

It is desirable that the front side of the inner surface of the side unit 850 on the game area 323 side protrudes inward of the game area 323 side rather than the rear side. The side unit 850 may include a vertically elongated right protruding portion 851 and / or a horizontally elongated upper protruding portion 852.

The LED substrate 876 may be arranged on either the front side or the rear side of the light emitting display unit 892. Further, it is desirable that the LED corresponding to the light guide plate is provided near the edge of the LED substrate 876, but when the light guide plate is bent, the LED corresponding to the light guide plate may be arranged in the intermediate portion of the LED substrate 876. Good. The light guide plate may be colorless or transparent or colored transparent.

It is also possible to provide other movable effect means or the like in place of the vibration type effect means 881. As the light guide means, a light guide plate is generally used, but a light guide plate having a shape other than the light guide plate may be used.

34 Production button (operation means)
35 Cross operating means (operating means)
45 Base plate (game member)
47 Central display frame unit (game member)
49 Grand Prize Unit (Game Parts)
53 First special symbol display means (symbol display means)
54 Second special symbol display means (symbol display means)
56 First special symbol starting means (starting means)
57 Second special symbol starting means (starting means)
60 Image display means 60a Display screen 74 Window frame (game member)
75a 1st possible 34 Moving body (movable body)
76a Second movable body (movable body)
77a Third movable body (movable body)
78a 4th movable body (movable body)
114 Directed design 114a Design image 114b Decorative image 116a Volume adjustable notification image (notification image)
116b Light intensity adjustable notification image (notification image)
117a Volume setting image 117b Light intensity setting image 118a Menu display possible Notification image (notification image)
118b Menu image 120 Power saving mode notification image 138 Special start port check processing means (start detection processing means)
139 Special random number storage means (random number storage means)
142 Extraordinary Profit State Generating Means (Profit State Generating Means)
161 Hold pedestal image 163 Error notification image B1 First fixed concealment area (first display area)
B2 2nd fixed concealment area (1st display area)
B3 3rd fixed concealment area (1st display area)
B4 4th fixed concealment area (1st display area)
B5 5th fixed concealment area (1st display area)
C Movable concealment area (second display area)
D Non-concealed area (third display area)
X1 to 1st hold display image Y1 to 2nd hold display image 301 Outer frame (1st support frame)
302 Front frame (second support frame)
313 Game board 323 Game area 347 Ball tank (frame side component)
353 LED connection board 388 Center display frame (center case)
391 Mounting frame 393 Image display means 394 to 397 Movable effect means 399 Harness cradle (back side holding means)
426 Front member 427 Rear member 453 Display means mounting part 454 Protruding part 462 Insertion / detaching part 467 Side board mounting base (second member, back side pressing means)
499 Fixed engaging part (first member)
546,562,574 Movable effect body 547,564,575 Drive means 611 Guide rail 615 Missing part 616 Restriction part 617 Supporting part 623 Pushing means 625 Pressing guide part 300 Pachinko machine 301 Outer frame (first support frame)
302 Front frame (second support frame)
304 Locking means 306 Front door 310 Decorative member 311 Game board mounting part 313 Game board 322 Door base 323 Game area 328 Upper plate (launching ball storage part)
329 Lower plate (surplus ball storage)
331 Lower decorative cover 340 Glass unit 341 Vertical frame material 342 Vertical frame material 343 Upper horizontal frame material 344 Lower horizontal frame material 387 Guide rail 388 Center case 393 Image display means F Floor surface U Standby position (elevation position)
D Push-in position 645 1st support part 646 2nd support part 647 Front protrusion 666a, 666b Upper speaker 667a, 667b Lower speaker 668a 1st side unit 668b 2nd side unit 669 Front protrusion unit (front protrusion unit)
669a Protruding parts 670a, 670b Protective cover 671a Glass plate (visual plate)
671b Holding frame 688 Release operation means 689 Interlocking mechanism 690 Support plate 699 Fraud prevention edge 702a, 702b Speaker mounting protrusion 713 Internal space 715 Light guide 720 LED
721 LED substrate 722 Light emitting decorative cover 730 Upper protrusion 731 Unit frame 732 Unit reinforcing plate 733 First positioning means 734 Second positioning means 735-737 First to third locking means 738 to 740 First to third fixing means 738c ~ 740c Fixing screw 744,744a Light emitting display unit 745 Wind guiding means 746 Blower means 752 Clamping means 782 First operation panel part 783 Second operation panel part 785 Operation means arrangement part 788a Ball lending operation means 788b Return operation means 788c Ball removal operation Means 789 Cross operating means 791 Light amount adjusting means 791a Top operating key 793 Bottom wall 793a Horizontal part 793b Inclined part 794 Front side support part 795 Main body side support part 796a Island equipment 798 Peripheral cover 799c Perspective part 800c Rear cover part 804 Reflection prevention means 804a Reflection prevention wall 805 Fixed support frame 806 First rotation support means 807 First rotation body (inner rotation body)
808 Second rotation support means 809 Second rotation body (outer rotation body)
810 Rotational drive means 810a Drive motor 813 Effect button (pressing operation body)
813a Operation unit 815 Vibration generating means 815a Vibrating body 815b Vibration motor 815d Eccentric weight 818 Insertion prevention means 819 Gear row 819a First driven gear 819b Second driven gear 819c Drive gear 819d Intermediate gear 824 Fixed support member 827 Reinforcing member 827a Pressing members 828a, 828b 1st position detecting means 829 2nd position detecting means 831 Vibration transmitting means 833 Operation detecting means 835 Directing operating means 836 Light emitting operating member 836d LED substrate 838 Front guiding means 839 Rear guiding means 840 Shielding plate 850 Second side Unit 851 Right side protrusion (left and right side protrusion)
851a, 851b Left and right width 852 Upper protrusion 852a, 852b Vertical width 855,854 Front wall 855 Wind effect means 856,857 Inner wall 856a, 857a Inclined part 856b, 857b Swelling part 861 Reinforcing member 866,867 First light emitting display part 868, 869 Second light emitting display unit 870 Third light emitting display unit 871, 872 First LED
873,874 2nd LED
875 3rd LED
876,877 LED substrate 878,879 Second light guide plate (second light guide means)
880 Third light guide plate (third light guide means)
881 Vibration type effect means 894 LED board 902 Biasing means 912 Identification information storage unit 915 Unique information storage unit 916 Verification unit (judgment unit)
917 Image display means

Claims (2)

It is equipped with a lower unit that protrudes from the lower side of the game machine body to the front side and a launch handle on the left and right.
In a game machine provided with a ball storage unit in the lower unit,
The lower unit has a rear bottom portion arranged at a position lower than the launch handle, and a front inclined bottom portion that inclines forward from the vicinity of the front end of the rear bottom portion to the front upper portion in front of the launch handle. Prepare,
The front inclined bottom, the firing and ground in front of the handle, and characterized in that the ground contact portion of the gaming machine main body, the firing handle is capable of supporting the gaming machine body anteversion self-supporting ungrounded A game machine to play. The game machine main body includes an outer frame and a front frame pivotally attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable.
The front frame comprises the lower unit and the launch handle.
The outer frame is a game machine according to claim 1, characterized in that it comprises the ground portion supporting the game machine main body tilted forward self-supporting with the front inclined bottom.